mikroElektronika mikroBasic PRO for AVR User Manual

mikroBasic PRO for AVR
March 2009.
Reader’s note
DISCLAIMER:
Reader’s Note
mikroBasic PRO for AVR and this manual are owned by mikroElektronika and are protected by copyright law and international copyright treaty. Therefore, you should treat this
manual like any other copyrighted material (e.g., a book). The manual and the compiler
may not be copied, partially or as a whole without the written consent from the mikroEelktronika. The PDF-edition of the manual can be printed for private or local use, but not for
distribution. Modifying the manual or the compiler is strictly prohibited.
HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES:
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR compiler is not fault-tolerant and is not designed, manufactured or intended for use or resale as on-line control equipment in hazardous environments
requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation
or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of the Software could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe
physical or environmental damage ("High Risk Activities"). mikroElektronika and its suppliers
specifically disclaim any express or implied warranty of fitness for High Risk Activities.
LICENSE AGREEMENT:
By using the mikroBasic PRO for AVR compiler, you agree to the terms of this agreement.
Only one person may use licensed version of mikroPascal for 8051 compiler at a time.
Copyright © mikroElektronika 2003 - 2009.
This manual covers mikroBasic PRO for AVR version 1.2 and the related topics. Newer
versions may contain changes without prior notice.
COMPILER BUG REPORTS:
The compiler has been carefully tested and debugged. It is, however, not possible to
guarantee a 100 % error free product. If you would like to report a bug, please contact us at
the address [email protected]. Please include next information in your bug report:
- Your operating system
- Version of mikroBasic PRO for AVR
- Code sample
- Description of a bug
CONTACT US:
mikroElektronika
Voice: + 381 (11) 36 28 830
Fax:
+ 381 (11) 36 28 831
Web:
www.mikroe.com
E-mail: [email protected]
Windows is a Registered trademark of Microsoft Corp. All other trade and/or services marks
are the property of the respective owners.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR Environment
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic PRO for AVR Specifics
CHAPTER 4
AVR Specifics
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR Language Reference
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR Libraries
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Where to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
mikroElektronika Associates License Statement and Limited Warranty . . . . . 4
IMPORTANT - READ CAREFULLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
This license statement and limited warranty constitute a legal agree . . . . . . . 4
ment (“License Agreement”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
LIMITED WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
GENERAL PROVISIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
How to Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Who Gets the License Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
How to Get License Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
After Receving the License Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
CHAPTER 2
IDE Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Main Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
File Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Edit Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Find Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Find In Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Go To Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Regular expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
View Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
File Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Edit Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Advanced Edit Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Find/Replace Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Project Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Build Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
IV
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Table of Contents
Debugger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Styles Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Tools Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Project Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Run Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Tools Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Help Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
IDE Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Customizing IDE Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Docking Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Saving Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Once you have a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Auto Hide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Advanced Code Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Advanced Editor Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Code Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Code Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Parameter Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Code Templates (Auto Complete) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Auto Correct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Spell Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Goto Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Comment / Uncomment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Code Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Routine List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Project Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Project Settings Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Library Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Error Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Memory Usage Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
RAM Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Rx Memory Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Data Memory Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
V
Table of Contents
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Special Function Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Summarizes all Special Funct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
General Purpose Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
ROM Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
ROM Memory Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
ROM Memory Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Procedures Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Procedures Size Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Procedures Locations Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
HTML Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Integrated Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
USART Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
ASCII Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
EEPROM Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
7 Segment Display Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
UDP Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Graphic Lcd Bitmap Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Lcd Custom Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Macro Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Code editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Output settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Regular Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Simple matches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Escape sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Character classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Metacharacters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Metacharacters - Line separators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Metacharacters - Predefined classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Metacharacters - Word boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Metacharacters - Iterators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Metacharacters - Alternatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Examples: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Metacharacters - Subexpressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
VI
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Table of Contents
Metacharacters - Backreferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
mikroBasic PRO for AVR Command Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
New Project Wizard Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Customizing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Edit Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Managing Project Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Add/Remove Files from Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Project Level Defines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Source Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Managing Source Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Creating new source file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Opening an existing file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Printing an open file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Saving file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Saving file under a different name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Closing file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Clean Project Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Clean Project Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Compilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Output Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Assembly View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Compiler Error Messages: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Warning Messages: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Hint Messages: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Software Simulator Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Watch Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Stopwatch Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
RAM Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Software Simulator Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Creating New Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Multiple Library Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
CHAPTER 3
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
VII
Table of Contents
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Basic Standard Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Divergence from the Basic Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Basic Language Exstensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Predefined Globals and Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
SFRs and related constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Math constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Predefined project level defines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Accessing Individual Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Accessing Individual Bits Of Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
sbit type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
bit type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Function Calls from Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Linker Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Directive absolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Directive org . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Built-in Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Lo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Hi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Higher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Highest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Inc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Dec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Delay_us . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Delay_ms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Vdelay_ms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Delay_Cyc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Clock_KHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Clock_MHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
SetFuncCall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Code Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Constant folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Constant propagation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Copy propagation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Value numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
VIII
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Table of Contents
"Dead code" ellimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Stack allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Local vars optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Better code generation and local optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Types Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
CHAPTER 4
Nested Calls Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Important notes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
AVR Memory Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Program Memory (ROM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Data Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Memory Type Specifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
rx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
io . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
sfr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Note: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR Language Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Lexical Elements Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Whitespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Newline Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Whitespace in Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Tokens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Token Extraction Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Literals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Integer Literals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Floating Point Literals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Character Literals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
IX
Table of Contents
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
String Literals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Case Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Uniqueness and Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Identifier Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Punctuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Parentheses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Comma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Colon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Dot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Program Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Organization of Main Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Organization of Other Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Scope and Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Include Clause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Main Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Other Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Interface Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Implementation Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Variables and AVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Functions and Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Calling a function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Calling a procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
X
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Table of Contents
Function Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Example: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Example: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Forward declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Type Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Simple Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Array Declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Constant Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
@ Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Structure Member Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Types Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Implicit Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Promotion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Clipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Explicit Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Operators Precedence and Associativity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Arithmetic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Division by Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Unary Arithmetic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Relational Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Relational Operators in Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Bitwise Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Bitwise Operators Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Logical Operations on Bit Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
The bitwise operators and, or, and xor perform logical oper . . . . . . . . . 148
Unsigned and Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Signed and Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Bitwise Shift Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Boolean Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
XI
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Table of Contents
Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Assignment Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Conditional Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
If Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Nested if statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Select Case Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Nested Case Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Iteration Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
For Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Endless Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
While Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Do Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Jump Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Break and Continue Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Break Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Continue Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Exit Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Goto Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Gosub Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
asm Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Compiler Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Directives #DEFINE and #UNDEFINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Directives #IFDEF, #ELSEIF and #ELSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Predefined Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Linker Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Directive absolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Directive org . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
CHAPTER 6
Hardware AVR-specific Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Miscellaneous Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Library Dependencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
ADC Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
XII
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Table of Contents
ADC_Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
This example code reads a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
CANSPI Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
External dependencies of CANSPI Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
CANSPISetOperationMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
CANSPIGetOperationMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
CANSPIInitialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
CANSPISetBaudRate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
CANSPISetMask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
CANSPISetFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
CANSPIRead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
CANSPIWrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
CANSPI Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
CANSPI_OP_MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
CANSPI_TX_MSG_FLAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
CANSPI_RX_MSG_FLAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
CANSPI_MASK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
CANSPI_FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Compact Flash Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
External dependencies of Compact Flash Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Cf_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Cf_Detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Cf_Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Cf_Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Cf_Read_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Cf_Read_Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Cf_Write_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Cf_Write_Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Cf_Read_Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
XIII
Table of Contents
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Cf_Write_Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Cf_Fat_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Cf_Fat_QuickFormat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Cf_Fat_Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Cf_Fat_Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Cf_Fat_Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Cf_Fat_Rewrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Cf_Fat_Append . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Cf_Fat_Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Cf_Fat_Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Cf_Fat_Set_File_Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Cf_Fat_Get_File_Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Cf_Fat_Get_File_Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Cf_Fat_Get_Swap_File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
EEPROM Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
EEPROM_Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
EEPROM_Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Flash Memory Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
FLASH_Read_Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
FLASH_Read_Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
FLASH_Read_Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
FLASH_Read_Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Graphic Lcd Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
External dependencies of Graphic Lcd Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Glcd_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Glcd_Set_Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Glcd_Set_X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Glcd_Set_Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Glcd_Read_Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
XIV
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Table of Contents
Glcd_Write_Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Glcd_Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Glcd_Dot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Glcd_Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Glcd_V_Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Glcd_H_Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Glcd_Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Glcd_Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Glcd_Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Glcd_Set_Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Glcd_Write_Char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Glcd_Write_Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Glcd_Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Keypad Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Keypad_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Keypad_Key_Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Keypad_Key_Click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Lcd Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
External dependencies of Lcd Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Lcd_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Lcd_Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Lcd_Out_Cp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Lcd_Chr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Lcd_Chr_Cp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Lcd_Cmd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Available Lcd Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Manchester Code Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
External dependencies of Manchester Code Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
XV
Table of Contents
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Man_Receive_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Man_Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Man_Send_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Man_Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Man_Synchro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Man_Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Connection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Multi Media Card Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Secure Digital Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
External dependencies of MMC Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Mmc_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Mmc_Read_Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Mmc_Write_Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Mmc_Read_Cid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Mmc_Read_Csd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Mmc_Fat_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Mmc_Fat_QuickFormat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Mmc_Fat_Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Mmc_Fat_Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Mmc_Fat_Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Mmc_Fat_Rewrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Mmc_Fat_Append . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Mmc_Fat_Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Mmc_Fat_Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Mmc_Fat_Set_File_Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Mmc_Fat_Get_Swap_File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
OneWire Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
External dependencies of OneWire Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Ow_Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
XVI
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Table of Contents
Ow_Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Ow_Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Port Expander Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
External dependencies of Port Expander Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Expander_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Expander_Read_Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Expander_Write_Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Expander_Read_PortA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Expander_Read_PortB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Expander_Read_PortAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Expander_Write_PortA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Expander_Write_PortB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Expander_Write_PortAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Expander_Set_DirectionPortB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
PS/2 Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
External dependencies of PS/2 Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Ps2_Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Ps2_Key_Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Special Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
PWM Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Predefined constants used in PWM library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
PWM_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
XVII
Table of Contents
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
PWM_Set_Duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
PWM_Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
PWM_Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
PWM1_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
PWM1_Set_Duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
PWM1_Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
PWM1_Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
PWM 16 bit Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Predefined constants used in PWM-16bit library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
PWM16bit_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
PWM16bit_Change_Duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
PWM16bit_Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
PWM16bit_Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
The example changes PWM duty ratio continually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
PWM demonstrati . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
RS-485 Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
External dependencies of RS-485 Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
RS485Master_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
RS485Master_Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
RS485Master_Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
RS485Slave_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
RS485Slave_Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
RS485Slave_Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Message format and CRC calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Software I²C Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
External dependencies of Soft_I2C Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Soft_I2C_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
XVIII
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Table of Contents
Soft_I2C_Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Soft_I2C_Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Soft_I2C_Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Soft_I2C_Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Soft_I2C_Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Software SPI Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
External dependencies of Software SPI Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Soft_SPI_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Soft_SPI_Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Soft_SPI_Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Software UART Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
External dependencies of Software UART Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Soft_UART_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Soft_UART_Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Soft_UART_Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Soft_UART_Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Sound Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
External dependencies of Sound Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Sound_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Sound_Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
SPI Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
SPI1_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
SPI1_Init_Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
SPI1_Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
SPI1_Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
XIX
Table of Contents
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
SPI Ethernet Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
External dependencies of SPI Ethernet Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Spi_Ethernet_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Spi_Ethernet_Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Spi_Ethernet_Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Spi_Ethernet_doPacket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Spi_Ethernet_putByte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Spi_Ethernet_putBytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Spi_Ethernet_putConstBytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Spi_Ethernet_putString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Spi_Ethernet_putConstString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Spi_Ethernet_getByte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Spi_Ethernet_getBytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Spi_Ethernet_UserTCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Spi_Ethernet_UserUDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
This code shows h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
SPI Graphic Lcd Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
External dependencies of SPI Graphic Lcd Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
SPI_Glcd_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
SPI_Glcd_Set_Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
SPI_Glcd_Set_Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
SPI_Glcd_Set_X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
SPI_Glcd_Read_Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
SPI_Glcd_Write_Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
SPI_Glcd_Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
SPI_Glcd_Dot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
SPI_Glcd_Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
SPI_Glcd_V_Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
SPI_Glcd_H_Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
SPI_Glcd_Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
SPI_Glcd_Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
SPI_Glcd_Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
XX
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Table of Contents
SPI_Glcd_Set_Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
SPI_Glcd_Write_Char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
SPI_Glcd_Write_Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
SPI_Glcd_Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
The example demonstrates how to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
SPI Lcd Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
External dependencies of SPI Lcd Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
SPI_Lcd_Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
SPI_Lcd_Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
SPI_Lcd_Out_Cp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
SPI_Lcd_Chr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
SPI_Lcd_Chr_Cp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
SPI_Lcd_Cmd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Available SPI Lcd Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
SPI Lcd8 (8-bit interface) Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
External dependencies of SPI Lcd Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
SPI_Lcd8_Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
SPI_Lcd8_Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
SPI_Lcd8_Out_Cp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
SPI_Lcd8_Chr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
SPI_Lcd8_Chr_Cp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
SPI_Lcd8_Cmd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Available SPI Lcd8 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
SPI T6963C Graphic Lcd Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
External dependencies of SPI T6963C Graphic Lcd Library . . . . . . . . 420
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
SPI_T6963C_Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
SPI_T6963C_WriteData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
XXI
Table of Contents
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
SPI_T6963C_WriteCommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
SPI_T6963C_SetPtr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
SPI_T6963C_WaitReady . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
SPI_T6963C_Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
SPI_T6963C_Dot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
SPI_T6963C_Write_Char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
SPI_T6963C_Write_Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
SPI_T6963C_Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
SPI_T6963C_Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
SPI_T6963C_Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
SPI_T6963C_Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
SPI_T6963C_Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
SPI_T6963C_Sprite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
SPI_T6963C_Set_Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
SPI_T6963C_ClearBit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
SPI_T6963C_SetBit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
SPI_T6963C_NegBit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
SPI_T6963C_DisplayGrPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
SPI_T6963C_DisplayTxtPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
SPI_T6963C_SetGrPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
SPI_T6963C_SetTxtPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
SPI_T6963C_PanelFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
SPI_T6963C_GrFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
SPI_T6963C_TxtFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
SPI_T6963C_Cursor_Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
SPI_T6963C_Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
SPI_T6963C_Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
SPI_T6963C_Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
SPI_T6963C_Cursor_Blink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
The following drawing demo tests advanced routines of the S . . . . . . . 436
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
SPI T6963C Graphic Lcd Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
External dependencies of T6963C Graphic Lcd Library . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
T6963C_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
XXII
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Table of Contents
T6963C_WriteData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
T6963C_WriteCommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
T6963C_SetPtr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
T6963C_WaitReady . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
T6963C_Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
T6963C_Dot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
T6963C_Write_Char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
T6963C_Write_Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
T6963C_Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
T6963C_Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
T6963C_Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
T6963C_Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
T6963C_Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
T6963C_Sprite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
T6963C_Set_Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
T6963C_DisplayGrPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
T6963C_DisplayTxtPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
T6963C_SetGrPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
T6963C_SetTxtPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
T6963C_PanelFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
T6963C_GrFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
T6963C_TxtFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
T6963C_Cursor_Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
T6963C_Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
T6963C_Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
T6963C_Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
T6963C_Cursor_Blink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
The following drawing demo tests advanced routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
TWI Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
TWI_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
TWI_Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
TWI_Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
TWI_Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
XXIII
Table of Contents
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
TWI_Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
TWI_Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
TWI_Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
TWI_Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
This code demonstrates use of TWI Library proc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
UART Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
UARTx_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
UARTx_Init_Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
UARTx_Data_Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
UARTx_Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
UARTx_Read_Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
UARTx_Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
UARTx_Write_Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Button Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
External dependencies of Button Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Conversions Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
ByteToStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
ShortToStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
WordToStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
IntToStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
LongintToStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
LongWordToStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
FloatToStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Dec2Bcd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Bcd2Dec16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Dec2Bcd16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Math Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Library Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
XXIV
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Table of Contents
acos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
asin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
atan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
atan2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ceil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
eval_poly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
exp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
fabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
frexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ldexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
log10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
modf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
pow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
sin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
sinh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
sqrt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
tan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
tanh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
String Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Library Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
memchr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
memcmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
memcpy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
memmove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
memset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
strcat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
strchr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
strcmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
strcpy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
strcspn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
strlen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
strncat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
485
485
486
486
486
486
486
486
487
487
487
487
487
487
487
488
488
488
488
488
488
488
489
489
489
490
490
490
491
491
491
491
492
492
492
492
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
XXV
Table of Contents
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
strncmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
strncpy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
strpbrk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
strrchr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
strspn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
strstr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Time Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Time_dateToEpoch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Time_epochToDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Time_dateDiff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
TimeStruct type definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Trigonometry Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
sinE3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
cosE3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
XXVI
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER
1
Introduction to
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR is a powerful, feature-rich development tool for AVR
microcontrollers. It is designed to provide the programmer with the easiest possible solution to developing applications for embedded systems, without compromising performance or control.
1
CHAPTER 1
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Introduction
mikroBasic PRO for AVR IDE
Features
mikroBasic PRO for AVR allows you to quickly develop and deploy complex applications:
- Write your Basic source code using the built-in Code Editor (Code and Parameter
Assistants, Code Folding, Syntax Highlighting, Spell Checker, Auto Correct, Code
Templates, and more.)
- Use included mikroBasic PRO libraries to dramatically speed up the development:
data acquisition, memory, displays, conversions, communication etc.
- Monitor your program structure, variables, and functions in the Code Explorer.
- Generate commented, human-readable assembly, and standard HEX compatible
with all programmers.
- Inspect program flow and debug executable logic with the integrated Software
Simulator.
- Get detailed reports and graphs: RAM and ROM map, code statistics, assembly
listing, calling tree, and more.
- mikroBasic PRO for AVR provides plenty of examples to expand, develop, and use
as building bricks in your projects. Copy them entirely if you deem fit – that’s why
we included them with the compiler.
2
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 1
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Introduction
Where to Start
- In case that you’re a beginner in programming AVR microcontrollers, read carefully
the AVR Specifics chapter. It might give you some useful pointers on AVR constraints,
code portability, and good programming practices.
- If you are experienced in Basic programming, you will probably want to consult
mikroBasic PRO for AVR Specifics first. For language issues, you can always refer
to the comprehensive Language Reference. A complete list of included libraries is
available at mikroBasic PRO for AVR Libraries.
- If you are not very experienced in Basic programming, don’t panic! mikroBasic
PRO for AVR provides plenty of examples making it easy for you to go quickly. We
suggest that you first consult Projects and Source Files, and then start browsing
the examples that you're the most interested in.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
3
CHAPTER 1
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Introduction
MIKROELEKTRONIKA ASSOCIATES LICENSE STATEMENT AND
LIMITED WARRANTY
IMPORTANT - READ CAREFULLY
This license statement and limited warranty constitute a legal agreement (“License
Agreement”) between you (either as an individual or a single entity) and mikroElektronika (“mikroElektronika Associates”) for software product (“Software”) identified
above, including any software, media, and accompanying on-line or printed documentation.
BY INSTALLING, COPYING, OR OTHERWISE USING SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE
TO BE BOUND BY ALL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE LICENSE
AGREEMENT.
Upon your acceptance of the terms and conditions of the License Agreement,
mikroElektronika Associates grants you the right to use Software in a way provided
below.
This Software is owned by mikroElektronika Associates and is protected by copyright law and international copyright treaty. Therefore, you must treat this Software
like any other copyright material (e.g., a book).
You may transfer Software and documentation on a permanent basis provided. You
retain no copies and the recipient agrees to the terms of the License Agreement.
Except as provided in the License Agreement, you may not transfer, rent, lease,
lend, copy, modify, translate, sublicense, time-share or electronically transmit or
receive Software, media or documentation. You acknowledge that Software in the
source code form remains a confidential trade secret of mikroElektronika Associates
and therefore you agree not to modify Software or attempt to reverse engineer,
decompile, or disassemble it, except and only to the extent that such activity is
expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
If you have purchased an upgrade version of Software, it constitutes a single product with the mikroElektronika Associates software that you upgraded. You may use
the upgrade version of Software only in accordance with the License Agreement.
4
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 1
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Introduction
LIMITED WARRANTY
Respectfully excepting the Redistributables, which are provided “as is”, without warranty of any kind, mikroElektronika Associates warrants that Software, once updated and properly used, will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying documentation, and Software media will be free from defects in materials and
workmanship, for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt. Any implied
warranties on Software are limited to ninety (90) days.
mikroElektronika Associates’ and its suppliers’ entire liability and your exclusive
remedy shall be, at mikroElektronika Associates’ option, either (a) return of the price
paid, or (b) repair or replacement of Software that does not meet mikroElektronika
Associates’ Limited Warranty and which is returned to mikroElektronika Associates
with a copy of your receipt. DO NOT RETURN ANY PRODUCT UNTIL YOU HAVE
CALLED MIKROELEKTRONIKA ASSOCIATES FIRST AND OBTAINED A RETURN
AUTHORIZATION NUMBER. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of Software has
resulted from an accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any replacement of Software
will be warranted for the rest of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
whichever is longer.
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
MIKROELEKTRONIKA ASSOCIATES AND ITS SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDED, BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT, WITH REGARD TO SOFTWARE, AND THE PROVISION
OF OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT SERVICES.
IN NO EVENT SHALL MIKROELEKTRONIKA ASSOCIATES OR ITS SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES
FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS AND BUSINESS INFORMATION, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION, OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS) ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE SOFTWARE PRODUCT OR THE PROVISION OF
OR
FAILURE
TO
PROVIDE
SUPPORT
SERVICES,
EVEN
IF
MIKROELEKTRONIKA ASSOCIATES HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN ANY CASE, MIKROELEKTRONIKA ASSOCIATES’
ENTIRE LIABILITY UNDER ANY PROVISION OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR
SOFTWARE PRODUCT PROVIDED, HOWEVER, IF YOU HAVE ENTERED INTO
A MIKROELEKTRONIKA ASSOCIATES SUPPORT SERVICES AGREEMENT,
MIKROELEKTRONIKA ASSOCIATES’ ENTIRE LIABILITY REGARDING
SUPPORT SERVICES SHALL BE GOVERNED BY THE TERMS OF THAT
AGREEMENT.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
5
CHAPTER 1
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Introduction
HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES
Software is not fault-tolerant and is not designed, manufactured or intended for use
or resale as on-line control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe
performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or
communication systems, air traffic control, direct life support machines, or weapons
systems, in which the failure of Software could lead directly to death, personal injury,
or severe physical or environmental damage (“High Risk Activities”). mikroElektronika Associates and its suppliers specifically disclaim any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for High Risk Activities.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
This statement may only be modified in writing signed by you and an authorised officer of mikroElektronika Associates. If any provision of this statement is found void
or unenforceable, the remainder will remain valid and enforceable according to its
terms. If any remedy provided is determined to have failed for its essential purpose,
all limitations of liability and exclusions of damages set forth in the Limited Warranty shall remain in effect.
This statement gives you specific legal rights; you may have others, which vary, from
country to country. mikroElektronika Associates reserves all rights not specifically
granted in this statement.
mikroElektronika
Visegradska 1A,
11000 Belgrade,
Europe.
Phone: + 381 11 36 28 830
Fax: +381 11 36 28 831
Web: www.mikroe.com
E-mail: [email protected]
6
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 1
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Introduction
TECHNICAL SUPPORT
In case you encounter any problem, you are welcome to our support forums at
www.mikroe.com/forum/. Here, you may also find helpful information, hardware tips,
and practical code snippets. Your comments and suggestions on future development of the mikroBasic PRO for AVR are always appreciated — feel free to drop a
note or two on our Wishlist.
In our Knowledge Base www.mikroe.com/en/kb/ you can find the answers to Frequently Asked Questions and solutions to known problems. If you can not find the
solution to your problem in Knowledge Base then report it to Support Desk
www.mikroe.com/en/support/. In this way, we can record and track down bugs more
efficiently, which is in our mutual interest. We respond to every bug report and question in a suitable manner, ever improving our technical support.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
7
CHAPTER 1
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Introduction
HOW TO REGISTER
The latest version of the mikroBasic PRO for AVR is always available for downloading from our website. It is a fully functional software libraries, examples, and comprehensive help included.
The only limitation of the free version is that it cannot generate hex output over 2
KB. Although it might sound restrictive, this margin allows you to develop practical,
working applications with no thinking of demo limit. If you intend to develop really
complex projects in the mikroBasic PRO for AVR, then you should consider the possibility of purchasing the license key.
Who Gets the License Key
Buyers of the mikroBasic PRO for AVR are entitled to the license key. After you have
completed the payment procedure, you have an option of registering your mikroBasic PRO. In this way you can generate hex output without any limitations.
How to Get License Key
After you have completed the payment procedure, start the program. Select Help ›
How to Register from the drop-down menu or click the How To Register Icon
.
Fill out the registration form (figure below), select your distributor, and click the Send
button.
8
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 1
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Introduction
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
9
CHAPTER 1
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Introduction
This will start your e-mail client with message ready for sending. Review the information you have entered, and add the comment if you deem it necessary. Please,
do not modify the subject line.
Upon receiving and verifying your request, we will send the license key to the e-mail
address you specified in the form.
After Receving the License Key
The license key comes as a small autoextracting file – just start it anywhere on your
computer in order to activate your copy of compiler and remove the demo limit. You
do not need to restart your computer or install any additional components. Also,
there is no need to run the mikroBasic PRO for AVR at the time of activation.
Notes:
- The license key is valid until you format your hard disk. In case you need to format
the hard disk, you should request a new activation key.
- Please keep the activation program in a safe place. Every time you upgrade the
compiler you should start this program again in order to reactivate the license.
10
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER
2
mikroBasic PRO for
AVR Environment
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR is an user-friendly and intuitive environment:
11
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
IDE OVERVIEW
- The Code Editor features adjustable Syntax Highlighting, Code Folding, Code
Assistant, Parameters Assistant, Spell Checker, Auto Correct for common typos
and Code Templates (Auto Complete).
- The Code Explorer (with Keyboard shortcut browser and Quick Help browser) is at
your disposal for easier project management.
- The Project Manager alows multiple project management
- General project settings can be made in the Project Settings window
- Library manager enables simple handling libraries being used in a project
- The Error Window displays all errors detected during compiling and linking.
- The source-level Software Simulator lets you debug executable logic step-by-step
by watching the program flow.
- The New Project Wizard is a fast, reliable, and easy way to create a project.
- Help files are syntax and context sensitive.
- Like in any modern Windows application, you may customize the layout of
mikroBasic PRO for AVR to suit your needs best.
- Spell checker underlines identifiers which are unknown to the project. In this way
it helps the programmer to spot potential problems early, much before the project
is compiled.
Spell checker can be disabled by choosing the option in the Preferences dialog (F12).
12
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
MAIN MENU OPTIONS
Available Main Menu options are:
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
13
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
FILE MENU OPTIONS
The File menu is the main entry point for manipulation with the source files.
File
Description
Open a new editor window.
Open source file for editing or image file for viewing.
Reopen recently used file.
Save changes for active editor.
Save the active source file with the different name or
change the file type.
Close active source file.
Print Preview.
Exit IDE.
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts, File Toolbar, Managing Source Files
14
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
EDIT MENU OPTIONS
File
Description
Undo last change.
Redo last change.
Cut selected text to clipboard.
Copy selected text to clipboard.
Paste text from clipboard.
Delete selected text.
Select all text in active editor.
Find text in active editor.
Find next occurence of text in active editor.
Find previous occurence of text in active editor.
Replace text in active editor.
Find text in current file, in all opened files, or in files
from desired folder.
Goto to the desired line in active editor.
Advanced Code Editor options
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
15
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
File
Description
Comment selected code or put single line comment if there is no selection.
Uncomment selected code or remove single line
comment if there is no selection.
Indent selected code.
Outdent selected code.
Changes selected text case to lowercase.
Changes selected text case to uppercase.
Changes selected text case to titlercase.
Find Text
Dialog box for searching the document for the specified text. The search is performed in the direction specified. If the string is not found a message is displayed.
16
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Find In Files
Dialog box for searching for a text string in current file, all opened files, or in files on a disk.
The string to search for is specified in the Text to find field. If Search in directories option
is selected, The files to search are specified in the Files mask and Path fields.
Go To Line
Dialog box that allows the user to specify the line number at which the cursor should
be positioned.
Regular expressions
By checking this box, you will be able to advance your search, through Regular
expressions.
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts,
Edit Toolbar, Advanced Edit Toolbar
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
17
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
VIEW MENU OPTIONS
File
Description
Show/Hide toolbars.
Show/Hide debug windows.
Show/Hide Routine List in active editor.
Show/Hide Project Settings window.
Show/Hide Code Explorer window.
Show/Hide Project Manager window.
Show/Hide Library Manager window.
Show/Hide Bookmarks window.
Show/Hide Error Messages window.
Show/Hide Macro Editor window.
Show Window List window.
18
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
TOOLBARS
File Toolbar
File Toolbar is a standard toolbar with following options:
Icon
Description
Opens a new editor window.
Open source file for editing or image file for viewing.
Save changes for active window.
Save changes in all opened windows.
Close current editor.
Close all editors.
Print Preview.
Edit Toolbar
Edit Toolbar is a standard toolbar with following options:
Icon
Description
Undo last change.
Redo last change.
Cut selected text to clipboard.
Copy selected text to clipboard.
Paste text from clipboard.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
19
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Advanced Edit Toolbar
Advanced Edit Toolbar comes with following options:
Icon
Description
Comment selected code or put single line comment if there is no selection
Uncomment selected code or remove single line comment if there is no
selection.
Select text from starting delimiter to ending delimiter.
Go to ending delimiter.
Go to line.
Indent selected code lines.
Outdent selected code lines.
Generate HTML code suitable for publishing current source code on
the web.
Find/Replace Toolbar
Find/Replace Toolbar is a standard toolbar with following options:
Icon
Description
Find text in current editor.
Find next occurence.
Find previous occurence.
Replace text.
Find text in files.
20
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Project Toolbar
Project Toolbar comes with following options:
Icon
Description
Open new project wizard. wizard.
Open Project
Save Project
Add existing project to project group.
Remove existing project from project group.
Add File To Project
Remove File From Project
Close current project.
Build Toolbar
Build Toolbar comes with following options:
Icon
Description
Build current project.
Build all opened projects.
Build and program active project.
Start programmer and load current HEX file.
Open assembly code in editor.
View statistics for current project.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
21
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Debugger
Debugger Toolbar comes with following options:
Icon
Description
Start Software Simulator.
Run/Pause debugger.
Stop debugger.
Step into.
Step over.
Step out.
Run to cursor.
Toggle breakpoint.
Toggle breakpoints.
Clear breakpoints.
View watch window
View stopwatch window
Styles Toolbar
Styles toolbar allows you to easily customize your workspace.
22
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Tools Toolbar
Tools Toolbar comes with following default options:
Icon
Description
Run USART Terminal
EEPROM
ASCII Chart
Seven segment decoder tool.
The Tools toolbar can easily be customized by adding new tools in Options(F12)
window.
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts, Integrated Tools, Debugger Windows
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
23
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
PROJECT MENU OPTIONS
24
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Project
Description
Build active project.
Build all projects.
Build and program active project.
View Assembly.
Edit search paths.
Clean Project Folder
Add file to project.
Remove file from project.
Open New Project Wizard
Open existing project.
Save current project.
Open project group.
Close project group.
Save active project file with the different name.
Open recently used project.
Close active project.
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts, Project Toolbar, Creating New Project, Project
Manager, Project Settings
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
25
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
RUN MENU OPTIONS
File
Description
Start Software Simulator.
Stop debugger.
Pause Debugger.
Step Into.
Step Over.
Step Out.
Jump to interrupt in current project.
Toggle Breakpoint.
Breakpoints.
Clear Breakpoints.
Show/Hide Watch Window
Show/Hide Stopwatch Window
Toggle between Basic source and disassembly.
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts, Debug Toolbar
26
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
TOOLS MENU OPTIONS
Tools
Description
Run mikroElektronika Programmer
Run USART Terminal
Run EEPROM Editor
Run ASCII Chart
Run 7 Segment Display Decoder
Generate HTML code suitable for publishing
source code on the web.
Generate your own custom Lcd characters
Generate bitmap pictures for Glcd
UDP communication terminal.
Open Options window
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts, Tools Toolbar
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
27
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
HELP MENU OPTIONS
File
Description
Open Help File.
Quick Help.
Check if new compiler version is available.
Open mikroElektronika Support Forums in
a default browser.
Open mikroElektronika Web Page in a
default browser.
Information on how to register
Open About window.
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts
28
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
Below is a complete list of keyboard shortcuts available in mikroBasic PRO for AVR IDE.
You can also view keyboard shortcuts in the Code Explorer window, tab Keyboard.
IDE Shortcuts
Ctrl+X
Cut
F1
Help
Ctrl+Y
Delete entire line
Ctrl+N
New Unit
Ctrl+Z
Undo
Ctrl+O
Open
Ctrl+Shift+Z
Redo
Ctrl+Shift+O Open Project
Advanced Editor Shortcuts
Ctrl+Shift+N
Open New Project
Ctrl+Space
Code Assistant
Ctrl+K
Close Project
Ctrl+Shift+Space
Parameters Assistant
Ctrl+F9
Compile
Ctrl+D
Find declaration
Shift+F9
Compile All
Ctrl+E
Incremental Search
Ctrl+F11
Compile and Program
Ctrl+L
Routine List
Shift+F4
View breakpoints
Ctrl+G
Goto line
Ctrl+Shift+F5 Clear breakpoints
Ctrl+J
Insert Code Template
F11
Start AVRFlash Programmer
Ctrl+Shift+.
Comment Code
F12
Preferences
Ctrl+Shift+,
Uncomment Code
Basic Editor Shortcuts
Ctrl+number
Goto bookmark
F3
Find, Find Next
Ctrl+Shift+number Set bookmark
Shift+F3
Find Previous
Ctrl+Shift+I
Indent selection
Alt+F3
Grep Search, Find in Files
Ctrl+Shift+U
Unindent selection
Ctrl+A
Select All
TAB
Indent selection
Ctrl+C
Copy
Shift+TAB
Unindent selection
Ctrl+F
Find
Alt+Select
Select columns
Ctrl+R
Replace
Ctrl+Alt+Select
Select columns
Ctrl+P
Print
Ctrl+Alt+L
Convert selection to lowercase
Ctrl+S
Save unit
Ctrl+Alt+U
Convert selection to uppercase
Ctrl+Shift+S
Save All
Ctrl+Alt+T
Convert to Titlecase
Ctrl+V
Paste
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
29
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Software Simulator Shortcuts
30
F2
Jump To Interrupt
F4
Run to Cursor
F5
Toggle Breakpoint
F6
Run/Pause Debugger
F7
Step into
F8
Step over
F9
Debug
Ctrl+F2
Reset
Ctrl+F5
Add to Watch List
Ctrl+F8
Step out
Alt+D
Dissasembly view
Shift+F5
Open Watch Window
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
IDE OVERVIEW
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR is an user-friendly and intuitive environment:
- The Code Editor features adjustable Syntax Highlighting, Code Folding, Code
Assistant, Parameters Assistant, Spell Checker, Auto Correct for common typos
and Code Templates (Auto Complete).
- The Code Explorer (with Keyboard shortcut browser and Quick Help browser) is at
your disposal for easier project management.
- The Project Manager alows multiple project management
- General project settings can be made in the Project Settings window
- Library manager enables simple handling libraries being used in a project
- The Error Window displays all errors detected during compiling and linking.
- The source-level Software Simulator lets you debug executable logic step-by-step
by watching the program flow.
- The New Project Wizard is a fast, reliable, and easy way to create a project.
- Help files are syntax and context sensitive.
- Like in any modern Windows application, you may customize the layout of
mikroBasic PRO for AVR to suit your needs best.
- Spell checker underlines identifiers which are unknown to the project. In this way
it helps the programmer to spot potential problems early, much before the project
is compiled.
Spell checker can be disabled by choosing the option in the Preferences dialog (F12).
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
31
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
CUSTOMIZING IDE LAYOUT
Docking Windows
You can increase the viewing and editing space for code, depending on how you
arrange the windows in the IDE.
Step 1: Click the window you want to dock, to give it focus.
Step 2: Drag the tool window from its current location. A guide diamond appears.
The four arrows of the diamond point towards the four edges of the IDE.
32
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Step 3: Move the pointer over the corresponding portion of the guide diamond. An
outline of the window appears in the designated area.
Step 4: To dock the window in the position indicated, release the mouse button.
Tip: To move a dockable window without snapping it into place, press CTRL while
dragging it.
Saving Layout
Once you have a window layout that you like, you can save the layout by typing the
name for the layout and pressing the Save Layout Icon
.
To set the layout select the desired layout from the layout drop-down list and click
the Set Layout Icon
.
To remove the layout from the drop-down list, select the desired layout from the list
and click the Delete Layout Icon
.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
33
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Auto Hide
Auto Hide enables you to see more of your code at one time by minimizing tool windows along the edges of the IDE when not in use.
- Click the window you want to keep visible to give it focus.
- Click the Pushpin Icon
on the title bar of the window.
When an auto-hidden window loses focus, it automatically slides back to its tab on
the edge of the IDE. While a window is auto-hidden, its name and icon are visible
on a tab at the edge of the IDE. To display an auto-hidden window, move your pointer over the tab. The window slides back into view and is ready for use.
34
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
ADVANCED CODE EDITOR
The Code Editor is advanced text editor fashioned to satisfy needs of professionals.
General code editing is the same as working with any standard text-editor, including
familiar Copy, Paste and Undo actions, common for Windows environment.
Advanced Editor Features
- Adjustable Syntax Highlighting
- Code Assistant
- Code Folding
- Parameter Assistant
- Code Templates (Auto Complete)
- Auto Correct for common typos
- Spell Checker
- Bookmarks and Goto Line
- Comment / Uncomment
You can configure the Syntax Highlighting, Code Templates and Auto Correct from
the Editor Settings dialog. To access the Settings, click Tools › Options from the
drop-down menu, click the Show Options Icon
or press F12 key.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
35
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Code Assistant
If you type the first few letters of a word and then press Ctrl+Space, all valid identifiers matching the letters you have typed will be prompted in a floating panel (see
the image below). Now you can keep typing to narrow the choice, or you can select
one from the list using the keyboard arrows and Enter.
36
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Code Folding
Code folding is IDE feature which allows users to selectively hide and display sections of a source file. In this way it is easier to manage large regions of code within
one window, while still viewing only those subsections of the code that are relevant
during a particular editing session.
While typing, the code folding symbols (
and
) appear automatically. Use the
folding symbols to hide/unhide the code subsections.
If you place a mouse cursor over the tooltip box, the collapsed text will be shown in
a tooltip style box.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
37
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Parameter Assistant
The Parameter Assistant will be automatically invoked when you open parenthesis
“(” or press Shift+Ctrl+Space. If the name of a valid function precedes the parenthesis, then the expected parameters will be displayed in a floating panel. As you type
the actual parameter, the next expected parameter will become bold.
Code Templates (Auto Complete)
You can insert the Code Template by typing the name of the template (for instance,
whiles), then press Ctrl+J and the Code Editor will automatically generate a code.
You can add your own templates to the list. Select Tools › Options from the dropdown menu, or click the Show Options Icon and then select the Auto Complete Tab.
Here you can enter the appropriate keyword, description and code of your template.
Autocomplete macros can retreive system and project information:
-
%DATE% - current system date
%TIME% - current system time
%DEVICE% - device(MCU) name as specified in project settings
%DEVICE_CLOCK% - clock as specified in project settings
%COMPILER% - current compiler version
These macros can be used in template code, see template ptemplate provided with
mikroBasic PRO for AVR installation.
Auto Correct
The Auto Correct feature corrects common typing mistakes. To access the list of recognized typos, select Tools › Options from the drop-down menu, or click the Show
Options Icon
and then select the Auto Correct Tab. You can also add your own
preferences to the list.
Also, the Code Editor has a feature to comment or uncomment the selected code by simple click of a mouse, using the Comment Icon
and Uncomment Icon
from the
Code Toolbar.
38
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Spell Checker
The Spell Checker underlines unknown objects in the code, so it can be easily
noticed and corrected before compiling your project.
Select Tools › Options from the drop-down menu, or click the Show Options Icon
and then select the Spell Checker Tab.
Bookmarks
Bookmarks make navigation through a large code easier. To set a bookmark, use
Ctrl+Shift+number. To jump to a bookmark, use Ctrl+number.
Goto Line
The Goto Line option makes navigation through a large code easier. Use the shortcut Ctrl+G to activate this option.
Comment / Uncomment
Also, the Code Editor has a feature to comment or uncomment the selected code by simple click of a mouse, using the Comment Icon
and Uncomment Icon
from the
Code Toolbar.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
39
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
CODE EXPLORER
The Code Explorer gives clear view of each item declared inside the source code.
You can jump to a declaration of any item by right clicking it. Also, besides the list of
defined and declared objects, code explorer displays message about first error and
it's location in code.
Following options are available in the Code Explorer:
Icon
Description
Expand/Collapse all nodes in tree.
Locate declaration in code.
40
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
ROUTINE LIST
Routine list diplays list of routines, and enables filtering routines by name. Routine
list window can be accessed by pressing Ctrl+L.
You can jump to a desired routine by double clicking on it.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
41
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
PROJECT MANAGER
Project Manager is IDE feature which allows users to manage multiple projects.
Several projects which together make project group may be open at the same time.
Only one of them may be active at the moment.
Setting project in active mode is performed by double click on the desired project
in the Project Manager.
Following options are available in the Project Manager:
Icon
Description
Save project Group.
Open project group.
Close the active project.
Close project group.
Add project to the project group.
Remove project from the project group.
Add file to the active project.
Remove selected file from the project.
Build the active project.
Run mikroElektronika's Flash programmer.
For details about adding and removing files from project see Add/Remove Files from
Project.
Related topics: Project Settings, Project Menu Options, File Menu Options, Project
Toolbar, Build Toolbar, Add/Remove Files from Project
42
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
PROJECT SETTINGS WINDOW
Following options are available in the Project Settings Window:
- Device - select the appropriate device from the device drop-down list.
- Oscillator - enter the oscillator frequency value.
Related topics: Project Manager
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
43
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
LIBRARY MANAGER
Library Manager enables simple handling libraries being used in a project. Library
Manager window lists all libraries (extencion .mcl) which are instantly stored in the
compiler Uses folder. The desirable library is added to the project by selecting check
box next to the library name.
In order to have all library functions accessible, simply press the button Check All
and all libraries will be selected. In case none library is needed in a project,
press the button Clear All
and all libraries will be cleared from the project.
Only the selected libraries will be linked.
44
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Icon
Environment
Description
Refresh Library by scanning files in "Uses" folder.Useful when new
libraries are added by copying files to "Uses" folder.
Rebuild all available libraries. Useful when library sources are available and
need refreshing.
Include all available libraries in current project.
No libraries from the list will be included in current project.
Restore library to the state just before last project saving.
Related topics: mikroBasic PRO for AVR Libraries, Creating New Library
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
45
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
ERROR WINDOW
In case that errors were encountered during compiling, the compiler will report them
and won’t generate a hex file. The Error Window will be prompted at the bottom of
the main window by default.
The Error Window is located under message tab, and displays location and type of
errors the compiler has encountered. The compiler also reports warnings, but these
do not affect the output; only errors can interefere with the generation of hex.
Double click the message line in the Error Window to highlight the line where the
error was encountered.
Related topics: Error Messages
46
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
STATISTICS
After successful compilation, you can review statistics of your code. Click the Statistics Icon
.
Memory Usage Windows
Provides overview of RAM and ROM usage in the form of histogram.
RAM Memory
Rx Memory Space
Displays Rx memory space usage in form of histogram.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
47
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Data Memory Space
Displays Data memory space usage in form of histogram.
Special Function Registers
Summarizes all Special Function Registers and their addresses.
48
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
General Purpose Registers
Summarizes all General Purpose Registers and their addresses. Also displays symbolic names of variables and their addresses.
ROM Memory
ROM Memory Usage
Displays ROM memory usage in form of histogram.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
49
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
ROM Memory Allocation
Displays ROM memory allocation.
Procedures Windows
Provides overview procedures locations and sizes.
Procedures Size Window
Displays size of each procedure.
50
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Procedures Locations Window
Displays how functions are distributed in microcontroller’s memory.
HTML Window
Display statistics in default web browser.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
51
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
INTEGRATED TOOLS
USART Terminal
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR includes the USART communication terminal for
RS232 communication. You can launch it from the drop-down menu Tools › USART
Terminal or by clicking the USART Terminal Icon
52
from Tools toolbar.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
ASCII Chart
The ASCII Chart is a handy tool, particularly useful when working with Lcd display.
You can launch it from the drop-down menu Tools › ASCII chart or by clicking the
View ASCII Chart Icon
from Tools toolbar.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
53
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
EEPROM Editor
The EEPROM Editor is used for manipulating MCU's EEPROM memory. You can
launch it from the drop-down menu Tools › EEPROM Editor. When Use this
EEPROM definition is checked compiler will generate Intel hex file
project_name.ihex that contains data from EEPROM editor.
When you run mikroElektronika programmer software from mikroBasic PRO for AVR
IDE - project_name.hex file will be loaded automatically while ihex file must be
loaded manually.
54
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
7 Segment Display Decoder
The 7 Segment Display Decoder is a convenient visual panel which returns decimal/hex value for any viable combination you would like to display on 7seg. Click on
the parts of 7 segment image to get the requested value in the edit boxes. You can
launch it from the drop-down menu Tools › 7 Segment Decoder or by clicking the
Seven Segment Icon
from Tools toolbar.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
55
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
UDP Terminal
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR includes the UDP Terminal. You can launch it from the
drop-down menu Tools › UDP Terminal.
56
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Graphic Lcd Bitmap Editor
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR includes the Graphic Lcd Bitmap Editor. Output is the
mikroBasic PRO for AVR compatible code. You can launch it from the drop-down
menu Tools › Glcd Bitmap Editor.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
57
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Lcd Custom Character
mikroBasic PRO for AVR includes the Lcd Custom Character. Output is mikroBasic
PRO for AVR compatible code. You can launch it from the drop-down menu Tools ›
Lcd Custom Character.
58
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
MACRO EDITOR
A macro is a series of keystrokes that have been 'recorded' in the order performed.
A macro allows you to 'record' a series of keystrokes and then 'playback', or repeat,
the recorded keystrokes.
The Macro offers the following commands:
Icon
Description
Starts 'recording' keystrokes for later playback.
Stops capturing keystrokesthat was started when the Start Recordig command was selected.
Allows a macro that has been recorded to be replayed.
New macro.
Delete macro.
Related topics: Advanced Code Editor, Code Templates
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
59
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
OPTIONS
Options menu consists of three tabs: Code Editor, Tools and Output settings
Code editor
The Code Editor is advanced text editor fashioned to satisfy needs of professionals.
Tools
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR includes the Tools tab, which enables the use of shortcuts to external programs, like Calculator or Notepad.
You can set up to 10 different shortcuts, by editing Tool0 - Tool9.
60
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Output settings
By modifying Output Settings, user can configure the content of the output files.
You can enable or disable, for example, generation of ASM and List file.
Also, user can choose optimization level, and compiler specific settings, which
include case sensitivity, dynamic link for string literals setting (described in mikroBasic PRO for AVR specifics).
Build all files as library enables user to use compiled library (*.mcl) on any AVR
MCU (when this box is checked), or for a selected AVR MCU (when this box is left
unchecked).
For more information on creating new libraries, see Creating New Library.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
61
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
REGULAR EXPRESSIONS
Introduction
Regular Expressions are a widely-used method of specifying patterns of text to
search for. Special metacharacters allow you to specify, for instance, that a particular string you are looking for, occurs at the beginning, or end of a line, or contains n
recurrences of a certain character.
Simple matches
Any single character matches itself, unless it is a metacharacter with a special
meaning described below. A series of characters matches that series of characters
in the target string, so the pattern "short" would match "short" in the target string.
You can cause characters that normally function as metacharacters or escape
sequences to be interpreted by preceding them with a backslash "\".
For instance, metacharacter "^" matches beginning of string, but "\^" matches
character "^", and "\\" matches "\", etc.
Examples :
unsigned matches string 'unsigned'
\^unsigned matches string '^unsigned'
Escape sequences
Characters may be specified using a escape sequences: "\n" matches a newline,
"\t" a tab, etc. More generally, \xnn, where nn is a string of hexadecimal digits,
matches the character whose ASCII value is nn.
If you need wide (Unicode) character code, you can use '\x{nnnn}', where 'nnnn'
- one or more hexadecimal digits.
- \xnn - char with hex code nn
- \x{nnnn)- char with hex code nnnn (one byte for plain text and two bytes
for Unicode)
- \t - tab (HT/TAB), same as \x09
- \n - newline (NL), same as \x0a
- \r - car.return (CR), same as \x0d
- \f - form feed (FF), same as \x0c
- \a - alarm (bell) (BEL), same as \x07
- \e - escape (ESC) , same as \x1b
Examples:
unsigned\x20int matches 'unsigned int' (note space in the middle)
\tunsigned matches 'unsigned' (predecessed by tab)
62
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Character classes
You can specify a character class, by enclosing a list of characters in [], which will
match any of the characters from the list. If the first character after the "[" is "^", the
class matches any character not in the list.
Examples:
count[aeiou]r finds strings 'countar', 'counter', etc. but not
'countbr', 'countcr', etc.
count[^aeiou]r finds strings 'countbr', 'countcr', etc. but not
'countar', 'counter', etc.
Within a list, the "-" character is used to specify a range, so that a-z represents all
characters between "a" and "z", inclusive.
If you want "-" itself to be a member of a class, put it at the start or end of the list,
or precede it with a backslash.
If you want ']', you may place it at the start of list or precede it with a backslash.
Examples:
[-az] matches 'a', 'z' and '-'
[az-] matches 'a', 'z' and '-'
[a\-z] matches 'a', 'z' and '-'
[a-z] matches all twenty six small characters from 'a' to 'z'
[\n-\x0D] matches any of #10,#11,#12,#13.
[\d-t] matches any digit, '-' or 't'.
[]-a] matches any char from ']'..'a'.
Metacharacters
Metacharacters are special characters which are the essence of regular expressions. There are different types of metacharacters, described below.
Metacharacters - Line separators
^ - start of line
$ - end of line
\A - start of text
\Z - end of text
. - any character in line
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
63
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Examples:
^PORTA - matches string ' PORTA ' only if it's at the beginning of line
PORTA$ - matches string ' PORTA ' only if it's at the end of line
^PORTA$ - matches string ' PORTA ' only if it's the only string in line
PORT.r - matches strings like 'PORTA', 'PORTB', 'PORT1' and so on
The "^" metacharacter by default is only guaranteed to match beginning of the input
string/text, and the "$" metacharacter only at the end. Embedded line separators
will not be matched by ^" or "$".
You may, however, wish to treat a string as a multi-line buffer, such that the "^" will
match after any line separator within the string, and "$" will match before any line
separator.
Regular expressions works with line separators as recommended at http://www.unicode.org/unicode/reports/tr18/
Metacharacters - Predefined classes
\w
\W
\d
\D
\s
\S
-
an alphanumeric character (including "_")
a nonalphanumeric character
a numeric character
a non-numeric character
any space (same as [\t\n\r\f])
a non space
You may use \w, \d and \s within custom character classes.
Example:
routi\de - matches strings like 'routi1e', 'routi6e' and so on, but not
'routine', 'routime' and so on.
Metacharacters - Word boundaries
A word boundary ("\b") is a spot between two characters that has an alphanumeric character ("\w") on one side, and a nonalphanumeric character ("\W") on the
other side (in either order), counting the imaginary characters off the beginning and
end of the string as matching a "\W".
\b - match a word boundary)
\B - match a non-(word boundary)
64
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Metacharacters - Iterators
Any item of a regular expression may be followed by another type of metacharacters - iterators. Using this metacharacters,you can specify number of occurences of
previous character, metacharacter or subexpression.
* - zero or more ("greedy"), similar to {0,}
+ - one or more ("greedy"), similar to {1,}
? - zero or one ("greedy"), similar to {0,1}
{n} - exactly n times ("greedy")
{n,} - at least n times ("greedy")
{n,m} - at least n but not more than m times ("greedy")
*? - zero or more ("non-greedy"), similar to {0,}?
+? - one or more ("non-greedy"), similar to {1,}?
?? - zero or one ("non-greedy"), similar to {0,1}?
{n}? - exactly n times ("non-greedy")
{n,}? - at least n times ("non-greedy")
{n,m}? - at least n but not more than m times ("non-greedy")
So, digits in curly brackets of the form, {n,m}, specify the minimum number of times to
match the item n and the maximum m. The form {n} is equivalent to {n,n} and matches exactly n times. The form {n,} matches n or more times. There is no limit to the size
of n or m, but large numbers will chew up more memory and slow down execution.
If a curly bracket occurs in any other context, it is treated as a regular character.
Examples:
count.*r ß- matches strings like 'counter', 'countelkjdflkj9r' and 'countr'
count.+r - matches strings like 'counter', 'countelkjdflkj9r' but not 'countr'
count.?r - matches strings like 'counter', 'countar' and 'countr' but not
'countelkj9r'
counte{2}r - matches string 'counteer'
counte{2,}r - matches strings like 'counteer', 'counteeer', 'counteeer' etc.
counte{2,3}r - matches strings like 'counteer', or 'counteeer' but not 'counteeeer'
A little explanation about "greediness". "Greedy" takes as many as possible, "nongreedy" takes as few as possible.
For example, 'b+' and 'b*' applied to string 'abbbbc' return 'bbbb', 'b+?'
returns 'b', 'b*?' returns empty string, 'b{2,3}?' returns 'bb', 'b{2,3}'
returns 'bbb'.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
65
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Metacharacters - Alternatives
You can specify a series of alternatives for a pattern using "|" to separate them, so
that bit|bat|bot will match any of "bit", "bat", or "bot" in the target string as would
"b(i|a|o)t)". The first alternative includes everything from the last pattern delimiter
("(", "[", or the beginning of the pattern) up to the first "|", and the last alternative contains everything from the last "|" to the next pattern delimiter. For this reason, it's
common practice to include alternatives in parentheses, to minimize confusion
about where they start and end.
Alternatives are tried from left to right, so the first alternative found for which the
entire expression matches, is the one that is chosen. This means that alternatives
are not necessarily greedy. For example: when matching rou|rout against "routine",
only the "rou" part will match, as that is the first alternative tried, and it successfully
matches the target string (this might not seem important, but it is important when
you are capturing matched text using parentheses.) Also remember that "|" is interpreted as a literal within square brackets, so if you write [bit|bat|bot], you're
really only matching [biao|].
Examples:
rou(tine|te) - matches strings 'routine' or 'route'.
Metacharacters - Subexpressions
The bracketing construct ( ... ) may also be used for define regular subexpressions. Subexpressions are numbered based on the left to right order of their opening parenthesis. First subexpression has number '1'
Examples:
(int){8,10} matches strings which contain 8, 9 or 10 instances of the 'int'
routi([0-9]|a+)e matches 'routi0e',
'routi1e'
,
'routine',
'routinne', 'routinnne' etc.
Metacharacters - Backreferences
Metacharacters \1 through \9 are interpreted as backreferences. \ matches previously matched subexpression #.
Examples:
(.)\1+ matches 'aaaa' and 'cc'.
(.+)\1+ matches 'abab' and '123123'
(['"]?)(\d+)\1 matches "13" (in double quotes), or '4' (in single quotes)
or 77 (without quotes) etc
66
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
MIKROBASIC PRO FOR AVR COMMAND LINE OPTIONS
Usage: mBAvr.exe [-<opts> [-<opts>]] [<infile> [-<opts>]] [-<opts>]]
Infile can be of *.mbas and *.mcl type.
The following parameters and some more (see manual) are valid:
-P : MCU for which compilation will be done.
-FO : Set oscillator [in MHz].
-SP : Add directory to the search path list.
-IP : Add directory to the #include search list.
-N : Output files generated to file path specified by filename.
-B : Save compiled binary files (*.mcl) to 'directory'.
-O : Miscellaneous output options.
-DBG : Generate debug info.
-L : Check and rebuild new libraries.
-DL : Build all files as libraries.
-Y : Dynamic link for string literals.
-C : Turn on case sensitivity.
Example:
mBAvr.exe
-MSF
-DBG
-pATMEGA16
-C
-O11111114
-fo8
N"C:\Lcd\Lcd.mcpav" -SP"C:\Program Files\Mikroelektronika\mikroBasic
PRO for AVR\Defs\"
-SP"C:\Program Files\Mikroelektronika\mikroBasic PRO
for AVR\Uses\LTE64KW\" -SP"C:\Lcd\" "Lcd.mbas" "__Lib_Math.mcl"
"__Lib_MathDouble.mcl"
"__Lib_System.mcl" "__Lib_Delays.mcl"
"__Lib_LcdConsts.mcl" "__Lib_Lcd.mcl"
Parameters used in the example:
-MSF : Short Message Format; used for internal purposes by IDE.
-DBG : Generate debug info.
-pATMEGA16 : MCU ATMEGA16 selected.
-C : Turn on case sensitivity.
-O11111114 : Miscellaneous output options.
-fo8 : Set oscillator frequency [in MHz].
-N"C:\Lcd\Lcd.mcpav" -SP"C:\Program Files\Mikroelektronika\mikroBasic
PRO for AVR\defs\" : Output files generated to file path specified by filename.
-SP"C:\Program Files\Mikroelektronika\mikroBasic PRO for AVR\defs\" :
Add directory to the search path list.
-SP"C:\Program Files\Mikroelektronika\mikroBasic PRO for AVR\uses\" :
Add directory to the search path list.
-SP"C:\Lcd\" : Add directory to the search path list.
"Lcd.mbas" "__Lib_Math.mcl" "__Lib_MathDouble.mcl" "__Lib_System.mcl"
"__Lib_Delays.mcl" "__Lib_LcdConsts.mcl" "__Lib_Lcd.mcl" : Specify input files.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
67
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
PROJECTS
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR organizes applications into projects, consisting of a
single project file (extension .mcpav) and one or more source files (extension ).
mikroBasic PRO for AVR IDE allows you to manage multiple projects (see Project
Manager). Source files can be compiled only if they are part of a project.
The project file contains the following information:
-
project name and optional description,
target device,
device flags (config word),
device clock,
list of the project source files with paths,
image files,
other files.
Note that the project does not include files in the same way as preprocessor does,
see Add/Remove Files from Project.
NEW PROJECT
The easiest way to create a project is by means of the New Project Wizard, dropdown menu Project › New Project or by clicking the New Project Icon
from
Project Toolbar.
68
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
New Project Wizard Steps
Start creating your New project, by clicking Next button:
Step One - Select the device from the device drop-down list.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
69
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Step Two - Enter the oscillator frequency value.
Step Three - Specify the location where your project will be saved.
70
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Step Four - Add project file to the project if they are avaiable at this point. You can
always add project files later using Project Manager.
Step Five - Click Finish button to create your New Project:
Related topics: Project Manager, Project Settings
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
71
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
CUSTOMIZING PROJECTS
Edit Project
You can change basic project settings in the Project Settings window. You can
change chip and oscillator frequency. Any change in the Project Setting Window
affects currently active project only, so in case more than one project is open, you
have to ensure that exactly the desired project is set as active one in the Project
Manager.
Managing Project Group
mikroBasic PRO for AVR IDE provides covenient option which enables several projects to be open simultaneously. If you have several projects being connected in
some way, you can create a project group.
The project group may be saved by clicking the Save Project Group Icon
from
the Project Manager window. The project group may be reopend by clicking the
Open Project Group Icon
. All relevant data about the project group is stored in
the project group file (extension .mpg)
ADD/REMOVE FILES FROM PROJECT
The project can contain the following file types:
-
.mbas source files
.mcl binary files
.pld project level defines files
image files
.hex, .asm and .lst files, see output files. These files can not be added or
removed from project.
- other files
72
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
The list of relevant source files is stored in the project file (extension .mbpav).
To add source file to the project, click the Add File to Project Icon
. Each added
source file must be self-contained, i.e. it must have all necessary definitions after
preprocessing.
To remove file(s) from the project, click the Remove File from Project Icon
.
Note: For inclusion of the module files, use the include clause. See File Inclusion
for more information.
Project Level Defines
Project Level Defines (.pld) files can also be added to project. Project level define files
enable you to have defines that are visible in all source files in the project. One project
may contain several pld files. A file must contain one definition per line, for example:
ANALOG
DEBUG
TEST
There are some predefined project level defines. See predefined project level defines
Related topics: Project Manager, Project Settings
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
73
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
SOURCE FILES
Source files containing Basic code should have the extension .mbas. The list of
source files relevant to the application is stored in project file with extension .mbpav,
along with other project information. You can compile source files only if they are
part of the project.
Managing Source Files
Creating new source file
To create a new source file, do the following:
1. Select File › New Unit from the drop-down menu, or press Ctrl+N, or click the
New File Icon
from the File Toolbar.
2. A new tab will be opened. This is a new source file. Select File › Save from the
drop-down menu, or press Ctrl+S, or click the Save File Icon
from the File
Toolbar and name it as you want.
If you use the New Project Wizard, an empty source file, named after the project with
extension .mbas, will be created automatically. The mikroBasic PRO for AVR does
not require you to have a source file named the same as the project, it’s just a matter of convenience.
Opening an existing file
1. Select File › Open from the drop-down menu, or press Ctrl+O, or click the Open
File Icon
from the File Toolbar. In Open Dialog browse to the location of the
file that you want to open, select it and click the Open button.
2. The selected file is displayed in its own tab. If the selected file is already open, its
current Editor tab will become active.
Printing an open file
1. Make sure that the window containing the file that you want to print is the
active window.
2. Select File › Print from the drop-down menu, or press Ctrl+P.
3. In the Print Preview Window, set a desired layout of the document and click the
OK button. The file will be printed on the selected printer.
74
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Saving file
1. Make sure that the window containing the file that you want to save is the
active window.
2. Select File › Save from the drop-down menu, or press Ctrl+S, or click the Save
File Icon
from the File Toolbar.
Saving file under a different name
1. Make sure that the window containing the file that you want to save is the
active window.
2. Select File › Save As from the drop-down menu. The New File Name dialog will
be displayed.
3. In the dialog, browse to the folder where you want to save the file.
4. In the File Name field, modify the name of the file you want to save.
5. Click the Save button.
Closing file
1. Make sure that the tab containing the file that you want to close is the active tab.
2. Select File › Close from the drop-down menu, or right click the tab of the file that
you want to close and select Close option from the context menu.
3. If the file has been changed since it was last saved, you will be prompted to save
your changes.
Related topics:File Menu, File Toolbar, Project Manager, Project Settings,
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
75
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
CLEAN PROJECT FOLDER
Clean Project Folder
This menu gives you option to choose which files from your current project you want
to delete.
Files marked in bold can be easily recreated by building a project. Other files should
be marked for deletion only with a great care, because IDE cannot recover them.
76
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
COMPILATION
When you have created the project and written the source code, it's time to compile
it. Select Project › Build from the drop-down menu, or click the Build Icon
from
the Project Toolbar. If more more than one project is open you can compile all open
projects by selecting Project › Build All from the drop-down menu, or click the Build
All Icon
from the Project Toolbar.
Progress bar will appear to inform you about the status of compiling. If there are
some errors, you will be notified in the Error Window. If no errors are encountered,
the mikroBasic PRO for AVR will generate output files.
Output Files
Upon successful compilation, the mikroBasic PRO for AVR will generate output files
in the project folder (folder which contains the project file .mbpav). Output files are
summarized in the table below:
Format
Description
File Type
Intel HEX
Intel style hex records. Use this file to program
AVR MCU.
Binary
mikro Compiled Library. Binary distribution of
.mcl
application that can be included in other projects.
List File
Overview of AVR memory allotment: instruction
addresses, registers, routines and labels.
Assembler File
Human readable assembly with symbolic names,
.asm
extracted from the List File.
.hex
.lst
Assembly View
After compiling the program in the mikroBasic PRO for AVR, you can click the View
Assembly icon
or select Project › View Assembly from the drop-down menu
to review the generated assembly code (.asm file) in a new tab window. Assembly
is human-readable with symbolic names.
Related topics:Project Menu, Project Toolbar, Error Window, Project Manager, Project Settings
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
77
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
ERROR MESSAGES
Compiler Error Messages:
- "%s"is not valid identifier.
- Unknown type "%s".
- Identifier "%s" was not declared.
- Syntax error: Expected "%s" but "%s" found.
- Argument is out of range "%s".
- Syntax error in additive expression.
- File "%s" not found.
- Invalid command "%s".
- Not enough parameters.
- Too many parameters.
- Too many characters.
- Actual and formal parameters must be identical.
- Invalid ASM instruction: "%s".
- Identifier "%s" has been already declared in "%s".
- Syntax error in multiplicative expression.
- Definition file for "%s" is corrupted.
- ORG directive is currently supported for interrupts only.
- Not enough ROM.
- Not enough RAM.
- External procedure "%s" used in "%s" was not found.
- Internal error: "%s".
- Unit cannot recursively use itself.
- "%s" cannot be used out of loop.
- Supplied and formal parameters do not match ("%s" to "%s").
- Constant cannot be assigned to.
- Constant array must be declared as global.
- Incompatible types ("%s" to "%s").
- Too many characters ("%s").
- Soft_Uart cannot be initialized with selected baud rate/device clock.
- Main label cannot be used in modules.
- Break/Continue cannot be used out of loop.
- Preprocessor Error: "%s".
- Expression is too complicated.
- Duplicated label "%s".
- Complex type cannot be declared here.
- Record is empty.
- Unknown type "%s".
- File not found "%s".
- Constant argument cannot be passed by reference.
- Pointer argument cannot be passed by reference.
78
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
- Operator "%s" not applicable to these operands "%s".
- Exit cannot be called from the main block.
- Complex type parameter must be passed by reference.
- Error occured while compiling "%s".
- Recursive types are not allowed.
- Adding strings is not allowed, use "strcat" procedure instead.
- Cannot declare pointer to array, use pointer to structure which has array field.
- Return value of the function "%s" is not defined.
- Assignment to for loop variable is not allowed.
- "%s" is allowed only in the main program.
- Start address of "%s" has already been defined.
- Simple constant cannot have fixed address.
- Invalid date/time format.
- Invalid operator "%s".
- File "%s" is not accessible.
- Forward routine "%s" is missing implementation.
- ";" is not allowed before "else".
- Not enough elements: expected "%s", but "%s" elements found.
- Too many elements: expected "%s" elements.
- "external" is allowed for global declarations only.
- Destination size ("%s") does not match source size ("%s").
- Routine prototype is different from previous declaration.
- Division by zero.
- Uart module cannot be initialized with selected baud rate/device clock.
- % cannot be of "%s" type.
Warning Messages:
- Implicit typecast of integral value to pointer.
- Library "%s" was not found in search path.
- Interrupt context saving has been turned off.
- Variable "%s" is not initialized.
- Return value of the function "%s" is not defined.
- Identifier "%s" overrides declaration in unit "%s".
- Generated baud rate is "%s" bps (error = "%s" percent).
- Result size may exceed destination array size.
- Infinite loop.
- Implicit typecast performed from "%s" to "%s".
- Source size ("%s") does not match destination size ("%s").
- Array padded with zeros ("%s") in order to match declared size ("%s").
- Suspicious pointer conversion.
Hint Messages:
-
Constant "%s" has been declared, but not used.
Variable "%s" has been declared, but not used.
Unit "%s" has been recompiled.
Variable "%s" has been eliminated by optimizer.
Compiling unit "%s".
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
79
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
SOFTWARE SIMULATOR OVERVIEW
The Source-level Software Simulator is an integral component of the mikroBasic
PRO for AVR environment. It is designed to simulate operations of the AVR MCUs
and assist the users in debugging Basic code written for these devices.
After you have successfully compiled your project, you can run the Software Simulator by selecting Run › Start Debugger from the drop-down menu, or by clicking
the Start Debugger Icon
from the Debugger Toolbar. Starting the Software Sim-
ulator makes more options available: Step Into, Step Over, Step Out, Run to Cursor,
etc. Line that is to be executed is color highlighted (blue by default).
Note: The Software Simulator simulates the program flow and execution of instruction lines, but it cannot fully emulate AVR device behavior, i.e. it doesn’t update
timers, interrupt flags, etc.
Watch Window
The Software Simulator Watch Window is the main Software Simulator window which
allows you to monitor program items while simulating your program. To show the Watch
Window, select View › Debug Windows › Watch from the drop-down menu.
The Watch Window displays variables and registers of the MCU, along with their
addresses and values.
There are two ways of adding variable/register to the watch list:
- by its real name (variable's name in "Basic" code). Just select desired
variable/register from Select variable from list drop-down menu and click the
Add Button
.
- by its name ID (assembly variable name). Simply type name ID of the
variable/register you want to display into Search the variable by assemby name
box and click the Add Button
.
Variables can also be removed from the Watch window, just select the variable that
you want to remove and then click the Remove Button
Add All Button
80
.
adds all variables.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Remove All Button
Environment
removes all variables.
You can also expand/collapse complex variables, i.e. struct type variables, strings...
Values are updated as you go through the simulation. Recently changed items are
colored red.
Double clicking a variable or clicking the Properties Button
opens
the Edit Value window in which you can assign a new value to the selected
variable/register. Also, you can choose the format of variable/register representation
between decimal, hexadecimal, binary, float or character. All representations except
float are unsigned by default. For signed representation click the check box next to
the Signed label.
An item's value can be also changed by double clicking item's value field and typing
the new value directly.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
81
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Stopwatch Window
The Software Simulator Stopwatch Window is available from the drop-down menu,
View › Debug Windows › Stopwatch.
The Stopwatch Window displays a current count of cycles/time since the last Software Simulator action. Stopwatch measures the execution time (number of cycles)
from the moment Software Simulator has started and can be reset at any time. Delta
represents the number of cycles between the lines where Software Simulator action
has started and ended.
Note: The user can change the clock in the Stopwatch Window, which will recalculate values for the latest specified frequency. Changing the clock in the Stopwatch
Window does not affect actual project settings – it only provides a simulation.
82
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
RAM Window
The Software Simulator RAM Window is available from the drop-down menu, View
› Debug Windows › RAM.
The RAM Window displays a map of MCU’s RAM, with recently changed items colored red. You can change value of any field by double-clicking it.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
83
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
SOFTWARE SIMULATOR OPTIONS
Name
Description
Function Toolbar
Key
Icon
Start Debugger Start Software Simulator.
[F9]
Run/Pause
Debugger
Run or pause Software Simulator.
[F6]
Stop Debugger
Stop Software Simulator.
Toggle
Breakpoints
Toggle breakpoint at the current cursor position.
To view all breakpoints, select Run > View Breakpoints from the drop–down menu. Double clicking
an item in the Breakpoints Window List locates
the breakpoint.
[F5]
Run to cursor
Execute all instructions between the current
instruction and cursor position.
[F4]
Step Into
Execute the current Basic (single or multi–cycle)
instruction, then halt. If the instruction is a routine
call, enter the routine and halt at the first instruction following the call.
[F7]
Step Over
Execute the current Basic (single or multi–cycle)
instruction, then halt.
[F8]
Step Out
Execute all remaining instructions in the current
routine, return and then halt.
[Ctrl+F8]
[Ctrl+F2]
Related topics: Run Menu, Debug Toolbar
84
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
CREATING NEW LIBRARY
mikroBasic PRO for AVR allows you to create your own libraries. In order to create
a library in mikroBasic PRO for AVR follow the steps bellow:
1. Create a new Basic source file, see Managing Source Files
2. Save the file in one of the subfolders of the compiler's Uses folder (LTE64kW or
GT64kW, see note on the end of the page):
DriveName:\Program Files\Mikroelektronika\mikroBasic PRO for
AVR\Uses\LTE64kW\__Lib_Example.mbas
3. Write a code for your library and save it.
4. Add __Lib_Example file in some project, see Project Manager. Recompile the
project.
If you wish to use this library for all MCUs, then you should go to Tools › Options
› Output settings, and check Build all files as library box.
This will build libraries in a common form which will work with all MCUs. If this
box is not checked, then library will be build for selected MCU.
Bear in mind that compiler will report an error if a library built for specific MCU is
used for another one.
5. Compiled file __Lib_Example.mcl should appear in ...\mikroBasic PRO for
AVR\Uses\LTE64kW\ folder.
6. Open the definition file for the MCU that you want to use. This file is placed in the
compiler's Defs folder:
DriveName:\Program Files\Mikroelektronika\mikroBasic PRO for
AVR\Defs\ and it is named MCU_NAME.mlk, for example ATMEGA16.mlk
7. Add the the following segment of code to <LIBRARIES> node of the definition file
(definition file is in XML format):
<LIB>
<ALIAS>Example_Library</ALIAS>
<FILE>__Lib_Example</FILE>
<TYPE>REGULAR</TYPE>
</LIB>
8. Add Library to mlk file for each MCU that you want to use with your library.
9. Click Refresh button in Library Manager
10. Example_Library should appear in the Library manager window.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
85
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Environment
Multiple Library Versions
Library Alias represents unique name that is linked to corresponding Library .mcl
file. For example UART library for ATMEGA16 is different from UART library for
ATMEGA128 MCU. Therefore, two different UART Library versions were made, see
mlk files for these two MCUs. Note that these two libraries have the same Library
Alias (UART) in both mlk files. This approach enables you to have identical representation of UART library for both MCUs in Library Manager.
Note: In the Uses folder, there should be two subfolders, LTE64kW and GT64kW,
depending on the Flash memory size of the desired MCU. See AVR Specifics for a
detailed information regarding this subject.
Related topics: Library Manager, Project Manager, Managing Source Files
86
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER
3
mikroBasic PRO
for AVR Specifics
The following topics cover the specifics of mikroBasic PRO for AVR compiler:
- Basic Standard Issues
- Predefined Globals and Constants
- Accessing Individual Bits
- Interrupts
- AVR Pointers
- Linker Directives
- Built-in Routines
- Code Optimization
87
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Specifics
BASIC STANDARD ISSUES
Divergence from the Basic Standard
Function recursion is not supported because of no easily-usable stack and limited
memory AVR Specific
Basic Language Exstensions
mikroBasic PRO for AVR has additional set of keywords that do not belong to the
standard Basic language keywords:
-
code
data
io
rx
register
at
sbit
bit
sfr
Related topics: Keywords, AVR Specific
88
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Specifics
PREDEFINED GLOBALS AND CONSTANTS
In order to facilitate AVR programming, mikroBasic PRO for AVR implements a number of predefined globals and constants.
SFRs and related constants
All AVR SFRs are implicitly declared as global variables of volatile word type.
These identifiers have an external linkage, and are visible in the entire project.
When creating a project, the mikroBasic PRO for AVR will include an appropriate
(*.mbas) file from defs folder, containing declarations of available SFRs and constants (such as PORTB, ADPCFG, etc). All identifiers are in upper case, identical to
nomenclature in the Microchip datasheets.
For a complete set of predefined globals and constants, look for “Defs” in the
mikroBasic PRO for AVR installation folder, or probe the Code Assistant for specific
letters (Ctrl+Space in the Code Editor).
Math constants
In addition, several commonly used math constants are predefined in mikroBasic
PRO for AVR:
PI
PI_HALF
TWO_PI
E
=
=
=
=
3.1415926
1.5707963
6.2831853
2.7182818
Predefined project level defines
These defines are based on a value that you have entered/edited in the current project, and it is equal to the name of selected device for the project.
If ATmega16 is selected device, then ATmega16 token will be defined as 1, so it can
be used for conditional compilation:
#IFDEF ATmega16
...
#ENDIF
Related topics: Project level defines
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
89
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Specifics
ACCESSING INDIVIDUAL BITS
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR allows you to access individual bits of 8-bit variables.
It also supports sbit and bit data types
Accessing Individual Bits Of Variables
To access the individual bits, simply use the direct member selector (.) with a variable, followed by one of identifiers B0, B1, … , B7, or 0, 1, … 7, with 7 being the
most significant bit :
// Clear bit 0 on PORTA
PORTA.B0 = 0
// Clear bit 5 on PORTB
PORTB.5 = 0
There is no need of any special declarations. This kind of selective access is an
intrinsic feature of mikroBasic PRO for AVR and can be used anywhere in the code.
Identifiers B0–B7 are not case sensitive and have a specific namespace. You may
override them with your own members B0–B7 within any given structure.
See Predefined Globals and Constants for more information on register/bit names.
sbit type
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR compiler has sbit data type which provides access to
bit-addressable SFRs. You can access them in several ways:
dim LEDA as sbit at PORTA.B0
dim Name as sbit at sfr-name.B<bit-position>
dim LEDB as sbit at PORTB.0
dim Name as sbit at sfr-name.<bit-position>
90
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Specifics
bit type
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR compiler provides a bit data type that may be used
for variable declarations. It can not be used for argument lists, and function-return
values.
dim bf as bit
' bit variable
There are no pointers to bit variables:
dim ptr as ^bit
' invalid
An array of type bit is not valid:
dim arr as array[5] of bit
' invalid
Note :
- Bit variables can not be initialized.
- Bit variables can not be members of structures.
- Bit variables do not have addresses, therefore unary operator @ (address
of) is not applicable to these variables.
Related topics: Predefined globals and constants
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
91
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Specifics
INTERRUPTS
AVR derivates acknowledges an interrupt request by executing a hardware generated CALL to the appropriate servicing routine ISRs. ISRs are organized in IVT. ISR
is defined as a standard function but with the org directive afterwards which connects the function with specific interrupt vector. For example org 0x000B is IVT
address of Timer/Counter 2 Overflow interrupt source of the ATMEGA16.
For more information on interrupts and IVT refer to the specific data sheet.
Function Calls from Interrupt
Calling functions from within the interrupt routine is allowed. The compiler takes care
about the registers being used, both in "interrupt" and in "main" thread, and performs
"smart" context-switching between them two, saving only the registers that have
been used in both threads. It is not recommended to use function call from interrupt.
In case of doing that take care of stack depth.
sub procedure Interrupt() org 0x16
RS485Master_Receive(dat)
end sub
Most of the MCUs can access interrupt service routines directly, but some can not
reach interrupt service routines if they are allocated on addresses greater than 2K
from the IVT. In this case, compiler automatically creates Goto table, in order to jump
to such interrupt service routines.
92
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Specifics
These principles can be explained on the picture below :
Direct accessing interrupt service routine and accessing interrupt service routine via
Goto table.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
93
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Specifics
LINKER DIRECTIVES
mikroBasic PRO for AVR uses internal algorithm to distribute objects within memory. If you need to have a variable or routine at the specific predefined address, use
the linker directives absolute and org.
Note: You must specify an even address when using the linker directives.
Directive absolute
The directive absolute specifies the starting address in RAM for a variable. If the
variable spans more than 1 word (16-bit), higher words will be stored at the consecutive locations.
The absolute directive is appended to the declaration of a variable:
dim x as word absolute 0x32
' Variable x will occupy 1 word (16 bits) at address 0x32
dim y as longint absolute 0x34
' Variable y will occupy 2 words at addresses 0x34 and 0x36
Be careful when using absolute directive, as you may overlap two variables by accident. For example:
dim i as word absolute 0x42
' Variable i will occupy 1 word at address 0x42;
dim jj as longint absolute 0x40
' Variable will occupy 2 words at 0x40 and 0x42; thus,
' changing i changes jj at the same time and vice versa
Note: You must specify an even address when using the directive absolute.
Directive org
The directive org specifies the starting address of a routine in ROM. It is appended
to the declaration of routine. For example:
sub procedure proc(dim par as word) org 0x200
' Procedure will start at the address 0x200;
...
end sub
Note: You must specify an even address when using the directive org.
94
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Specifics
BUILT-IN ROUTINES
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR compiler provides a set of useful built-in utility functions.
The Lo, Hi, Higher, Highest routines are implemented as macros. If you want
to use these functions you must include built_in.h header file (located in the inlclude folder of the compiler) into your project.
The Delay_us and Delay_ms routines are implemented as “inline”; i.e. code is generated in the place of a call, so the call doesn’t count against the nested call limit.
The Vdelay_ms, Delay_Cyc and Get_Fosc_kHz are actual Basic routines. Their
sources can be found in Delays.mbas file located in the uses folder of the compiler.
-
Lo
Hi
Higher
Highest
- Inc
- Dec
-
Delay_us
Delay_ms
Vdelay_ms
Delay_Cyc
- Clock_Khz
- Clock_Mhz
- SetFuncCall
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
95
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Specifics
Lo
Prototype
sub function Lo(number as longint) as byte
Returns
Lowest 8 bits (byte) of number, bits 7..0.
Function returns the lowest byte of number. Function does not interpret bit patterns of number – it merely returns 8 bits as found in register.
Description
This is an “inline” routine; code is generated in the place of the call, so the call
doesn’t count against the nested call limit.
Requires
Arguments must be variable of scalar type (i.e. Arithmetic Types and Pointers).
Example
d = 0x1AC30F4
tmp = Lo(d) ' Equals 0xF4
Hi
Prototype
sub function Hi(number as longint) as byte
Returns
Returns next to the lowest byte of number, bits 8..15.
Function returns next to the lowest byte of number. Function does not interpret
bit patterns of number – it merely returns 8 bits as found in register.
Description
This is an “inline” routine; code is generated in the place of the call, so the call
doesn’t count against the nested call limit.
Requires
Arguments must be variable of scalar type (i.e. Arithmetic Types and Pointers).
Example
d = 0x1AC30F4
tmp = Hi(d) ' Equals 0x30
Higher
Prototype
sub function Higher(number as longint) as byte
Returns
Returns next to the highest byte of number, bits 16..23.
Function returns next to the highest byte of number. Function does not interpret
bit patterns of number – it merely returns 8 bits as found in register.
Description
This is an “inline” routine; code is generated in the place of the call, so the call
doesn’t count against the nested call limit.
96
Requires
Arguments must be variable of scalar type (i.e. Arithmetic Types and Pointers).
Example
d = 0x1AC30F4
tmp = Higher(d)
' Equals 0xAC
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Specifics
Highest
Prototype
sub function Highest(number as longint) as byte
Returns
Returns the highest byte of number, bits 24..31.
Function returns the highest byte of number. Function does not interpret bit patterns of number – it merely returns 8 bits as found in register.
Description
This is an “inline” routine; code is generated in the place of the call, so the call
doesn’t count against the nested call limit.
Requires
Arguments must be variable of scalar type (i.e. Arithmetic Types and Pointers).
Example
d = 0x1AC30F4
tmp = Highest(d)
' Equals 0x01
Inc
Prototype
sub procedure Inc(dim byref par as longint)
Returns
Nothing.
Description Increases parameter par by 1.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
p = 4
Inc(p)
' p is now 5
Dec
Prototype
sub procedure Dec(dim byref par as longint)
Returns
Nothing.
Description Decreases parameter par by 1.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
p = 4
Dec(p)
' p is now 3
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
97
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Specifics
Delay_us
Prototype
sub procedure Delay_us(const time_in_us as longword)
Returns
Nothing.
Creates a software delay in duration of time_in_us microseconds (a constant).
Range of applicable constants depends on the oscillator frequency.
Description
This is an “inline” routine; code is generated in the place of the call, so the call
doesn’t count against the nested call limit.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
Delay_us(1000)
' One millisecond pause
Delay_ms
Prototype
sub procedure Delay_ms(const time_in_ms as longword)
Returns
Nothing.
Creates a software delay in duration of time_in_ms milliseconds (a constant).
Range of applicable constants depends on the oscillator frequency.
Description
This is an “inline” routine; code is generated in the place of the call, so the call
doesn’t count against the nested call limit.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
Delay_ms(1000)
' One second pause
Vdelay_ms
Prototype
sub procedure Vdelay_ms(time_in_ms as word)
Returns
Nothing.
Creates a software delay in duration of time_in_ms milliseconds (a variable).
Generated delay is not as precise as the delay created by Delay_ms.
Description
Note that Vdelay_ms is library function rather than a built-in routine; it is presented in this topic for the sake of convenience.
98
Requires
Nothing.
Example
pause = 1000
' ...
Vdelay_ms(pause)
' ~ one second pause
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Specifics
Delay_Cyc
Prototype
sub procedure Delay_Cyc(Cycles_div_by_10 as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Creates a delay based on MCU clock. Delay lasts for 10 times the input parameter in MCU cycles.
Description
Note that Delay_Cyc is library function rather than a built-in routine; it is presented in this topic for the sake of convenience. There are limitations for
Cycles_div_by_10 value. Value Cycles_div_by_10 must be between 2 and 257.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
Delay_Cyc(10)
' Hundred MCU cycles pause
Clock_KHz
Prototype
sub function Clock_Khz() as word
Returns
Device clock in KHz, rounded to the nearest integer.
Function returns device clock in KHz, rounded to the nearest integer.
Description
This is an “inline” routine; code is generated in the place of the call, so the call
doesn’t count against the nested call limit.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
clk = Clock_kHz()
Clock_MHz
Prototype
sub function Clock_MHz() as byte
Returns
Device clock in MHz, rounded to the nearest integer.
Function returns device clock in MHz, rounded to the nearest integer.
Description
This is an “inline” routine; code is generated in the place of the call, so the call
doesn’t count against the nested call limit.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
clk = Clock_Mhz()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
99
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Specifics
SetFuncCall
Prototype
sub procedure SetFuncCall(FuncName as string)
Returns
Nothing.
Function informs the linker about a specific routine being called. SetFuncCall
has to be called in a routine which accesses another routine via a pointer.
Description
Function prepares the caller tree, and informs linker about the procedure usage,
making it possible to link the called routine.
100
Requires
Nothing.
Example
sub procedure first(p, q as byte)
...
SetFuncCall(second) ' let linker know that we will call the
routine 'second'
...
end sub
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Specifics
CODE OPTIMIZATION
Optimizer has been added to extend the compiler usability, cut down the amount of
code generated and speed-up its execution. The main features are:
Constant folding
All expressions that can be evaluated in the compile time (i.e. are constant) are
being replaced by their results. (3 + 5 -> 8);
Constant propagation
When a constant value is being assigned to a certain variable, the compiler recognizes this and replaces the use of the variable by constant in the code that follows,
as long as the value of a variable remains unchanged.
Copy propagation
The compiler recognizes that two variables have the same value and eliminates one
of them further in the code.
Value numbering
The compiler "recognizes" if two expressions yield the same result and can therefore eliminate the entire computation for one of them.
"Dead code" ellimination
The code snippets that are not being used elsewhere in the programme do not affect
the final result of the application. They are automatically removed.
Stack allocation
Temporary registers ("Stacks") are being used more rationally, allowing VERY complex expressions to be evaluated with a minimum stack consumption.
Local vars optimization
No local variables are being used if their result does not affect some of the global or
volatile variables.
Better code generation and local optimization
Code generation is more consistent and more attention is payed to implement specific solutions for the code "building bricks" that further reduce output code size.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
101
CHAPTER 3
Specifics
102
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER
4
AVR Specifics
Types Efficiency
First of all, you should know that AVR ALU, which performs arithmetic operations, is
optimized for working with bytes. Although mikroBasic PRO for AVR is capable of
handling very complex data types, AVR may choke on them, especially if you are
working on some of the older models. This can dramatically increase the time needed for performing even simple operations. Universal advice is to use the smallest
possible type in every situation. It applies to all programming in general, and doubly
so with microcontrollers. Types efficiency is determined by the part of RAM memory that is used to store a variable/constant.
103
CHAPTER 4
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
8051 Specifics
Nested Calls Limitations
There are no Nested Calls Limitations, except by RAM size. A Nested call represents a function call to another function within the function body. With each function
call, the stack increases for the size of the returned address. Number of nested calls
is equel to the capacity of RAM which is left out after allocation of all variables.
Important notes:
- There are many different types of derivates, so it is necessary to be familiar with
characteristics and special features of the microcontroller in you are using.
- Some of the AVR MCUs have hardware multiplier. Due to this, be sure to pay
attention when porting code from one MCU to another, because compiled code
can vary by its size.
- Not all microcontrollers share the same instruction set. It is advisable to carefully
read the instruction set of the desired MCU, before you start writing your code.
Compiler automatically takes care of appropiate instruction set, and if unapropriate
asm instruction is used in in-line assembly, compiler will report an error.
- Program counter size is MCU dependent. Thus, there are two sets of libraries :
- MCUs with program counter size larger than 16 bits (flash memory size
larger than 128kb)
- MCUs with program counter size less or equal 16 bits (flash memory size
smaller than 128kb)
- Assembly SPM instruction and its derivates must reside in Boot Loader section of
program memory.
- Part of flash memory can be dedicated to Boot Loader code. For details, refer to
AVR memory organization.
Related topics: mikroBasic PRO for AVR specifics, AVR memory organization
104
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 4
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
8051 Specifics
AVR MEMORY ORGANIZATION
The AVR microcontroller's memory is divided into Program Memory and Data
Memory. Program Memory (ROM) is used for permanent saving program being executed, while Data Memory (RAM) is used for temporarily storing and keeping intermediate results and variables.
Program Memory (ROM)
Program Memory (ROM) is used for permanent saving program (CODE) being executed, and it is divided into two sections, Boot Program section and the Application
Program section. The size of these sections is configured by the BOOTSZ fuse.
These two sections can have different level of protection since they have different
sets of Lock bits.
Depending on the settings made in compiler, program memory may also used to
store a constant variables. The AVR executes programs stored in program memory
only. code memory type specifier is used to refer to program memory.
Data Memory
Data memory consists of :
-
Rx space
I/O Memory
Extended I/O Memory (MCU dependent)
Internal SRAM
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
105
CHAPTER 4
8051 Specifics
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Rx space consists of 32 general purpose working 8-bit registers (R0-R31). These
registers have the shortest (fastest) access time, which allows single-cycle Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU) operation.
I/O Memory space contains addresses for CPU peripheral function, such as Control
registers, SPI, and other I/O functions.
Due to the complexity, some AVR microcontrollers with more peripherals have
Extended I/O memory, which occupies part of the internal SRAM. Extended I/O
memory is MCU dependent.
Storing data in I/O and Extended I/O memory is handled by the compiler only. Users
can not use this memory space for storing their data.
Internal SRAM (Data Memory) is used for temporarily storing and keeping intermediate results and variables (static link and dynamic link).
There are four memory type specifiers that can be used to refer to the data memory: rx, data, io, sfr i register.
Related topics: Accessing individual bits, SFRs, Memory type specifiers
106
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 4
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
8051 Specifics
MEMORY TYPE SPECIFIERS
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR supports usage of all memory areas. Each variable may be explicitly assigned to a specific memory space by including a memory type specifier in the declaration,
or implicitly assigned.
The following memory type specifiers can be used:
-
code
data
rx
io
sfr
register
Memory type specifiers can be included in variable declaration.
For example:
dim data_buffer as byte data
const txt = "Enter parameter" code
' puts data_buffer in data ram
' puts text in program memory
code
Description The code memory type may be used for allocating constants in program memory.
Example
' puts txt in program memory
const txt = "Enter parameter" code
data
Description This memory specifier is used when storing variable to the internal data SRAM.
Example
' puts data_buffer in data ram
dim data_buffer as byte data
rx
This memory specifier allows variable to be stored in the Rx space (Register file).
Description
Example
Note: In most of the cases, there will be enough space left for the user variables
in the Rx space. However, since compiler uses Rx space for storing temporary
variables, it might happen that user variables will be stored in the internal data
SRAM, when writing complex programs.
' puts y in Rx space
dim y as char rx
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
107
CHAPTER 4
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
8051 Specifics
io
Description This memory specifier allows user to access the I/O Memory space.
Example
' put io_buff in io memory space
dim io_buff as byte io
sfr
This memory specifier in combination with (rx, io, data) allows user to
Description access special function registers. It also instructs compiler to maintain same
identifier in Basic and assembly.
Example
dim io_buff as byte io sfr
' put io_buff in I/O memory space
dim y as char rx sfr
' puts y in Rx space
dim temp as byte data sfr and dim temp as byte sfr are equivalent, and put temp in Extended I/O Space.
register
If no other memory specifier is used (rx, io, sfr, code or data), the regisDescription ter specifer places variable in Rx space, and instructs compiler to maintain
same identifier in C and assembly.
Example
dim y as char register
Note: If none of the memory specifiers are used when declaring a variable, data specifier will be
set as default by the compiler.
Related topics: AVR Memory Organization, Accessing individual bits, SFRs, Constants, Functions
108
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER
5
mikroBasic PRO for
AVR Language
Reference
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR Language Reference describes the syntax, semantics
and implementation of the mikroBasic PRO for AVR language.
The aim of this reference guide is to provide a more understandable description of
the mikroBasic PRO for AVR language to the user.
109
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
MIKROBASIC PRO FOR AVR LANGUAGE REFERENCE
Lexical Elements
Whitespace
Comments
Tokens
Literals
Keywords
Identifiers
Punctuators
Program Organization
Program Organization
Scope and Visibility
Modules
Variables
Constants
Labels
Symbols
Functions and Procedures
Functions
Procedures
Types
Simple Types
Arrays
Strings
Pointers
Structures
Types Conversions
Implicit Conversion
Explicit Conversion
Operators
Introduction to Operators
Operators Precedence and Associativity
Arithmetic Operators
Relational Operators
Bitwise Operators
Boolean Operators
Expressions
Expressions
Statements
Introduction to Statements
Assignment Statements
Conditional Statements
110
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
If Statement
Select Case Statement
Iteration Statements (Loops)
For Statement
While Statement
Do Statement
Jump Statements
Break and Continue Statements
Exit Statement
Goto Statement
Gosub Statement
asm Statement
Directives
Compiler Directives
Linker Directives
LEXICAL ELEMENTS OVERVIEW
These topics provide a formal definition of the mikroBasic PRO for AVR lexical elements. They describe different categories of word-like units (tokens) recognized by
the language.
In tokenizing phase of compilation, the source code file is parsed (that is, broken
down) into tokens and whitespace. The tokens in mikroBasic PRO are derived from
a series of operations performed on your programs by the compiler.
A mikroBasic PRO program starts as a sequence of ASCII characters representing
the source code, created by keystrokes using a suitable text editor (such as the
mikroBasic PRO Code Editor). The basic program unit in mikroBasic PRO is a file.
This usually corresponds to a named file located in RAM or on disk, having the
extension .mbas.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
111
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
WHITESPACE
Whitespace is a collective name given to spaces (blanks), horizontal and vertical
tabs, and comments. Whitespace serves to indicate where tokens start and end, but
beyond this function, any surplus whitespace is discarded.
For example, the two sequences
dim tmp as byte
dim j as word
and
dim
dim
tmp
j
as
as
byte
word
are lexically equivalent and parse identically.
Newline Character
Newline character (CR/LF) is not a whitespace in BASIC, and serves as a statement
terminator/separator. In mikroBasic PRO for AVR, however, you may use newline to
break long statements into several lines. Parser will first try to get the longest possible expression (across lines if necessary), and then check for statement terminators.
Whitespace in Strings
The ASCII characters representing whitespace can occur within string literals, where
they are protected from the normal parsing process (they remain as a part of the
string). For example, statement
some_string = "mikro foo"
parses to four tokens, including a single string literal token:
some_string
=
"mikro foo"
newline character
112
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
COMMENTS
Comments are pieces of text used to annotate a program, and are technically another form of whitespace. Comments are for the programmer’s use only; they are
stripped from the source text before parsing.
Use the apostrophe to create a comment:
' Any text between an apostrophe and the end of the
' line constitutes a comment. May span one line only.
There are no multi-line comments in mikroBasic PRO for AVR
TOKENS
Token is the smallest element of a mikroBasic PRO for AVR program, meaningful to
the compiler. The parser separates tokens from the input stream by creating the
longest token possible using the input characters in a left–to–right scan.
mikroBasic PRO for AVR recognizes the following kinds of tokens:
-
keywords
identifiers
constants
operators
punctuators (also known as separators)
Token Extraction Example
Here is an example of token extraction. See the following code sequence:
end_flag = 0
The compiler would parse it into four tokens:
end_flag
=
0
newline
' variable identifier
' assignment operator
' literal
' statement terminator
Note that end_flag would be parsed as a single identifier, rather than the keyword
end followed by the identifier _flag.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
113
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
LITERALS
Literals are tokens representing fixed numeric or character values.
The data type of a constant is deduced by the compiler using such clues as numeric value and format used in the source code.
Integer Literals
Integral values can be represented in decimal, hexadecimal or binary notation.
In decimal notation, numerals are represented as a sequence of digits (without commas, spaces or dots), with optional prefix + or - operator to indicate the sign. Values
default to positive (6258 is equivalent to +6258).
The dollar-sign prefix ($) or the prefix 0x indicates a hexadecimal numeral (for
example, $8F or 0x8F).
The percent-sign prefix (%) indicates a binary numeral (for example, %0101).
Here are some examples:
11
$11
0x11
%11
'
'
'
'
decimal literal
hex literal, equals decimal 17
hex literal, equals decimal 17
binary literal, equals decimal 3
The allowed range of values is imposed by the largest data type in mikroBasic PRO
for AVR – longword. The compiler will report an error if the literal exceeds
4294967295 ($FFFFFFFF).
Floating Point Literals
A floating-point value consists of:
-
Decimal integer
Decimal point
Decimal fraction
e or E and a signed integer exponent (optional)
You can omit either decimal integer or decimal fraction (but not both).
Negative floating constants are taken as positive constants with the unary operator
minus (-) prefixed.
114
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
mikroBasic PRO limits floating-point constants to the range of ±1.17549435082 *
10-38 .. ±6.80564774407 * 1038.
Here are some examples:
0.
-1.23
23.45e6
2e-5
3E+10
.09E34
'
'
'
'
'
'
=
=
=
=
=
=
0.0
-1.23
23.45 * 10^6
2.0 * 10^-5
3.0 * 10^10
0.09 * 10^34
Character Literals
Character literal is one character from the extended ASCII character set, enclosed
with quotes (for example, "A"). Character literal can be assigned to variables of
byte and char type (variable of byte will be assigned the ASCII value of the character). Also, you can assign character literal to a string variable.
String Literals
String literal is a sequence of characters from the extended ASCII character set,
enclosed with quotes. Whitespace is preserved in string literals, i.e. parser does not
“go into” strings but treats them as single tokens.
Length of string literal is a number of characters it consists of. String is stored internally as the given sequence of characters plus a final null character. This null
character is introduced to terminate the string, it does not count against the string’s
total length.
String literal with nothing in between the quotes (null string) is stored as a single null
character.
You can assign string literal to a string variable or to an array of char.
Here are several string literals:
"Hello world!"
"Temperature is stable"
" "
"C"
""
'
'
'
'
'
message, 12 chars long
message, 21 chars long
two spaces, 2 chars long
letter, 1 char long
null string, 0 chars long
The quote itself cannot be a part of the string literal, i.e. there is no escape
sequence. You could use the built-in function Chr to print a quote: Chr(34). Also,
see String Splicing.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
115
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
KEYWORDS
Keywords are special-purpose words which cannot be used as normal identifier
names.
Beside standard BASIC keywords, all relevant SFR are defined as global variables
and represent reserved words that cannot be redefined (for example: P0, TMR1,
T1CON, etc). Probe Code Assistant for specific letters (Ctrl+Space in Editor) or refer
to Predefined Globals and Constants.
Here is the alphabetical listing of keywords in mikroBasic PRO for AVR:
Abstract
And
Array
As
at
Asm
Assembler
Automated
bdata
Begin
bit
Case
Cdecl
Class
Code
compact
Const
Constructor
Contains
Data
Default
deprecated
Destructor
Dispid
Dispinterface
Div
Do
Downto
Dynamic
Else
End
Except
Export
Exports
External
Far
File
Finalization
Finally
For
Forward
Function
Goto
idata
If
ilevel
Implementation
In
Index
Inherited
Initialization
Inline
Interface
Is
Label
large
Library
Message
Mod
name
Near
Nil
Not
Object
Of
on
Or
org
Out
overload
Override
package
Packed
Pascal
pdata
platform
Private
Procedure
Program
Property
Protected
Public
Published
Raise
Read
Readonly
Record
Register
Reintroduce
Repeat
requires
Reset
Resourcestring
Resume
Safecall
sbit
Set
sfr
Shl
Shr
small
Stdcall
Stored
String
Stringresource
Then
Threadvar
To
Try
Type
Unit
Until
Uses
Var
Virtual
Volatile
While
With
Write
Writeonly
xdata
Xor
Also, mikroBasic PRO for AVR includes a number of predefined identifiers used in
libraries. You could replace them by your own definitions, if you plan to develop your
own libraries. For more information, see mikroBasic PRO for AVR Libraries.
116
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
IDENTIFIERS
Identifiers are arbitrary names of any length given to functions, variables, symbolic
constants, user-defined data types and labels. All these program elements will be
referred to as objects throughout the help (don't be confused with the meaning of
object in object-oriented programming).
Identifiers can contain letters from a to z and A to Z, the underscore character “_”
and digits from 0 to 9. First character must be a letter or an underscore, i.e. identifier cannot begin with a numeral.
Case Sensitivity
mikroBasic PRO for AVR is not case sensitive, so Sum, sum, and suM are equivalent identifiers.
Uniqueness and Scope
Although identifier names are arbitrary (within the rules stated), errors result if the
same name is used for more than one identifier within the same scope. Simply,
duplicate names are illegal within the same scope. For more information, refer to
Scope and Visibility.
Identifier Examples
Here are some valid identifiers:
temperature_V1
Pressure
no_hit
dat2string
SUM3
_vtext
… and here are some invalid identifiers:
7temp
%higher
xor
j23.07.04
'
'
'
'
NO
NO
NO
NO
-----
cannot
cannot
cannot
cannot
begin with a numeral
contain special characters
match reserved word
contain special characters (dot)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
117
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
PUNCTUATORS
The mikroBasic PRO punctuators (also known as separators) are:
-
[ ] – Brackets
( ) – Parentheses
, – Comma
: – Colon
. – Dot
Brackets
Brackets [ ] indicate single and multidimensional array subscripts:
dim alphabet as byte[30]
' ...
alphabet[2] = "c"
For more information, refer to Arrays.
Parentheses
Parentheses ( ) are used to group expressions, isolate conditional expressions and
indicate function calls and function declarations:
d = c * (a + b)
' Override normal precedence
if (d = z) then ...
' Useful with conditional statements
func()
' Function call, no arguments
sub function func2(dim n as word)' Function declaration w/ parameters
For more information, refer to Operators Precedence and Associativity, Expressions,
or Functions and Procedures.
Comma
Comma (,) separates the arguments in function calls:
Lcd_Out(1, 1, txt)
Furthermore, the comma separates identifiers in declarations:
dim i, j, k as word
The comma also separates elements in initialization lists of constant arrays:
const MONTHS as byte[12] = (31,28,31,30,31,30,31,31,30,31,30,31)
118
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
Colon
Colon (:) is used to indicate a labeled statement:
start: nop
'...
goto start
For more information, refer to Labels.
Dot
Dot (.) indicates access to a structure member. For example:
person.surname = "Smith"
For more information, refer to Structures.
Dot is a necessary part of floating point literals. Also, dot can be used for accessing
individual bits of registers in mikroBasic PRO.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
119
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
PROGRAM ORGANIZATION
mikroBasic PRO for AVR imposes strict program organization. Below you can find
models for writing legible and organized source files. For more information on file
inclusion and scope, refer to Modules and to Scope and Visibility.
Organization of Main Module
Basically, a main source file has two sections: declaration and program body. Declarations should be in their proper place in the code, organized in an orderly manner. Otherwise, the compiler may not be able to comprehend the program correctly.
When writing code, follow the model presented below. The main module should look
like this:
program <program name>
include <include other modules>
'********************************************************
'* Declarations (globals):
'********************************************************
' symbols declarations
symbol ...
' constants declarations
const ...
' structures declarations
structure ...
' variables declarations
dim Name[, Name2...] as
[volatile] [register] [sfr]
[^]type
[absolute
0x123]
[external]
' procedures declarations
sub procedure procedure_name(...)
<local declarations>
...
end sub
' functions declarations
sub function function_name(...) as return_type
<local declarations>
...
end sub
'********************************************************
'* Program body:
'********************************************************
main:
' write your code here
end.
120
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
Organization of Other Modules
Modules other than main start with the keyword module. Implementation section
starts with the keyword implements. Follow the model presented below:
module <module name>
include <include other modules>
'********************************************************
'* Interface (globals):
'********************************************************
' symbols declarations
symbol ...
' constants declarations
const ...
' structures declarations
structure ...
' variables declarations
dim Name[, Name2...] as
[volatile] [register] [sfr]
[^]type
[absolute
0x123]
[external]
' procedures prototypes
sub procedure sub_procedure_name([dim byref] [const] ParamName as
[^]type, [dim byref] [const] ParamName2, ParamName3 as [^]type)
' functions prototypes
sub function sub_function_name([dim byref] [const] ParamName as
[^]type, [dim byref] [const] ParamName2, ParamName3 as [^]type) as
[^]type
'********************************************************
'* Implementation:
'********************************************************
implements
' constants declarations
const ...
' variables declarations
dim ...
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
121
CHAPTER 5
Language Reference
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
' procedures declarations
sub procedure sub_procedure_name([dim byref] [const] ParamName as
[^]type, [dim byref] [const] ParamName2, ParamName3 as [^]type);
[ilevel 0x123] [overload] [forward]
<local declarations>
...
end sub
' functions declarations
sub function sub_function_name([dim byref] [const] ParamName as
[^]type, [dim byref] [const] ParamName2, ParamName3 as [^]type) as
[^]type [ilevel 0x123] [overload] [forward]
<local declarations>
...
end sub
end.
Note: Sub functions and sub procedures must have the same declarations in the
interface and implementation section. Otherwise, compiler will report an error.
122
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
SCOPE AND VISIBILITY
Scope
The scope of identifier is a part of the program in which the identifier can be used to
access its object. There are different categories of scope, depending on how and
where identifiers are declared:
Place of declaration
Scope
Scope extends from the point where it is
Identifier is declared in the
declared to the end of the current file, including
declaration section of the main
all routines enclosed within that scope. These
module, out of any function or
identifiers have a file scope and are referred to
procedure
as globals.
Identifier is declared in the
function or procedure
Scope extends from the point where it is
declared to the end of the current routine. These
identifiers are referred to as locals.
Scope extends the interface section of a module
from the point where it is declared to the end of
Identifier is declared in the
the module, and to any other module or program
interface section of the module that uses that module. The only exception are
symbols which have a scope limited to the file in
which they are declared.
Identifier is declared in the
implementation section of the
module, but not within any
function or procedure
Scope extends from the point where it is
declared to the end of the module. The identifier
is available to any function or procedure in the
module.
Visibility
The visibility of an identifier is a region of the program source code from where a
legal access to the identifier’s associated object can be made .
Scope and visibility usually coincide, though there are circumstances under which
an object becomes temporarily hidden by the appearance of a duplicate identifier:
the object still exists but the original identifier cannot be used to access it until the
scope of the duplicate identifier is ended.
Technically, visibility cannot exceed scope, but scope can exceed visibility.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
123
CHAPTER 5
Language Reference
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
MODULES
In mikroBasic PRO for AVR, each project consists of a single project file and one or
more module files. The project file, with extension .mbpav contains information on
the project, while modules, with extension .mbas, contain the actual source code.
See Program Organization for a detailed look at module arrangement.
Modules allow you to:
- break large programs into encapsulated modules that can be edited separately,
- create libraries that can be used in different projects,
- distribute libraries to other developers without disclosing the source code.
Each module is stored in its own file and compiled separately; compiled modules are
linked to create an application. To build a project, the compiler needs either a source
file or a compiled module file for each module.
Include Clause
mikroBasic PRO for AVR includes modules by means of the include clause. It consists of the reserved word include, followed by a quoted module name. Extension of
the file should not be included.
You can include one file per include clause. There can be any number of the include
clauses in each source file, but they all must be stated immediately after the program (or module) name.
Here’s an example:
program MyProgram
include "utils"
include "strings"
include "MyUnit"
...
For the given module name, the compiler will check for the presence of .mcl and
.mbas files, in order specified by search paths.
- If both .mbas and .mcl files are found, the compiler will check their dates and
include the newer one in the project. If the .mbas file is newer than the .mcl, then
.mbas file will be recompiled and new .mcl will be created, overwriting the old .mcl.
- If only the .mbas file is found, the compiler will create the .mcl file and include it in
the project;
- If only the .mcl file is present, i.e. no source code is available, the compiler will
include it as found;
- If none of the files found, the compiler will issue a “File not found” warning.
124
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
Main Module
Every project in mikroBasic PRO for AVR requires a single main module file. The
main module is identified by the keyword program at the beginning. It instructs the
compiler where to “start”.
After you have successfully created an empty project with Project Wizard, Code Editor will display a new main module. It contains the bare-bones of the program:
program MyProject
' main procedure
main:
' Place program code here
end.
Other than comments, nothing should precede the keyword program. After the program name, you can optionally place the include clauses.
Place all global declarations (constants, variables, labels, routines, structures)
before the label main.
Other Modules
Modules other than main start with the keyword module. Newly created blank module contains the bare-bones:
module MyModule
implements
end.
Other than comments, nothing should precede the keyword module. After the module name, you can optionally place the include clauses.
Interface Section
Part of the module above the keyword implements is referred to as interface section. Here, you can place global declarations (constants, variables, labels, routines,
structures) for the project.
Do not define routines in the interface section. Instead, state the prototypes of routines (from implementation section) that you want to be visible outside the module.
Prototypes must exactly match the declarations.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
125
CHAPTER 5
Language Reference
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Implementation Section
Implementation section hides all the irrelevant innards from other modules, allowing
encapsulation of code.
Everything declared below the keyword implements is private, i.e. has its scope limited to the file. When you declare an identifier in the implementation section of a
module, you cannot use it outside the module, but you can use it in any block or routine defined within the module.
By placing the prototype in the interface section of the module (above the implements) you can make the routine public, i.e. visible outside of module. Prototypes
must exactly match the declarations.
126
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
VARIABLES
Variable is an object whose value can be changed during the runtime. Every variable is declared under unique name which must be a valid identifier. This name is
used for accessing the memory location occupied by the variable.
Variables are declared in the declaration part of the file or routine — each variable needs
to be declared before it is used. Global variables (those that do not belong to any enclosing block) are declared below the include statements, above the label main.
Specifying a data type for each variable is mandatory. mikroBasic PRO syntax for
variable declaration is:
dim identifier_list as type
Here, identifier_list is a comma-delimited list of valid identifiers, and type can
be any data type.
For more details refer to Types and Types Conversions. For more information on
variables’ scope refer to the chapter Scope and Visibility.
Here are a few examples:
dim i, j, k as byte
dim counter, temp as word
dim samples as longint[100]
Variables and AVR
Every declared variable consumes part of RAM memory. Data type of variable determines not only the allowed range of values, but also the space a variable occupies
in RAM memory. Bear in mind that operations using different types of variables take
different time to be completed. mikroBasic PRO for AVR recycles local variable
memory space – local variables declared in different functions and procedures
share the same memory space, if possible.
There is no need to declare SFR explicitly, as mikroBasic PRO for AVR automatically
declares relevant registers as global variables of word. For example: W0, TMR1, etc.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
127
CHAPTER 5
Language Reference
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
CONSTANTS
Constant is a data whose value cannot be changed during the runtime. Using a constant in a program consumes no RAM memory. Constants can be used in any
expression, but cannot be assigned a new value.
Constants are declared in the declaration part of the program or routine, with the following syntax:
const constant_name [as type] = value
Every constant is declared under unique constant_name which must be a valid
identifier. It is a tradition to write constant names in uppercase. Constant requires
you to specify value, which is a literal appropriate for the given type. type is optional and in the absence of it , the compiler assumes the “smallest” type that can
accommodate value.
Note: You cannot omit type if declaring a constant array.
Here are a few examples:
const
const
const
const
const
128
MAX as longint = 10000
MIN = 1000
' compiler will assume word type
SWITCH = "n"
' compiler will assume char type
MSG = "Hello"
' compiler will assume string type
MONTHS as byte[12] = (31,28,31,30,31,30,31,31,30,31,30,31)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
LABELS
Labels serve as targets for the goto and gosub statements. Mark the desired statement with label and colon like this:
label_identifier : statement
No special declaration of label is necessary in mikroBasic PRO for AVR.
Name of the label needs to be a valid identifier. The labeled statement and
goto/gosub statement must belong to the same block. Hence it is not possible to
jump into or out of routine. Do not mark more than one statement in a block with the
same label.
Note: The label main marks the entry point of a program and must be present in the
main module of every project. See Program Organization for more information.
Here is an example of an infinite loop that calls the procedure Beep repeatedly:
loop:
Beep
goto loop
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
129
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
SYMBOLS
mikroBasic PRO symbols allow you to create simple macros without parameters.
You can replace any line of code with a single identifier alias. Symbols, when properly used, can increase code legibility and reusability.
Symbols need to be declared at the very beginning of the module, right after the
module name and (optional) include clauses. Check Program Organization for
more details. Scope of a symbol is always limited to the file in which it has been
declared.
Symbol is declared as:
symbol alias = code
Here, alias must be a valid identifier which you will use throughout the code. This
identifier has a file scope. The code can be any line of code (literals, assignments,
function calls, etc).
Using a symbol in the program consumes no RAM – the compiler will simply replace
each instance of a symbol with the appropriate line of code from the declaration.
Here is an example:
symbol MAXALLOWED = 216
symbol PORT = P0
symbol MYDELAY = Delay_ms(1000)
dim cnt as byte
' Symbol as alias for numeric value
' Symbol as alias for SFR
' Symbol as alias for procedure call
' Some variable
'...
main:
if cnt > MAXALLOWED then
cnt = 0
PORT.1 = 0
MYDELAY
end if
Note: Symbols do not support macro expansion in a way the C preprocessor does.
130
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
FUNCTIONS AND PROCEDURES
Functions and procedures, collectively referred to as routines, are subprograms (self-contained statement blocks) which perform a certain task based on a number of input parameters. When executed, a function returns value while procedure does not.
Functions
Function is declared like this:
sub function function_name(parameter_list) as return_type
[ local declarations ]
function body
end sub
function_name represents a function’s name and can be any valid identifier.
return_type is a type of return value and can be any simple type. Within parentheses, parameter_list is a formal parameter list similar to variable declaration. In
mikroBasic PRO for AVR, parameters are always passed to a function by value. To
pass an argument by address, add the keyword byref ahead of identifier.
Local declarations are optional declarations of variables and/or constants, local
for the given function. Function body is a sequence of statements to be executed
upon calling the function.
Calling a function
A function is called by its name, with actual arguments placed in the same sequence
as their matching formal parameters. The compiler is able to coerce mismatching
arguments to the proper type according to implicit conversion rules. Upon a function
call, all formal parameters are created as local objects initialized by values of actual arguments. Upon return from a function, a temporary object is created in the place
of the call and it is initialized by the value of the function result. This means that function call as an operand in complex expression is treated as the function result.
In standard Basic, a function_name is automatically created local variable that can
be used for returning a value of a function. mikroBasic PRO for AVR also allows you
to use the automatically created local variable result to assign the return value of
a function if you find function name to be too ponderous. If the return value of a function is not defined the compiler will report an error.
Function calls are considered to be primary expressions and can be used in situations where expression is expected. A function call can also be a self-contained
statement and in that case the return value is discarded.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
131
CHAPTER 5
Language Reference
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Example
Here’s a simple function which calculates xn based on input parameters x and n (n > 0):
sub function power(dim x, n as byte) as longint
dim i as byte
result = 1
if n > 0 then
for i = 1 to n
result = result*x
next i
end if
end sub
Now we could call it to calculate, say, 312:
tmp = power(3, 12)
PROCEDURES
Procedure is declared like this:
sub procedure procedure_name(parameter_list)
[ local declarations ]
procedure body
end sub
procedure_name represents a procedure’s name and can be any valid identifier. Within
parentheses, parameter_list is a formal parameter list similar to variable declaration. In
mikroBasic PRO for AVR, parameters are always passed to procedure by value; to pass
argument by address, add the keyword byref ahead of identifier.
Local declarations are optional declaration of variables and/or constants, local
for the given procedure. Procedure body is a sequence of statements to be execut-
ed upon calling the procedure.
Calling a procedure
A procedure is called by its name, with actual arguments placed in the same
sequence as their matching formal parameters. The compiler is able to coerce mismatching arguments to the proper type according to implicit conversion rules. Upon
procedure call, all formal parameters are created as local objects initialized by values of actual arguments.
Procedure call is a self-contained statement.
132
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
Example
Here’s an example procedure which transforms its input time parameters, preparing
them for output on Lcd:
sub procedure time_prep(dim
sec = ((sec and $F0) >>
min = ((min and $F0) >>
hr
= ((hr and $F0) >>
end sub
byref
4)*10
4)*10
4)*10
sec, min, hr as byte)
+ (sec and $0F)
+ (min and $0F)
+ (hr and $0F)
Function Pointers
Function pointers are allowed in mikroBasic PRO for AVR. The example shows how
to define and use a function pointer:
Example:
Example demonstrates the usage of function pointers. It is shown how to declare a
procedural type, a pointer to function and finally how to call a function via pointer.
program Example;
typedef TMyFunctionType = function (dim param1, param2 as byte, dim
param3 as word) as word ' First, define the procedural type
dim MyPtr as ^TMyFunctionType
defined type
dim sample as word
' This is a pointer to previously
sub function Func1(dim p1, p2 as byte, dim p3 as word) as word ' Now,
define few functions which will be pointed to. Make sure that parameters match the type definition
result = p1 and p2 or p3
end sub
sub function Func2(dim abc, def as byte, dim ghi as word) as word '
Another function of the same kind. Make sure that parameters match
the type definition
result = abc * def + ghi
end sub
sub function Func3(dim first, yellow as byte, dim monday as word) as
word
' Yet another function. Make sure that parameters match the
type definition
result = monday - yellow - first
end sub
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
133
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
' main program:
main:
MyPtr = @Func1
Sample = MyPtr^(1, 2, 3)
Func1, the return value is
MyPtr = @Func2
Sample = MyPtr^(1, 2, 3)
Func2, the return value is
MyPtr = @Func3
Sample = MyPtr^(1, 2, 3)
Func3, the return value is
end.
' MyPtr
' Perform
3
' MyPtr
' Perform
5
' MyPtr
' Perform
0
now points to Func1
function call via pointer, call
now points to Func2
function call via pointer, call
now points to Func3
function call via pointer, call
A function can return a complex type. Follow the example bellow to learn how to
declare and use a function which returns a complex type.
Example:
This example shows how to declare a function which returns a complex type.
program Example
structure TCircle
' Structure
dim CenterX, CenterY as word
dim Radius as byte
end structure
dim MyCircle as TCircle ' Global variable
sub function DefineCircle(dim x, y as word, dim r as byte) as TCircle
' DefineCircle function returns a Structure
result.CenterX = x
result.CenterY = y
result.Radius = r
end sub
main:
MyCircle = DefineCircle(100, 200, 30)
' Get
a Structure via function call
MyCircle.CenterX = DefineCircle(100, 200, 30).CenterX + 20
'
Access a Structure field via function call
'
|------------------------| |-----|
'
|
|
'
Function returns TCircle
Access to one
field of TCircle
end.
134
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
Forward declaration
A function can be declared without having it followed by it's implementation, by having it followed by the forward procedure. The effective implementation of that function must follow later in the module. The function can be used after a forward declaration as if it had been implemented already. The following is an example of a forward declaration:
program Volume
dim Volume as word
sub function First(a as word, b as word) as word forward
sub function Second(c as word) as word
dim tmp as word
tmp = First(2, 3)
result = tmp * c
end sub
sub function First(a, b as word) as word
result = a * b
end sub
main:
Volume = Second(4)
end.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
135
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
TYPES
Basic is strictly typed language, which means that every variable and constant need
to have a strictly defined type, known at the time of compilation.
The type serves:
- to determine correct memory allocation required,
- to interpret the bit patterns found in the object during subsequent accesses,
- in many type-checking situations, to ensure that illegal assignments are trapped.
mikroBasic PRO supports many standard (predefined) and user-defined data types,
including signed and unsigned integers of various sizes, arrays, strings, pointers
and structures.
Type Categories
Types can be divided into:
-
136
simple types
arrays
strings
pointers
structures
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
SIMPLE TYPES
Simple types represent types that cannot be divided into more basic elements and
are the model for representing elementary data on machine level. Basic memory
unit in mikroBasic PRO for AVR has 8 bits.
Here is an overview of simple types in mikroBasic PRO for AVR:
Type
Size
Range
byte, char
8–bit
0 .. 255
short
8–bit
-127 .. 128
word
16–bit
0 .. 65535
integer
16–bit
-32768 .. 32767
longword
32–bit
0 .. 4294967295
longint
32–bit
-2147483648 .. 2147483647
float
32–bit
±1.17549435082 * 10-38 ..
±6.80564774407 * 1038
bit
1–bit
0 or 1
sbit
1–bit
0 or 1
You can assign signed to unsigned or vice versa only using the explicit conversion.
Refer to Types Conversions for more information.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
137
CHAPTER 5
Language Reference
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
ARRAYS
An array represents an indexed collection of elements of the same type (called the
base type). Since each element has a unique index, arrays, unlike sets, can meaningfully contain the same value more than once.
Array Declaration
Array types are denoted by constructions in the following form:
type[array_length]
Each of elements of an array is numbered from 0 through array_length - 1. Every
element of an array is of type and can be accessed by specifying array name followed by element’s index within brackets.
Here are a few examples of array declaration:
dim weekdays as byte[7]
dim samples as word[50]
main:
' Now we can access elements of array variables, for example:
samples[0] = 1
if samples[37] = 0 then
' ...
Constant Arrays
Constant array is initialized by assigning it a comma-delimited sequence of values
within parentheses. For example:
' Declare a constant array which holds number of days in each month:
const MONTHS as byte[12] = (31,28,31,30,31,30,31,31,30,31,30,31)
Note that indexing is zero based; in the previous example, number of days in January is MONTHS[0] and number of days in December is MONTHS[11].
The number of assigned values must not exceed the specified length. Vice versa is
possible, when the trailing “excess” elements will be assigned zeroes.
For more information on arrays of char, refer to Strings.
138
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
STRINGS
A string represents a sequence of characters equivalent to an array of char. It is
declared like this:
string[string_length]
The specifier string_length is a number of characters a string consists of. The
string is stored internally as the given sequence of characters plus a final null character (zero). This appended “stamp” does not count against string’s total length.
A null string ("") is stored as a single null character.
You can assign string literals or other strings to string variables. The string on the
right side of an assignment operator has to be shorter than another one, or of equal
length. For example:
dim msg1 as string[20]
dim msg2 as string[19]
main:
msg1 = "This is some message"
msg2 = "Yet another message"
msg1 = msg2
' this is ok, but vice versa would be illegal
Alternately, you can handle strings element–by–element. For example:
dim s as string[5]
' ...
s = "mik"
' s[0] is char literal "m"
' s[1] is char literal "i"
' s[2] is char literal "k"
' s[3] is zero
' s[4] is undefined
' s[5] is undefined
Be careful when handling strings in this way, since overwriting the end of a string will
cause an unpredictable behavior.
Note
mikroBasic PRO for AVR includes String Library which automatizes string related tasks.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
139
CHAPTER 5
Language Reference
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
POINTERS
A pointer is a data type which holds a memory address. While a variable accesses
that memory address directly, a pointer can be thought of as a reference to that
memory address.
To declare a pointer data type, add a carat prefix (^) before type. For example, if you
are creating a pointer to an integer, you would write:
^integer
To access the data at the pointer’s memory location, you add a carat after the variable name. For example, let’s declare variable p which points to word, and then
assign the pointed memory location value 5:
dim p as ^word
'...
p^ = 5
A pointer can be assigned to another pointer. However, note that only address, not
value, is copied. Once you modify the data located at one pointer, the other pointer,
when dereferenced, also yields modified data.
@ Operator
The @ operator returns the address of a variable or routine, i.e. @ constructs a
pointer to its operand. The following rules are applied to @:
- If X is a variable, @X returns the address of X.
- If F is a routine (a function or procedure), @F returns F’s entry point (the result
is of longint).
140
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
STRUCTURES
A structure represents a heterogeneous set of elements. Each element is called a
member; the declaration of a structure type specifies a name and type for each
member. The syntax of a structure type declaration is
structure structname
dim member1 as type1
'...
dim membern as typen
end structure
where structname is a valid identifier, each type denotes a type, and each member
is a valid identifier. The scope of a member identifier is limited to the structure in
which it occurs, so you don’t have to worry about naming conflicts between member
identifiers and other variables.
For example, the following declaration creates a structure type called Dot:
structure Dot
dim x as float
dim y as float
end structure
Each Dot contains two members: x and y coordinates; memory is allocated when
you instantiate the structure, like this:
dim m, n as Dot
This variable declaration creates two instances of Dot, called m and n.
A member can be of the previously defined structure type. For example:
' Structure defining a circle:
structure Circle
dim radius as float
dim center as Dot
end structure
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
141
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
Structure Member Access
You can access the members of a structure by means of dot (.) as a direct member
selector. If we had declared the variables circle1 and circle2 of the previously
defined type Circle:
dim circle1, circle2 as Circle
we could access their individual members like this:
circle1.radius = 3.7
circle1.center.x = 0
circle1.center.y = 0
You can also commit assignments between complex variables, if they are of the
same type:
circle2 = circle1
142
' This will copy values of all members
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
TYPES CONVERSIONS
Conversion of variable of one type to variable of another type is typecasting.
mikroBasic PRO for AVR supports both implicit and explicit conversions for built-in
types.
Implicit Conversion
Compiler will provide an automatic implicit conversion in the following situations:
- statement requires an expression of particular type (according to language
definition) and we use an expression of different type,
- operator requires an operand of particular type and we use an operand of
different type,
- function requires a formal parameter of particular type and we pass it an object of
different type,
- result does not match the declared function return type.
Promotion
When operands are of different types, implicit conversion promotes the less complex to the more complex type taking the following steps:
byte/char
short
short
integer
integral
word
integer
longint
longint
float
Higher bytes of extended unsigned operand are filled with zeroes. Higher bytes of
extended signed operand are filled with bit sign (if number is negative, fill higher
bytes with one, otherwise with zeroes). For example:
dim a as byte
dim b as word
'...
a = $FF
b = a ' a is promoted to word, b becomes $00FF
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
143
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
Clipping
In assignments and statements that require an expression of particular type, destination will store the correct value only if it can properly represent the result of
expression, i.e. if the result fits in destination range.
If expression evaluates to more complex type than expected excess data will be
simply clipped (the higher bytes are lost).
dim i as byte
dim j as word
'...
j = $FF0F
i = j ' i becomes $0F, higher byte $FF is lost
EXPLICIT CONVERSION
Explicit conversion can be executed at any point by inserting type keyword (byte,
word, short, integer, longint, or float) ahead of the expression to be converted. The expression must be enclosed in parentheses. Explicit conversion can be
performed only on the operand left of the assignment operator.
Special case is the conversion between signed and unsigned types. Explicit conversion between signed and unsigned data does not change binary representation of
data — it merely allows copying of source to destination.
For example:
dim a as byte
dim b as short
'...
b = -1
a = byte(b) ' a is 255, not 1
' This is because binary representation remains
' 11111111; it's just interpreted differently now
You cannot execute explicit conversion on the operand left of the assignment operator:
word(b) = a
144
' Compiler will report an error
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
OPERATORS
Operators are tokens that trigger some computation when being applied to variables
and other objects in an expression.
There are four types of operators in mikroBasic PRO for AVR:
- Arithmetic Operators
- Bitwise Operators
- Boolean Operators
- Relational Operators
OPERATORS PRECEDENCE AND ASSOCIATIVITY
There are 4 precedence categories in mikroBasic PRO for AVR. Operators in the
same category have equal precedence with each other.
Each category has an associativity rule: left-to-right ( ), or right-to-left ( ). In the
absence of parentheses, these rules resolve the grouping of expressions with operators of equal precedence.
Precedence
Operands
4
1
3
2
2
2
1
2
Operators
@
*
/
div
+
=
not
<>
+
mod
<
Associativity
and
or
>
<<
xor
<=
>>
>=
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
145
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
ARITHMETIC OPERATORS
Arithmetic operators are used to perform mathematical computations. They have numerical operands and return numerical results. Since the char operators are technically
bytes, they can be also used as unsigned operands in arithmetic operations.
All arithmetic operators associate from left to right.
Operator
Operation
Operands
Result
+
addition
byte, short, word, byte, short, word,
integer, longint, integer, longint,
longword, float
longword, float
-
subtraction
byte, short, word, byte, short, word,
integer, longint, integer, longint,
longword, float
longword, float
*
multiplication
byte, short, word, word, integer,
integer, longint, longint, longword,
longword, float
float
/
division, floating-point
byte, short, word,
integer, longint, float
longword, float
div
division, rounds down to nearest integer
byte, short, word, byte, short, word,
integer, longint, integer, longint,
longword
longword
mod
modulus, returns the remainder byte, short, word, byte, short, word,
integer, longint, integer, longint,
of integer division (cannot be
longword
longword
used with floating points)
Division by Zero
If 0 (zero) is used explicitly as the second operand (i.e. x div 0), the compiler will
report an error and will not generate code.
But in case of implicit division by zero: x div y, where y is 0 (zero), the result will
be the maximum integer (i.e 255, if the result is byte type; 65536, if the result is word
type, etc.).
Unary Arithmetic Operators
Operator - can be used as a prefix unary operator to change sign of a signed value.
Unary prefix operator + can be used, but it doesn’t affect data.
For example:
b = -a
146
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
RELATIONAL OPERATORS
Use relational operators to test equality or inequality of expressions. All relational
operators return TRUE or FALSE.
Operator
=
<>
Operation
equal
not equal
>
greater than
<
less than
>=
greater than or equal
<=
less than or equal
All relational operators associate from left to right.
Relational Operators in Expressions
The equal sign (=) can also be an assignment operator, depending on context.
Precedence of arithmetic and relational operators was designated in such a way to
allow complex expressions without parentheses to have expected meaning:
if aa + 5 >= bb - 1.0 / cc then
(1.0 / cc)) then
dd = My_Function()
end if
' same as: if (aa + 5) >= (bb -
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
147
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
BITWISE OPERATORS
Use the bitwise operators to modify the individual bits of numerical operands.
Bitwise operators associate from left to right. The only exception is the bitwise complement operator not which associates from right to left.
Bitwise Operators Overview
Operator
and
Operation
bitwise AND; compares pairs of bits and generates a 1 result if both
bits are 1, otherwise it returns 0
or
bitwise (inclusive) OR; compares pairs of bits and generates a 1 result
if either or both bits are 1, otherwise it returns 0
xor
bitwise exclusive OR (XOR); compares pairs of bits and generates a 1
result if the bits are complementary, otherwise it returns 0
not
bitwise complement (unary); inverts each bit
<<
bitwise shift left; moves the bits to the left, it discards the far left bit
and assigns 0 to the right most bit.
>>
bitwise shift right; moves the bits to the right, discards the far right bit
and if unsigned assigns 0 to the left most bit, otherwise sign extends
Logical Operations on Bit Level
and 0
1
or
0
1
xor
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
not
0
1
1
0
The bitwise operators and, or, and xor perform logical operations on the appropriate pairs of bits of their operands. The operator not complements each bit of its
operand. For example:
148
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
$1234 and $5678
' equals $1230
' because ..
' $1234 : 0001 0010 0011 0100
' $5678 : 0101 0110 0111 1000
' ---------------------------'
and : 0001 0010 0011 0000
' .. that is, $1230'
Similarly:
$1234 or $5678
$1234 xor $5678
not $1234
' equals $567C
' equals $444C
' equals $EDCB
Unsigned and Conversions
If number is converted from less complex to more complex data type, the upper
bytes are filled with zeroes. If number is converted from more complex to less complex data type, the data is simply truncated (upper bytes are lost).
For example:
dim a
dim b
' ...
a =
b =
b =
' a
as byte
as word
$AA
$F0F0
b and a
is extended with zeroes; b becomes $00A0
Signed and Conversions
If number is converted from less complex to more complex data type, the upper
bytes are filled with ones if sign bit is 1 (number is negative); the upper bytes are
filled with zeroes if sign bit is 0 (number is positive). If number is converted from
more complex to less complex data type, the data is simply truncated (the upper
bytes are lost).
For example:
dim a
dim b
' ...
a =
b =
b =
as byte
as word
-12
$70FF
b and a
' a is sign extended, upper byte is $FF;
' b becomes $70F4
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
149
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
Bitwise Shift Operators
The binary operators << and >> move the bits of the left operand by a number of
positions specified by the right operand, to the left or right, respectively. Right
operand has to be positive and less than 255.
With shift left (<<), left most bits are discarded, and “new” bits on the right are
assigned zeroes. Thus, shifting unsigned operand to the left by n positions is equivalent to multiplying it by 2n if all discarded bits are zero. This is also true for signed
operands if all discarded bits are equal to the sign bit.
With shift right (>>), right most bits are discarded, and the “freed” bits on the left are
assigned zeroes (in case of unsigned operand) or the value of the sign bit (in case
of signed operand). Shifting operand to the right by n positions is equivalent to dividing it by 2n.
BOOLEAN OPERATORS
Although mikroBasic PRO for AVR does not support boolean type, you have
Boolean operators at your disposal for building complex conditional expressions.
These operators conform to standard Boolean logic and return either TRUE (all ones)
or FALSE (zero):
Operator
and
or
Operation
logical AND
logical OR
xor
logical exclusive OR (XOR)
not
logical negation
Boolean operators associate from left to right. Negation operator not associates
from right to left.
150
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
EXPRESSIONS
An expression is a sequence of operators, operands, and punctuators that returns
a value.
The primary expressions include: literals, constants, variables and function calls.
From them, using operators, more complex expressions can be created. Formally,
expressions are defined recursively: subexpressions can be nested up to the limits
of memory.
Expressions are evaluated according to certain conversion, grouping, associativity
and precedence rules that depend on the operators used, presence of parentheses,
and data types of the operands. The precedence and associativity of the operators
are summarized in Operator Precedence and Associativity. The way operands and
subexpressions are grouped does not necessarily specify the actual order in which
they are evaluated by mikroBasic PRO for AVR.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
151
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
STATEMENTS
Statements define algorithmic actions within a program. Each statement needs to
be terminated with a semicolon (;). In the absence of specific jump and selection
statements, statements are executed sequentially in the order of appearance in the
source code.
The most simple statements are assignments, procedure calls and jump statements.
These can be combined to form loops, branches and other structured statements.
Refer to:
- Assignment Statements
- Conditional Statements
- Iteration Statements (Loops)
- Jump Statements
- asm Statement
ASSIGNMENT STATEMENTS
Assignment statements have the following form:
variable = expression
The statement evaluates expression and assigns its value to variable. All rules of
implicit conversion are applied. Variable can be any declared variable or array element, and expression can be any expression.
Do not confuse the assignment with relational operator = which tests for equality.
mikroBasic PRO for AVR will interpret the meaning of the character = from the context.
152
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
CONDITIONAL STATEMENTS
Conditional or selection statements select from alternative courses of action by testing certain values. There are two types of selection statements:
- if
- select case
IF STATEMENT
Use the keyword if to implement a conditional statement. The syntax of the if statement has the following form:
if expression then
statements
[else
other statements]
end if
When expression evaluates to true, statements execute. If expression is false,
other statements execute. The expression must convert to a boolean type; otherwise, the condition is ill-formed. The else keyword with an alternate block of statements (other statements) is optional.
Nested if statements
Nested if statements require additional attention. A general rule is that the nested
conditionals are parsed starting from the innermost conditional, with each else
bound to the nearest available if on its left:
if expression1 then
if expression2 then
statement1
else
statement2
end if
end if
The compiler treats the construction in this way:
if expression1 then
if expression2 then
statement1
else
statement2
end if
end if
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
153
CHAPTER 5
Language Reference
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
In order to force the compiler to interpret our example the other way around, we
have to write it explicitly:
if expression1 then
if expression2 then
statement1
end if
else
statement2
end if
SELECT CASE STATEMENT
Use the select case statement to pass control to a specific program branch, based
on a certain condition. The select case statement consists of selector expression
(condition) and list of possible values. The syntax of the select case statement is:
select case selector
case value_1
statements_1
...
case value_n
statements_n
[case else
default_statements]
end select
selector is an expression which should evaluate as integral value. values can be
literals, constants or expressions and statements can be any statements. The case
else clause is optional.
First, the selector expression (condition) is evaluated. The select case statement
then compares it against all available values. If the match is found, the statements
following the match evaluate, and the select case statement terminates. In case
there are multiple matches, the first matching statement will be executed. If none of
the values matches the selector, then default_statements in the case else
clause (if there is one) are executed.
Here is a simple example of the select case statement:
select case operator
case "*"
res = n1 * n2
case "/"
res = n1 / n2
case "+"
res = n1 + n2
case "-"
res = n1 - n2
case else
res = 0
cnt = cnt + 1
end select
154
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
Also, you can group values together for a match. Simply separate the items by commas:
select case reg
case 0
opmode = 0
case 1,2,3,4
opmode = 1
case 5,6,7
opmode = 2
end select
Nested Case Statements
Note that the select case statements can be nested – values are then assigned
to the innermost enclosing select case statement.
ITERATION STATEMENTS
Iteration statements let you loop a set of statements. There are three forms of iteration statements in mikroBasic PRO for AVR:
- for
- while
- repeat
You can use the statements break and continue to control the flow of a loop statement. break terminates the statement in which it occurs, while continue begins executing the next iteration of the sequence.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
155
CHAPTER 5
Language Reference
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
FOR STATEMENT
The for statement implements an iterative loop and requires you to specify the number of iterations. The syntax of the for statement is:
for counter = initial_value to final_value [step step_value]
statements
next counter
counter is a variable being increased by step_value with each iteration of the loop.
The parameter step_value is an optional integral value, and defaults to 1 if omitted. Before the first iteration, counter is set to initial_value and will be incremented until it reaches (or exceeds) the final_value. With each iteration, state-
ments will be executed.
initial_value and final_value should be expressions compatible with counter;
statements can be any statements that do not change the value of counter.
Note that the parameter step_value may be negative, allowing you to create a
countdown.
Here is an example of calculating scalar product of two vectors, a and b, of length
n, using the for statement:
s = 0
for i = 0 to n-1
s = s + a[i] * b[i]
next i
Endless Loop
The for statement results in an endless loop if final_value equals or exceeds the
range of the counter’s type.
156
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
WHILE STATEMENT
Use the while keyword to conditionally iterate a statement. The syntax of the while
statement is:
while expression
statements
wend
statements are executed repeatedly as long as expression evaluates true. The
test takes place before statements are executed. Thus, if expression evaluates
false on the first pass, the loop does not execute.
Here is an example of calculating scalar product of two vectors, using the while
statement:
s = 0
i = 0
while i < n
s = s + a[i] * b[i]
i = i + 1
wend
Probably the easiest way to create an endless loop is to use the statement:
while TRUE
' ...
wend
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
157
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
DO STATEMENT
The do statement executes until the condition becomes true. The syntax of the do
statement is:
do
statements
loop until expression
statements are executed repeatedly until expression evaluates true. expression
is evaluated after each iteration, so the loop will execute statements at least once.
Here is an example of calculating scalar product of two vectors, using the do statement:
s = 0
i = 0
do
s = s + a[i] * b[i]
i = i + 1
loop until i = n
JUMP STATEMENTS
A jump statement, when executed, transfers control unconditionally. There are five
such statements in mikroBasic PRO for AVR:
-
158
break
continue
exit
goto
gosub
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
BREAK AND CONTINUE STATEMENTS
Break Statement
Sometimes, you might need to stop the loop from within its body. Use the break
statement within loops to pass control to the first statement following the innermost
loop (for, while, or do).
For example:
Lcd_Out(1, 1, "No card inserted")
' Wait for CF card to be plugged; refresh every second
while true
if Cf_Detect() = 1 then
break
end if
Delay_ms(1000)
wend
' Now we can work with CF card ...
Lcd_Out(1, 1, "Card detected
")
Continue Statement
You can use the continue statement within loops to “skip the cycle”:
- continue statement in the for loop moves program counter to the line with
keyword for
- continue statement in the while loop moves program counter to the line with loop
condition (top of the loop),
- continue statement in the do loop moves program counter to the line with loop
condition (bottom of the loop).
' continue jumps
here
for i = ...
...
continue
...
next i
' continue jumps
here
while condition
...
continue
...
wend
do
...
continue
...
' continue jumps
here
loop until condition
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
159
CHAPTER 5
Language Reference
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
EXIT STATEMENT
The exit statement allows you to break out of a routine (function or procedure). It
passes the control to the first statement following the routine call.
Here is a simple example:
sub procedure Proc1()
dim error as byte
... ' we're doing something here
if error = TRUE then
exit
end if
... ' some code, which won't be executed if error is true
end sub
Note: If breaking out of a function, return value will be the value of the local variable
result at the moment of exit.
160
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
GOTO STATEMENT
Use the goto statement to unconditionally jump to a local label — for more information, refer to Labels. The syntax of the goto statement is:
goto label_name
This will transfer control to the location of a local label specified by label_name. The
goto line can come before or after the label.
Label and goto statement must belong to the same block. Hence it is not possible
to jump into or out of a procedure or function.
You can use goto to break out from any level of nested control structures. Never
jump into a loop or other structured statement, since this can have unpredictable
effects.
The use of goto statement is generally discouraged as practically every algorithm
can be realized without it, resulting in legible structured programs. One possible
application of the goto statement is breaking out from deeply nested control structures:
for i = 0 to n
for j = 0 to m
...
if disaster
goto Error
end if
...
next j
next i
.
.
.
Error: ' error handling code
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
161
CHAPTER 5
Language Reference
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
GOSUB STATEMENT
Use the gosub statement to unconditionally jump to a local label — for more information, refer to Labels. The syntax of the gosub statement is:
gosub label_name
...
label_name:
...
return
This will transfer control to the location of a local label specified by label_name.
Also, the calling point is remembered. Upon encountering the return statement,
program execution will continue with the next statement (line) after gosub. The
gosub line can come before or after the label.
It is not possible to jump into or out of routine by means of gosub. Never jump into
a loop or other structured statement, since this can have unpredictable effects.
Note: Like with goto, the use of gosub statement is generally discouraged. mikroBasic
PRO for AVR supports gosub only for the sake of backward compatibility. It is better to rely
on functions and procedures, creating legible structured programs.
162
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
ASM STATEMENT
mikroBasic PRO for AVR allows embedding assembly in the source code by means
of the asm statement. Note that you cannot use numerals as absolute addresses for
register variables in assembly instructions. You may use symbolic names instead
(listing will display these names as well as addresses).
You can group assembly instructions with the asm keyword:
asm
block of assembly instructions
end asm
mikroBasic PRO comments are not allowed in embedded assembly code. Instead,
you may use one-line assembly comments starting with semicolon.
If you plan to use a certain mikroBasic PRO variable in embedded assembly only, be sure
to at least initialize it (assign it initial value) in mikroBasic PRO code; otherwise, the linker
will issue an error. This is not applied to predefined globals such as P0.
For example, the following code will not be compiled because the linker won’t be
able to recognize the variable myvar:
program test
dim myvar as word
main:
asm
MOV #10, W0
MOV W0, _myvar
end asm
end.
Adding the following line (or similar) above the asm block would let linker know that
variable is used:
myvar = 20
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
163
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
DIRECTIVES
Directives are words of special significance which provide additional functionality
regarding compilation and output.
The following directives are at your disposal:
- Compiler directives for conditional compilation,
- Linker directives for object distribution in memory.
COMPILER DIRECTIVES
Any line in source code with leading # is taken as a compiler directive. The initial #
can be preceded or followed by whitespace (excluding new lines). The compiler
directives are not case sensitive.
You can use conditional compilation to select particular sections of code to compile
while excluding other sections. All compiler directives must be completed in the
source file in which they begun.
Directives #DEFINE and #UNDEFINE
Use directive #DEFINE to define a conditional compiler constant (“flag”). You can use
any identifier for a flag, with no limitations. No conflicts with program identifiers are
possible because the flags have a separate name space. Only one flag can be set
per directive.
For example:
#DEFINE extended_format
Use #UNDEFINE to undefine (“clear”) previously defined flag.
Directives #IFDEF, #ELSEIF and #ELSE
Conditional compilation is carried out by the #IFDEF directive. #IFDEF tests whether
a flag is currently defined or not; i.e. whether the previous #DEFINE directive has
been processed for that flag and is still in force.
The directive #IFDEF is terminated by the #ENDIF directive and can have any number of the #ELSEIF clauses and an optional #ELSE clause:
164
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Language Reference
#IFDEF flag THEN
block of code
[ #ELSEIF flag_1 THEN
block of code 1
...
#ELSEIF flag_n THEN
block of code n ]
[ #ELSE
alternate block of code ]
#ENDIF
First, #IFDEF checks if flag is set by means of #DEFINE. If so, only block of code will
be compiled. Otherwise, the compiler will check flags flag_1 .. flag_n and execute the appropriate block of code i. Eventually, if none of the flags is set, alternate
block of code in #ELSE (if any) will be compiled.
#ENDIF ends the conditional sequence. The result of the preceding scenario is that
only one section of code (possibly empty) is passed on for further processing. The
processed section can contain further conditional clauses, nested to any depth;
each #IFDEF must be matched with a closing #ENDIF.
Here is an example:
' Uncomment the appropriate flag for your application:
'#DEFINE resolution8
'#DEFINE resolution10
'#DEFINE resolution12
#IFDEF resolution8 THEN
... ' code specific to 8-bit resolution
#ELSEIF resolution10 THEN
... ' code specific to 10-bit resolution
#ELSEIF resolution12 THEN
... ' code specific to 12-bit resolution
#ELSE
... ' default code
#ENDIF
Predefined Flags
The compiler sets directives upon completion of project settings, so the user doesn't need to define certain flags.
Here is an example:
#IFDEF ATMEGA16 ' If ATmega16 MCU is selected
#IFDEF ATMEGA128 ' If ATmega128 MCU is selected
In some future releases of the compiler, the JTAG flag will be added also.
See also predefined project level defines.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
165
CHAPTER 5
Language Reference
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
LINKER DIRECTIVES
mikroBasic PRO for AVR uses internal algorithm to distribute objects within memory. If you need to have a variable or routine at the specific predefined address, use
the linker directives absolute and org.
Note: You must specify an even address when using the linker directives.
Directive absolute
The directive absolute specifies the starting address in RAM for a variable. If the
variable spans more than 1 word (16-bit), higher words will be stored at the consecutive locations.
The absolute directive is appended to the declaration of a variable:
dim x as word absolute 0x32
' Variable x will occupy 1 word (16 bits) at address 0x32
dim y as longint absolute 0x34
' Variable y will occupy 2 words at addresses 0x34 and 0x36
Be careful when using absolute directive, as you may overlap two variables by
accident. For example:
dim i as word absolute 0x42
' Variable i will occupy 1 word at address 0x42;
dim jj as longint absolute 0x40
' Variable will occupy 2 words at 0x40 and 0x42; thus,
' changing i changes jj at the same time and vice versa
Note: You must specify an even address when using the directive absolute.
Directive org
The directive org specifies the starting address of a routine in ROM. It is appended
to the declaration of routine. For example:
sub procedure proc(dim par as word) org 0x200
' Procedure will start at the address 0x200;
...
end sub
Note: You must specify an even address when using the directive org.
166
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER
6
mikroBasic PRO
for AVR Libraries
mikroBasic PRO for AVR provides a set of libraries which simplify the initialization
and use of AVR compliant MCUs and their modules:
Use Library manager to include mikroBasic PRO for AVR Libraries in you project.
167
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
HARDWARE AVR-SPECIFIC LIBRARIES
- ADC Library
- CANSPI Library
- Compact Flash Library
- EEPROM Library
- Flash Memory Library
- Graphic Lcd Library
- Keypad Library
- Lcd Library
- Manchester Code Library
- Multi Media Card library
- OneWire Library
- Port Expander Library
- PS/2 Library
- PWM Library
- PWM 16 bit Library
- RS-485 Library
- Software I2C Library
- Software SPI Library
- Software UART Library
- Sound Library
- SPI Library
- SPI Ethernet Library
- SPI Graphic Lcd Library
- SPI Lcd Library
- SPI Lcd8 Library
- SPI T6963C Graphic Lcd Library
- T6963C Graphic Lcd Library
- TWI Library
- UART Library
Miscellaneous Libraries
- Button Library
- Conversions Library
- Math Library
- String Library
- Time Library
- Trigonometry Library
See also Built-in Routines.
168
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
LIBRARY DEPENDENCIES
Certain libraries use (depend on) function and/or variables, constants defined in
other libraries.
Image below shows clear representation about these dependencies.
For example, SPI_Glcd uses
Glcd_Fonts and Port_Expander
library which uses SPI library.
This means that if you check
SPI_Glcd library in Library manager, all libraries on which it depends
will be checked too.
Related topics: Library manager,
AVR Libraries
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
169
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
ADC LIBRARY
ADC (Analog to Digital Converter) module is available with a number of AVR micros. Library function ADC_Read is included to provide you comfortable work with the module in single-ended mode.
ADC_Read
Prototype
sub function ADC_Read(dim channel as byte) as word
Returns
10-bit or 12-bit (MCU dependent) unsigned value from the specified channel.
Description
Initializes AVR ’s internal ADC module to work with XTAL frequency prescaled
by 128. Clock determines the time period necessary for performing A/D conversion.
Parameter channel represents the channel from which the analog value is to be
acquired. Refer to the appropriate datasheet for channel-to-pin mapping.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim tmp as word
...
tmp = ADC_Read(2)
' Read analog value from channel 2
Library Example
This example code reads analog value from channel 2 and displays it on PORTB and PORTC.
program ADC_on_LEDs
dim adc_rd as word
main:
DDRB = 0xFF
DDRC = 0xFF
while TRUE
temp_res = ADC_Read(2)
PORTB = adc_rd
PORTC = Hi(adc_rd)
wend
end.
170
' Set PORTB as output
' Set PORTC as output
' get ADC value from 2nd channel
' display adc_rd[7..0]
' display adc_rd[9..8]
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
HW Connection
ADC HW connection
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
171
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
CANSPI LIBRARY
The SPI module is available with a number of the AVR compliant MCUs. The
mikroBasic PRO for AVR provides a library (driver) for working with mikroElektronika's CANSPI Add-on boards (with MCP2515 or MCP2510) via SPI interface.
The CAN is a very robust protocol that has error detection and signalization,
self–checking and fault confinement. Faulty CAN data and remote frames are retransmitted automatically, similar to the Ethernet.
Data transfer rates depend on distance. For example, 1 Mbit/s can be achieved at
network lengths below 40m while 250 Kbit/s can be achieved at network lengths
below 250m. The greater distance the lower maximum bitrate that can be achieved.
The lowest bitrate defined by the standard is 200Kbit/s. Cables used are shielded
twisted pairs.
CAN supports two message formats:
- Standard format, with 11 identifier bits and
- Extended format, with 29 identifier bits
Note:
- Consult the CAN standard about CAN bus termination resistance.
- An effective CANSPI communication speed depends on SPI and certainly is
slower than “real” CAN.
- CANSPI module refers to mikroElektronika's CANSPI Add-on board connected to
SPI module of MCU.
- Prior to calling any of this library routines, Spi_Rd_Ptr needs to be initialized with
the appropriate SPI_Read routine.
172
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
External dependencies of CANSPI Library
The following variables
must be defined in all
projects using CANSPI
Library:
dim CanSpi_CS as sbit
sfr external
dim CanSpi_Rst as
sbit sfr external
dim
CanSpi_CS_Bit_Directi
on as sbit sfr
external
Description:
Example :
Reset line.
dim CanSpi_CS as sbit
at PORTB.B0
dim CanSpi_Rst as
sbit at PORTB.B2
Direction of the Chip
Select pin.
dim
CanSpi_CS_Bit_Directi
on as sbit at DDRB.B0
Chip Select line.
dim
CanSpi_Rst_Bit_Direct
Direction of the Reset pin.
ion as sbit sfr
external
dim
CanSpi_Rst_Bit_Direct
ion as sbit at
DDRB.B2
Library Routines
-
CANSPISetOperationMode
CANSPIGetOperationMode
CANSPIInitialize
CANSPISetBaudRate
CANSPISetMask
CANSPISetFilter
CANSPIread
CANSPIWrite
The following routines are for an internal use by the library only:
- RegsToCANSPIID
- CANSPIIDToRegs
Be sure to check CANSPI constants necessary for using some of the sub functions.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
173
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
CANSPISetOperationMode
Prototype
sub procedure CANSPISetOperationMode(dim mode as byte, dim WAIT
as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sets the CANSPI module to requested mode.
Parameters :
- mode: CANSPI module operation mode. Valid values: CANSPI_OP_MODE conDescription stants (see CANSPI constants).
- WAIT: CANSPI mode switching verification request. If WAIT = 0, the call is nonblocking. The sub function does not verify if the CANSPI module is switched to
requested mode or not. Caller must use CANSPIGetOperationMode to verify correct
operation mode before performing mode specific operation. If WAIT != 0, the call is
blocking – the sub function won’t “return” until the requested mode is set.
The CANSPI routines are supported only by MCUs with the SPI module.
Requires
Example
MCU has to be properly connected to mikroElektronika's CANSPI Extra Board
or similar hardware. See connection example at the bottom of this page.
' set the CANSPI module into configuration mode (wait inside
CANSPISetOperationMode until this mode is set)
CANSPISetOperationMode(CANSPI_MODE_CONFIG, 0xFF)
CANSPIGetOperationMode
Prototype
sub function CANSPIGetOperationMode() as byte
Returns
Current operation mode.
The sub function returns current operation mode of the CANSPI module. Check
Description CANSPI_OP_MODE constants (see CANSPI constants) or device datasheet for
operation mode codes.
The CANSPI routines are supported only by MCUs with the SPI module.
Requires
Example
174
MCU has to be properly connected to mikroElektronika's CANSPI Extra Board
or similar hardware. See connection example at the bottom of this page.
' check whether the CANSPI module is in Normal mode and if it is
do something.
if (CANSPIGetOperationMode() = CANSPI_MODE_NORMAL) then
...
end if
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
CANSPIInitialize
Prototype
sub procedure CANSPIInitialize(dim SJW as byte, dim BRP as byte,
dim PHSEG1 as byte, dim PHSEG2 as byte, dim PROPSEG as byte, dim
CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Initializes the CANSPI module.
Stand-Alone CAN controller in the CANSPI module is set to:
- Disable CAN capture
- Continue CAN operation in Idle mode
- Do not abort pending transmissions
- Fcan clock: 4*Tcy (Fosc)
- Baud rate is set according to given parameters
- CAN mode: Normal
- Filter and mask registers IDs are set to zero
Description - Filter and mask message frame type is set according to CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS value
SAM,SEG2PHTS,WAKFIL and DBEN bits are set according to CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS value.
Parameters:
-
SJW as defined in CAN controller's datasheet
BRP as defined in CAN controller's datasheet
PHSEG1 as defined in CAN controller's datasheet
PHSEG2 as defined in CAN controller's datasheet
PROPSEG as defined in CAN controller's datasheet
CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS is formed from predefined constants (see CANSPI constants)
Global variables :
Requires
CanSpi_CS: Chip Select line
CanSpi_Rst: Reset line
CanSpi_CS_Bit_Direction: Direction of the Chip Select pin
CanSpi_Rst_Bit_Direction: Direction of the Reset pin
must be defined before using this function.
The CANSPI routines are supported only by MCUs with the SPI module.
The SPI module needs to be initialized. See the SPI1_Init and
SPI1_Init_Advanced routines.
MCU has to be properly connected to mikroElektronika's CANSPI Extra Board
or similar hardware. See connection example at the bottom of this page.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
175
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
' CANSPI module connections
dim CanSpi_CS
as sbit at PORTB.B0
CanSpi_CS_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B0
CanSpi_Rst as sbit at PORTB.B2
CanSpi_Rst_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B2
' End CANSPI module connections
...
Example
176
dim Can_Init_Flags as byte
...
Can_Init_Flags = CAN_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE and ' form value to
be used
CAN_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON and ' with
CANSPIInitialize
CAN_CONFIG_XTD_MSG
and
CAN_CONFIG_DBL_BUFFER_ON and
CAN_CONFIG_VALID_XTD_MSG
...
Spi_Rd_Ptr = @SPI1_Read
' Pass pointer to SPI Read function of used SPI module
SPI1_Init()
' initialize
SPI module
CANSPIInitialize(1,3,3,3,1,Can_Init_Flags) ' initialize external CANSPI module
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
CANSPISetBaudRate
Prototype
sub procedure CANSPISetBaudRate(dim SJW as byte, dim BRP as byte,
dim PHSEG1 as byte, dim PHSEG2 as byte, dim PROPSEG as byte, dim
CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sets the CANSPI module baud rate. Due to complexity of the CAN protocol,
you can not simply force a bps value. Instead, use this sub function when the
CANSPI module is in Config mode.
SAM, SEG2PHTS and WAKFIL bits are set according to CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS value.
Refer to datasheet for details.
Description Parameters:
- SJW as defined in CAN controller's datasheet
- BRP as defined in CAN controller's datasheet
- PHSEG1 as defined in CAN controller's datasheet
- PHSEG2 as defined in CAN controller's datasheet
- PROPSEG as defined in CAN controller's datasheet
- CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS is formed from predefined constants (see CANSPI constants)
The CANSPI module must be in Config mode, otherwise the sub function will be
ignored. See CANSPISetOperationMode.
Requires
The CANSPI routines are supported only by MCUs with the SPI module.
MCU has to be properly connected to mikroElektronika's CANSPI Extra Board
or similar hardware. See connection example at the bottom of this page.
Example
' set required baud rate and sampling rules
dim can_config_flags as byte
...
CANSPISetOperationMode(CANSPI_MODE_CONFIG, 0xFF)
'
set CONFIGURATION mode (CANSPI module mast be in config mode for
baud rate settings)
can_config_flags = CANSPI_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE and
CANSPI_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON and
CANSPI_CONFIG_STD_MSG
and
CANSPI_CONFIG_DBL_BUFFER_ON and
CANSPI_CONFIG_VALID_XTD_MSG and
CANSPI_CONFIG_LINE_FILTER_OFF
CANSPISetBaudRate(1, 1, 3, 3, 1, can_config_flags)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
177
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
CANSPISetMask
Prototype
sub procedure CANSPISetMask(dim CAN_MASK as byte, dim val as
longint, dim CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Configures mask for advanced filtering of messages. The parameter value is
bit-adjusted to the appropriate mask registers.
Parameters:
- CAN_MASK: CANSPI module mask number. Valid values: CANSPI_MASK
constants (see CANSPI constants)
Description - val: mask register value
- CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS: selects type of message to filter. Valid values:
CANSPI_CONFIG_ALL_VALID_MSG,
CANSPI_CONFIG_MATCH_MSG_TYPE and CANSPI_CONFIG_STD_MSG,
CANSPI_CONFIG_MATCH_MSG_TYPE and CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG.
(see CANSPI constants)
The CANSPI module must be in Config mode, otherwise the sub function will be
ignored. See CANSPISetOperationMode.
Requires
The CANSPI routines are supported only by MCUs with the SPI module.
MCU has to be properly connected to mikroElektronika's CANSPI Extra Board
or similar hardware. See connection example at the bottom of this page.
' set the appropriate filter mask and message type value
CANSPISetOperationMode(CANSPI_MODE_CONFIG,0xFF)
'
set CONFIGURATION mode (CANSPI module must be in config mode for
mask settings)
Example
178
' Set all B1 mask bits to 1 (all filtered bits are relevant):
' Note that -1 is just a cheaper way to write 0xFFFFFFFF.
' Complement will do the trick and fill it up with ones.
CANSPISetMask(CANSPI_MASK_B1, -1, CANSPI_CONFIG_MATCH_MSG_TYPE
and CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
CANSPISetFilter
Prototype
sub procedure CANSPISetFilter(dim CAN_FILTER as byte, dim val as
longint, dim CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Configures message filter. The parameter value is bit-adjusted to the appropriate filter registers.
Parameters:
- CAN_FILTER: CANSPI module filter number. Valid values: CANSPI_FILTER
constants (see CANSPI constants)
Description - val: filter register value
- CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS: selects type of message to filter. Valid values:
CANSPI_CONFIG_ALL_VALID_MSG,
CANSPI_CONFIG_MATCH_MSG_TYPE and CANSPI_CONFIG_STD_MSG,
CANSPI_CONFIG_MATCH_MSG_TYPE and CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG.
(see CANSPI constants)
The CANSPI module must be in Config mode, otherwise the sub function will be
ignored. See CANSPISetOperationMode.
Requires
The CANSPI routines are supported only by MCUs with the SPI module.
MCU has to be properly connected to mikroElektronika's CANSPI Extra Board
or similar hardware. See connection example at the bottom of this page.
Example
' set the appropriate filter value and message type
CANSPISetOperationMode(CANSPI_MODE_CONFIG,0xFF)
' set CONFIGURATION mode (CANSPI module must be in config mode
for filter settings)
' Set id of filter B1_F1 to 3:
CANSPISetFilter(CANSPI_FILTER_B1_F1, 3, CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
179
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
CANSPIRead
Prototype
sub function CANSPIRead(dim byref id as longint, dim byref
rd_data as byte[8], dim data_len as byte, dim CAN_RX_MSG_FLAGS as
byte) as byte
- 0 if nothing is received
- 0xFF if one of the Receive Buffers is full (message received)
Returns
If at least one full Receive Buffer is found, it will be processed in the following way:
- Message ID is retrieved and stored to location provided by the id parameter
- Message data is retrieved and stored to a buffer provided by the rd_data parameter
- Message length is retrieved and stored to location provided by the data_len
parameter
- Message flags are retrieved and stored to location provided by the
Description
CAN_RX_MSG_FLAGS parameter
Parameters:
-
id: message identifier storage address
rd_data: data buffer (an array of bytes up to 8 bytes in length)
data_len: data length storage address.
CAN_RX_MSG_FLAGS: message flags storage address
The CANSPI module must be in a mode in which receiving is possible. See
CANSPISetOperationMode.
Requires
The CANSPI routines are supported only by MCUs with the SPI module.
MCU has to be properly connected to mikroElektronika's CANSPI Extra Board
or similar hardware. See connection example at the bottom of this page.
Example
180
' check the CANSPI module for received messages. If any was
received do something.
dim msg_rcvd, rx_flags, data_len as byte
rd_data as byte[8]
msg_id as longint
...
CANSPISetOperationMode(CANSPI_MODE_NORMAL,0xFF)
' set NORMAL mode (CANSPI module must be in mode in which
receive is possible)
...
rx_flags = 0
clear message flags
if (msg_rcvd = CANSPIRead(msg_id, rd_data, data_len, rx_flags)
...
end if
'
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
CANSPIWrite
Prototype
Returns
sub function CANSPIWrite(dim id as longint, dim byref wr_data as
byte[8], dim data_len as byte, dim CAN_TX_MSG_FLAGS as byte) as byte
- 0 if all Transmit Buffers are busy
- 0xFF if at least one Transmit Buffer is available
If at least one empty Transmit Buffer is found, the sub function sends message
in the queue for transmission.
Parameters:
Description
- id:CAN message identifier. Valid values: 11 or 29 bit values, depending on
message type (standard or extended)
- wr_data: data to be sent (an array of bytes up to 8 bytes in length)
- data_len: data length. Valid values: 1 to 8
- CAN_RX_MSG_FLAGS: message flags
The CANSPI module must be in mode in which transmission is possible. See
CANSPISetOperationMode.
Requires
The CANSPI routines are supported only by MCUs with the SPI module.
MCU has to be properly connected to mikroElektronika's CANSPI Extra Board
or similar hardware. See connection example at the bottom of this page.
Example
' send message extended CAN message with the appropriate ID and
data
dim tx_flags as byte
rd_data as byte[8]
msg_id as longint
...
CANSPISetOperationMode(CAN_MODE_NORMAL, 0xFF)
'
set NORMAL mode (CANSPI must be in mode in which transmission is
possible)
tx_flags = CANSPI_TX_PRIORITY_0 ands CANSPI_TX_XTD_FRAME
' set message flags
CANSPIWrite(msg_id, rd_data, 2, tx_flags)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
181
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
CANSPI Constants
There is a number of constants predefined in the CANSPI library. You need to be
familiar with them in order to be able to use the library effectively. Check the example at the end of the chapter.
CANSPI_OP_MODE
The CANSPI_OP_MODE constants define CANSPI operation mode. Function
CANSPISetOperationMode expects one of these as it's argument:
const
CANSPI_MODE_BITS
CANSPI_MODE_NORMAL
CANSPI_MODE_SLEEP
CANSPI_MODE_LOOP
CANSPI_MODE_LISTEN
CANSPI_MODE_CONFIG
as
as
as
as
as
as
byte = $E0 Use this to access opmode bits
byte = 0
byte = $20
byte = $40
byte = $60
byte = $80
CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS
The CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS constants define flags related to the CANSPI module configuration. The functions CANSPIInitialize, CANSPISetBaudRate,
CANSPISetMask and CANSPISetFilter expect one of these (or a bitwise combination) as their argument:
const
CANSPI_CONFIG_DEFAULT
182
as byte
= $FF
' 11111111
CANSPI_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_BIT
CANSPI_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON
CANSPI_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_OFF
as byte
as byte
as byte
= $01
= $FF
= $FE
' XXXXXXX1
' XXXXXXX0
CANSPI_CONFIG_LINE_FILTER_BIT
CANSPI_CONFIG_LINE_FILTER_ON
CANSPI_CONFIG_LINE_FILTER_OFF
as byte = $02
as byte = $FF
as byte = $FD
' XXXXXX1X
' XXXXXX0X
CANSPI_CONFIG_SAMPLE_BIT
CANSPI_CONFIG_SAMPLE_ONCE
CANSPI_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE
as byte = $04
as byte = $FF
as byte = $FB
' XXXXX1XX
' XXXXX0XX
CANSPI_CONFIG_MSG_TYPE_BIT
CANSPI_CONFIG_STD_MSG
CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG
as byte = $08
as byte = $FF
as byte = $F7
' XXXX1XXX
' XXXX0XXX
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
CANSPI_CONFIG_DBL_BUFFER_BIT
CANSPI_CONFIG_DBL_BUFFER_ON
CANSPI_CONFIG_DBL_BUFFER_OFF
as byte = $10
as byte = $FF
as byte = $EF
' XXX1XXXX
' XXX0XXXX
CANSPI_CONFIG_MSG_BITS
CANSPI_CONFIG_ALL_MSG
CANSPI_CONFIG_VALID_XTD_MSG
CANSPI_CONFIG_VALID_STD_MSG
CANSPI_CONFIG_ALL_VALID_MSG
as
as
as
as
as
'
'
'
'
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
=
=
=
=
=
$60
$FF
$DF
$BF
$9F
X11XXXXX
X10XXXXX
X01XXXXX
X00XXXXX
You may use bitwise and to form config byte out of these values. For example:
init
= CANSPI_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE
CANSPI_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON
CANSPI_CONFIG_STD_MSG
CANSPI_CONFIG_DBL_BUFFER_ON
CANSPI_CONFIG_VALID_XTD_MSG
CANSPI_CONFIG_LINE_FILTER_OFF
...
CANSPIInit(1, 1, 3, 3, 1, init)
and
and
and
and
and
' initialize CANSPI
CANSPI_TX_MSG_FLAGS
CANSPI_TX_MSG_FLAGS are flags related to transmission of a CAN message:
const
CANSPI_TX_PRIORITY_BITS
CANSPI_TX_PRIORITY_0
CANSPI_TX_PRIORITY_1
CANSPI_TX_PRIORITY_2
CANSPI_TX_PRIORITY_3
as
as
as
as
as
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
=
=
=
=
=
$03
$FC
$FD
$FE
$FF
CANSPI_TX_FRAME_BIT
CANSPI_TX_STD_FRAME
CANSPI_TX_XTD_FRAME
as byte
as byte
as byte
CANSPI_TX_RTR_BIT
CANSPI_TX_NO_RTR_FRAME
CANSPI_TX_RTR_FRAME
as byte = $40
as byte = $FF
as byte = $BF
= $08
= $FF
= $F7
'
'
'
'
XXXXXX00
XXXXXX01
XXXXXX10
XXXXXX11
' XXXXX1XX
' XXXXX0XX
' X1XXXXXX
' X0XXXXXX
You may use bitwise and to adjust the appropriate flags. For example:
' form value to be used with CANSendMessage:
send_config = CANSPI_TX_PRIORITY_0
and
CANSPI_TX_XTD_FRAME
and
CANSPI_TX_NO_RTR_FRAME
...
CANSPI1Write(id, data, 1, send_config)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
183
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
CANSPI_RX_MSG_FLAGS
CANSPI_RX_MSG_FLAGS are flags related to reception of CAN message. If a particular bit is set then corresponding meaning is TRUE otherwise it will be FALSE.
const
CANSPI_RX_FILTER_BITS
filter bits
CANSPI_RX_FILTER_1
CANSPI_RX_FILTER_2
CANSPI_RX_FILTER_3
CANSPI_RX_FILTER_4
CANSPI_RX_FILTER_5
CANSPI_RX_FILTER_6
as byte = $07
as
as
as
as
as
as
CANSPI_RX_OVERFLOW
as
else cleared
CANSPI_RX_INVALID_MSG
as
else cleared
CANSPI_RX_XTD_FRAME
as
sage else cleared
CANSPI_RX_RTR_FRAME
as
sage else cleared
CANSPI_RX_DBL_BUFFERED
as
sage was hardware double-buffered
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
=
=
=
=
=
=
' Use this to access
$00
$01
$02
$03
$04
$05
byte = $08
' Set if Overflowed
byte = $10
' Set if invalid
byte = $20
' Set if XTD mes-
byte = $40
' Set if RTR mes-
byte = $80
' Set if this mes-
You may use bitwise and to adjust the appropriate flags. For example:
if (MsgFlag and CANSPI_RX_OVERFLOW) <> 0 then
...
' Receiver overflow has occurred.
' We have lost our previous message.
end if
CANSPI_MASK
The CANSPI_MASK constants define mask codes. Function CANSPISetMask
expects one of these as it's argument:
const
CANSPI_MASK_B1 as byte = 0
CANSPI_MASK_B2 as byte = 1
CANSPI_FILTER
The CANSPI_FILTER constants define filter codes. Functions CANSPISetFilter
expects one of these as it's argument:
184
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
const
CANSPI_FILTER_B1_F1
CANSPI_FILTER_B1_F2
CANSPI_FILTER_B2_F1
CANSPI_FILTER_B2_F2
CANSPI_FILTER_B2_F3
CANSPI_FILTER_B2_F4
Libraries
as
as
as
as
as
as
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
=
=
=
=
=
=
0
1
2
3
4
5
Library Example
This is a simple demonstration of CANSPI Library routines usage. First node initiates the communication with the second node by sending some data to its address.
The second node responds by sending back the data incremented by 1. First node
then does the same and sends incremented data back to second node, etc.
Code for the first CANSPI node:
program Can_Spi_1st
dim Can_Init_Flags, Can_Send_Flags,
Rx_Data_Len as byte
'
RxTx_Data
as byte[8]
'
Msg_Rcvd as byte
'
Tx_ID, Rx_ID as longint
'
Can_Rcv_Flags as byte ' can flags
received data length in bytes
can rx/tx data buffer
reception flag
can rx and tx ID
' CANSPI module connections
dim CanSpi_CS as sbit at PORTB.B0
CanSpi_CS_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B0
CanSpi_Rst as sbit at PORTB.B2
CanSpi_Rst_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B2
' End CANSPI module connections
main:
ADCSRA.7 = 0
PORTC = 0
DDRC = 255
Can_Init_Flags = 0
Can_Send_Flags = 0
Can_Rcv_Flags = 0
' Set AN pins to Digital I/O
'
' clear flags
'
Can_Send_Flags = _CANSPI_TX_PRIORITY_0 and ' form value to be used
_CANSPI_TX_XTD_FRAME and ' with CANSPIWrite
_CANSPI_TX_NO_RTR_FRAME
Can_Init_Flags = _CANSPI_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE and ' form value to be
used
_CANSPI_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON and ' with CANSPIInit
_CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG and
_CANSPI_CONFIG_DBL_BUFFER_ON and
_CANSPI_CONFIG_VALID_XTD_MSG
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
185
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI1_Init()
' initialize SPI1 module
Spi_Rd_Ptr = @SPI1_Read
Pass pointer to SPI Read sub function of used SPI module
CANSPIInitialize(1,3,3,3,1,Can_Init_Flags)
Initialize external CANSPI module
CANSPISetOperationMode(_CANSPI_MODE_CONFIG,0xFF)
set CONFIGURATION mode
CANSPISetMask(_CANSPI_MASK_B1,-1,_CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG)
set all mask1 bits to ones
CANSPISetMask(_CANSPI_MASK_B2,-1,_CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG)
set all mask2 bits to ones
CANSPISetFilter(_CANSPI_FILTER_B2_F4,3,_CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG)
set id of filter B1_F1 to 3
'
'
'
'
'
'
CANSPISetOperationMode(_CANSPI_MODE_NORMAL,0xFF)' set NORMAL mode
RxTx_Data[0] = 9
' set initial data to be sent
Tx_ID = 12111
' set transmit ID
CANSPIWrite(Tx_ID, RxTx_Data, 1, Can_Send_Flags)
'
send initial message
while TRUE
' endless loop
Msg_Rcvd = CANSPIRead(Rx_ID , RxTx_Data , Rx_Data_Len,
Can_Rcv_Flags)
' receive message
if ((Rx_ID = 3) and Msg_Rcvd) then
' if message received check id
PORTC = RxTx_Data[0]
' id correct, output data at PORTC
Inc(RxTx_Data[0])
' increment received data
Delay_ms(10)
CANSPIWrite(Tx_ID,
RxTx_Data,
1,
Can_Send_Flags)
' send incremented data back
end if
wend
end.
Code for the second CANSPI node:
program Can_Spi_2nd
dim Can_Init_Flags, Can_Send_Flags,
Rx_Data_Len as byte
'
RxTx_Data
as byte[8]
'
Msg_Rcvd as byte
'
Tx_ID, Rx_ID as longint
'
186
Can_Rcv_Flags as byte ' can flags
received data length in bytes
CAN rx/tx data buffer
reception flag
can rx and tx ID
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
' CANSPI module connections
dim CanSpi_CS as sbit at PORTB.B0
CanSpi_CS_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B0
CanSpi_Rst as sbit at PORTB.B2
CanSpi_Rst_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B2
' End CANSPI module connections
main:
PORTC = 0
DDRC = 255
Can_Init_Flags = 0
Can_Send_Flags = 0
Can_Rcv_Flags = 0
' clear PORTC
' set PORTC as output
'
' clear flags
'
Can_Send_Flags = _CANSPI_TX_PRIORITY_0 and ' form value to be used
_CANSPI_TX_XTD_FRAME and ' with CANSPIWrite
_CANSPI_TX_NO_RTR_FRAME
Can_Init_Flags = _CANSPI_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE and
' Form value
to be used
_CANSPI_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON and
'
with CANSPIInit
_CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG and
_CANSPI_CONFIG_DBL_BUFFER_ON and
_CANSPI_CONFIG_VALID_XTD_MSG and
_CANSPI_CONFIG_LINE_FILTER_OFF
SPI1_Init()
'
initialize SPI1 module
Spi_Rd_Ptr = @SPI1_Read
' Pass pointer to SPI Read sub function of used SPI module
CANSPIInitialize(1,3,3,3,1,Can_Init_Flags)
' initialize external CANSPI module
CANSPISetOperationMode(_CANSPI_MODE_CONFIG,0xFF)
' set CONFIGURATION mode
CANSPISetMask(_CANSPI_MASK_B1,-1,_CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG)
' set all mask1 bits to ones
CANSPISetMask(_CANSPI_MASK_B2,-1,_CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG)
' set all mask2 bits to ones
CANSPISetFilter(_CANSPI_FILTER_B2_F3,12111,_CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG)
' set id of filter B1_F1 to 3
CANSPISetOperationMode(_CANSPI_MODE_NORMAL,0xFF)
' set NORMAL mode
Tx_ID = 3
' set tx ID
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
187
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
while TRUE
' endless loop
Msg_Rcvd = CANSPIRead(Rx_ID , RxTx_Data , Rx_Data_Len,
Can_Rcv_Flags)
' receive message
if ((Rx_ID = 12111) and Msg_Rcvd) then
' if message received check id
PORTC = RxTx_Data[0] ' id correct, output data at PORTC
Inc(RxTx_Data[0])
' increment received data
CANSPIWrite(Tx_ID, RxTx_Data, 1, Can_Send_Flags)
' send incremented data back
end if
wend
end.
HW Connection
Example of interfacing CAN transceiver MCP2510 with MCU via SPI interface
188
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
COMPACT FLASH LIBRARY
The Compact Flash Library provides routines for accessing data on Compact Flash
card (abbr. CF further in text). CF cards are widely used memory elements, commonly used with digital cameras. Great capacity and excellent access time of only
a few microseconds make them very attractive for the microcontroller applications.
In CF card, data is divided into sectors. One sector usually comprises 512 bytes.
Routines for file handling, the Cf_Fat routines, are not performed directly but successively through 512B buffer.
Note: Routines for file handling can be used only with FAT16 file system.
Note: Library functions create and read files from the root directory only.
Note: Library functions populate both FAT1 and FAT2 tables when writing to files,
but the file data is being read from the FAT1 table only; i.e. there is no recovery if
the FAT1 table gets corrupted.
Note: If MMC/SD card has Master Boot Record (MBR), the library will work with the
first available primary (logical) partition that has non-zero size. If MMC/SD card has
Volume Boot Record (i.e. there is only one logical partition and no MBRs), the library
works with entire card as a single partition. For more information on MBR, physical
and logical drives, primary/secondary partitions and partition tables, please consult
other resources, e.g. Wikipedia and similar.
Note: Before writing operation, make sure not to overwrite boot or FAT sector as it
could make your card on PC or digital camera unreadable. Drive mapping tools,
such as Winhex, can be of great assistance.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
189
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
External dependencies of Compact Flash Library
The following variables
must be defined in all
projects using Compact
Flash Library:
dim CF_Data_Port as
byte sfr external
dim
CF_Data_Port_Direction
as byte sfr external
dim CF_RDY as sbit
sfr external
dim CF_WE as sbit
sfr external
dim CF_OE as sbit
sfr external
dim CF_CD1 as sbit
sfr external
dim CF_CE1 as sbit
sfr external
dim CF_A2 as sbit
sfr external
dim CF_A1 as sbit
sfr external
dim CF_A0 as sbit
sfr external
dim CF_RDY_direction
as sbit sfr external
190
Description:
Example :
dim CF_Data_Port as
Compact Flash Data Port. byte at PORTD
dim
CF_Data_Port_Directio
n as byte at DDRD
dim CF_RDY as sbit at
Ready signal line.
PINB.B7
dim CF_WE as sbit at
Write Enable signal line.
PORTB.B6
dim CF_OE as sbit at
Output Enable signal line. PORTB.B5
dim CF_CD1 as sbit at
Chip Detect signal line.
PINB.B4
dim CF_CE1 as sbit at
Chip Enable signal line.
PORTB.B3
dim CF_A2 as sbit at
Address pin 2.
PORTB.B2
dim CF_A1 as sbit at
Address pin 1.
PORTB.B1
dim CF_A0 as sbit at
Address pin 0.
PORTB.B0
dim CF_RDY_direction
Direction of the Ready pin. as sbit at DDRB.B7
Direction of the Compact
Flash Data Port.
dim CF_WE_direction
as sbit sfr external
Direction of the Write
Enable pin.
dim CF_WE_direction
as sbit at DDRB.B6
dim CF_OE_direction
as sbit sfr external
Direction of the Output
Enable pin.
dim CF_OE_direction
as sbit at DDRB.B5
dim CF_CD1_direction
as sbit sfr external
Direction of the Chip
Detect pin.
dim CF_CD1_direction
as sbit at DDRB.B4
dim CF_CE1_direction
as sbit sfr external
Direction of the Chip
Enable pin.
dim CF_CE1_direction
as sbit at DDRB.B3
dim CF_A2_direction
as sbit sfr external
Direction of the Address 2 dim CF_A2_direction
as sbit at DDRB.B2
pin.
dim CF_A1_direction
as sbit sfr external
Direction of the Address 1 dim CF_A1_direction
as sbit at DDRB.B1
pin.
dim CF_A0_direction
as sbit sfr external
Direction of the Address 0 dim CF_A0_direction
as sbit at DDRB.B0
pin.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Routines
-
Cf_Init
Cf_Detect
Cf_Enable
Cf_Disable
Cf_Read_Init
Cf_Read_Byte
Cf_Write_Init
Cf_Write_Byte
Cf_Read_Sector
Cf_Write_Sector
Routines for file handling:
-
Cf_Fat_Init
Cf_Fat_QuickFormat
Cf_Fat_Assign
Cf_Fat_Reset
Cf_Fat_Read
Cf_Fat_Rewrite
Cf_Fat_Append
Cf_Fat_Delete
Cf_Fat_Write
Cf_Fat_Set_File_Date
Cf_Fat_Get_File_Date
Cf_Fat_Get_File_Size
Cf_Fat_Get_Swap_File
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
191
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Cf_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Cf_Init()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Initializes ports appropriately for communication with CF card.
Global variables :
Requires
-
CF_Data_Port : Compact Flash data port
CF_RDY : Ready signal line
CF_WE : Write enable signal line
CF_OE : Output enable signal line
CF_CD1 : Chip detect signal line
CF_CE1 : Enable signal line
CF_A2 : Address pin 2
CF_A1 : Address pin 1
CF_A0 : Address pin 0
-
CF_Data_Port_direction : Direction of the Compact Flash data direction port
CF_RDY_direction : Direction of the Ready pin
CF_WE_direction : Direction of the Write enable pin
CF_OE_direction : Direction of the Output enable pin
CF_CD1_direction : Direction of the Chip detect pin
CF_CE1_direction : Direction of the Chip enable pin
CF_A2_direction : Direction of the Address 2 pin
CF_A1_direction : Direction of the Address 1 pin
CF_A0_direction : Direction of the Address 0 pin
must be defined before using this function.
' set compact flash pinout
dim CF_Data_Port as byte at PORTD
dim Cf_Data_Port_Direction as byte at DDRD
Example
dim
dim
dim
dim
dim
dim
dim
dim
CF_RDY
CF_WE
CF_OE
CF_CD1
CF_CE1
CF_A2
CF_A1
CF_A0
as
as
as
as
as
as
as
as
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
dim CF_RDY_direction
dim CF_WE_direction
dim CF_OE_direction
dim CF_CD1_direction
dim CF_CE1_direction
dim CF_A2_direction
dim CF_A1_direction
dim CF_A0_direction
' end of cf pinout
PINB.B7
PORTB.B6
PORTB.B5
PINB.B4
PORTB.B3
PORTB.B2
PORTB.B1
PORTB.B0
as
as
as
as
as
as
as
as
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
DDRB.B7
DDRB.B6
DDRB.B5
DDRB.B4
DDRB.B3
DDRB.B2
DDRB.B1
DDRB.B0
'Init CF
Cf_Init()
192
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Cf_Detect
Prototype
Returns
sub function CF_Detect() as byte
- 1 - if CF card was detected
- 0 - otherwise
Description Checks for presence of CF card by reading the chip detect pin.
Requires
The corresponding MCU ports must be appropriately initialized for CF card. See
Cf_Init.
Example
' Wait until CF card is inserted:
while (Cf_Detect() = 0)
nop
wend
Cf_Enable
Prototype
sub procedure Cf_Enable()
Returns
Nothing.
Enables the device. Routine needs to be called only if you have disabled the
Description device by means of the Cf_Disable routine. These two routines in conjunction
allow you to free/occupy data line when working with multiple devices.
Requires
The corresponding MCU ports must be appropriately initialized for CF card. See
Cf_Init.
Example
' enable compact flash
Cf_Enable()
Cf_Disable
Prototype
sub procedure Cf_Disable()
Returns
Nothing.
Routine disables the device and frees the data lines for other devices. To
Description enable the device again, call Cf_Enable. These two routines in conjunction
allow you to free/occupy data line when working with multiple devices.
Requires
The corresponding MCU ports must be appropriately initialized for CF card. See
Cf_Init.
Example
' disable compact flash
Cf_Disable()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
193
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Cf_Read_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Cf_Read_Init(dim address as longword, dim
sector_count as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Initializes CF card for reading.
Description
Parameters :
- address: the first sector to be prepared for reading operation.
- sector_count: number of sectors to be prepared for reading operation.
Requires
The corresponding MCU ports must be appropriately initialized for CF card. See
Cf_Init.
Example
' initialize compact flash for reading from sector 590
Cf_Read_Init(590, 1)
Cf_Read_Byte
Prototype
sub function CF_Read_Byte() as byte
Returns a byte read from Compact Flash sector buffer.
Returns
Note: Higher byte of the unsigned return value is cleared.
Description
Requires
Reads one byte from Compact Flash sector buffer location currently pointed to
by internal read pointers. These pointers will be autoicremented upon reading.
The corresponding MCU ports must be appropriately initialized for CF card. See
Cf_Init.
CF card must be initialized for reading operation. See Cf_Read_Init.
Example
194
' Read a byte from compact flash:
dim data as byte
...
data = Cf_Read_Byte()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Cf_Write_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Cf_Write_Init(dim address as longword, dim sectcnt
as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Initializes CF card for writing.
Description
Parameters :
- address: the first sector to be prepared for writing operation.
- sectcnt: number of sectors to be prepared for writing operation.
Requires
The corresponding MCU ports must be appropriately initialized for CF card. See
Cf_Init.
Example
' initialize compact flash for writing to sector 590
Cf_Write_Init(590, 1)
Cf_Write_Byte
Prototype
sub procedure Cf_Write_Byte(dim data_ as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Description
Writes a byte to Compact Flash sector buffer location currently pointed to by
writing pointers. These pointers will be autoicremented upon reading. When
sector buffer is full, its content will be transfered to appropriate flash memory
sector.
Parameters :
- data_: byte to be written.
Requires
The corresponding MCU ports must be appropriately initialized for CF card. See
Cf_Init.
CF card must be initialized for writing operation. See Cf_Write_Init.
Example
dim data_ as byte
...
data = 0xAA
Cf_Write_Byte(data)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
195
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Cf_Read_Sector
Prototype
sub procedure Cf_Read_Sector(dim sector_number as longword, dim
byref buffer as byte[512])
Returns
Nothing.
Reads one sector (512 bytes). Read data is stored into buffer provided by the
buffer parameter.
Description Parameters :
- sector_number: sector to be read.
- buffer: data buffer of at least 512 bytes in length.
Requires
The corresponding MCU ports must be appropriately initialized for CF card. See
Cf_Init.
Example
' read sector 22
dim data as array[512] of byte
...
Cf_Read_Sector(22, data)
Cf_Write_Sector
Prototype
sub procedure Cf_Write_Sector(dim sector_number as longword, dim
byref buffer as byte[512])
Returns
Nothing.
Writes 512 bytes of data provided by the buffer parameter to one CF sector.
Description
Parameters :
- sector_number: sector to be written to.
- buffer: data buffer of 512 bytes in length.
196
Requires
The corresponding MCU ports must be appropriately initialized for CF card. See
Cf_Init.
Example
' write to sector 22
dim data as array[512] of byte
...
Cf_Write_Sector(22, data)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Cf_Fat_Init
Prototype
Returns
sub function Cf_Fat_Init() as byte
- 0 - if CF card was detected and successfully initialized
- 1 - if FAT16 boot sector was not found
- 255 - if card was not detected
Description
Initializes CF card, reads CF FAT16 boot sector and extracts data needed by
the library.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
init the FAT library
if (Cf_Fat_Init() = 0) then
...
end if
Cf_Fat_QuickFormat
Prototype
Returns
sub function Cf_Fat_QuickFormat(dim byref cf_fat_label as
string[11]) as byte
- 0 - if CF card was detected, successfully formated and initialized
- 1 - if FAT16 format was unseccessful
- 255 - if card was not detected
Formats to FAT16 and initializes CF card.
Parameters :
Description
- cf_fat_label: volume label (11 characters in length). If less than 11
characters are provided, the label will be padded with spaces. If an empty
string is passed, the volume will not be labeled.
Note: This routine can be used instead or in conjunction with the Cf_Fat_Init
routine.
Note: If CF card already contains a valid boot sector, it will remain unchanged
(except volume label field) and only FAT and ROOT tables will be erased. Also,
the new volume label will be set.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
'--- format and initialize the FAT library
if ( Cf_Fat_QuickFormat('mikroE') = 0) then
...
end if
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
197
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Cf_Fat_Assign
Prototype
sub function Cf_Fat_Assign(dim byref filename as char[12], dim
file_cre_attr as byte) as byte
- 0 if file does not exist and no new file is created.
- 1 if file already exists or file does not exist but a new file is created.
Returns
Assigns file for file operations (read, write, delete...). All subsequent file operations will be applied to the assigned file.
Parameters :
- filename: name of the file that should be assigned for file operations. The file
name should be in DOS 8.3 (file_name.extension) format. The file name and
extension will be automatically padded with spaces by the library if they have
less than length required (i.e. "mikro.tx" -> "mikro .tx "), so the user does not
have to take care of that. The file name and extension are case insensitive.
The library will convert them to the proper case automatically, so the user does
not have to take care of that.
Also, in order to keep backward compatibility with the first version of this
library, file names can be entered as UPPERCASE string of 11 bytes in length
with no dot character between the file name and extension (i.e.
"MIKROELETXT" -> MIKROELE.TXT). In this case the last 3 characters of the
string are considered to be file extension.
Description - file_cre_attr: file creation and attributs flags. Each bit corresponds to the
appropriate file attribut:
Bit
Mask
Description
0
0x01
Read Only
1
0x02
Hidden
2
0x04
System
3
0x08
Volume Label
4
0x10
Subdirectory
5
0x20
Archive
6
0x40
Device (internal use only, never found on disk)
7
0x80
File creation flag. If the file does not exist and this flag is set,
a new file with specified name will be created.
Note: Long File Names (LFN) are not supported.
198
Requires
CF card and CF library must be initialized for file operations. See Cf_Fat_Init.
Example
' create file with archive attribut if it does not already exist
Cf_Fat_Assign('MIKRO007.TXT',0xA0)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Cf_Fat_Reset
Prototype
sub procedure Cf_Fat_Reset(dim byref size as longword)
Returns
Nothing.
Opens currently assigned file for reading.
Description
Parameters :
- size: buffer to store file size to. After file has been open for reading its size is
returned through this parameter.
CF card and CF library must be initialized for file operations. See Cf_Fat_Init.
Requires
File must be previously assigned. See Cf_Fat_Assign.
Example
dim size as longword
...
Cf_Fat_Reset(size)
Cf_Fat_Read
Prototype
sub procedure Cf_Fat_Read(dim byref bdata as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Reads a byte from currently assigned file opened for reading. Upon function
execution file pointers will be set to the next character in the file.
Description Parameters :
- bdata: buffer to store read byte to. Upon this function execution read byte is
returned through this parameter.
CF card and CF library must be initialized for file operations. See Cf_Fat_Init.
Requires
File must be previously assigned. See Cf_Fat_Assign.
File must be open for reading. See Cf_Fat_Reset.
Example
dim character as byte
...
Cf_Fat_Read(character)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
199
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Cf_Fat_Rewrite
Prototype
sub procedure Cf_Fat_Rewrite()
Returns
Nothing.
Description
Opens currently assigned file for writing. If the file is not empty its content will
be erased.
CF card and CF library must be initialized for file operations. See Cf_Fat_Init.
Requires
The file must be previously assigned. See Cf_Fat_Assign.
Example
' open file for writing
Cf_Fat_Rewrite()
Cf_Fat_Append
Prototype
sub procedure Cf_Fat_Append()
Returns
Nothing.
Opens currently assigned file for appending. Upon this function execution file
Description pointers will be positioned after the last byte in the file, so any subsequent file
writing operation will start from there.
CF card and CF library must be initialized for file operations. See Cf_Fat_Init.
Requires
File must be previously assigned. See Cf_Fat_Assign.
Example
' open file for appending
Cf_Fat_Append()
Cf_Fat_Delete
Prototype
sub procedure Cf_Fat_Delete()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Deletes currently assigned file from CF card.
CF card and CF library must be initialized for file operations. See Cf_Fat_Init.
Requires
File must be previously assigned. See Cf_Fat_Assign.
Example
200
' delete current file
Cf_Fat_Delete()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Cf_Fat_Write
Prototype
sub procedure Cf_Fat_Write(dim byref fdata as byte[512], dim
data_len as word)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes requested number of bytes to currently assigned file opened for writing.
Description
Parameters :
- fdata: data to be written.
- data_len: number of bytes to be written.
CF card and CF library must be initialized for file operations. See Cf_Fat_Init.
Requires
File must be previously assigned. See Cf_Fat_Assign.
File must be open for writing. See Cf_Fat_Rewrite or Cf_Fat_Append.
Example
dim file_contents as array[42] of byte
...
Cf_Fat_Write(file_contents, 42) ' write data to the assigned file
Cf_Fat_Set_File_Date
Prototype
sub procedure Cf_Fat_Set_File_Date(dim year as word, dim month as
byte, dim day as byte, dim hours as byte, dim mins as byte, dim
seconds as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sets the date/time stamp. Any subsequent file writing operation will write this
stamp to currently assigned file's time/date attributs.
Parameters :
Description -
year: year attribute. Valid values: 1980-2107
month: month attribute. Valid values: 1-12
day: day attribute. Valid values: 1-31
hours: hours attribute. Valid values: 0-23
mins: minutes attribute. Valid values: 0-59
seconds: seconds attribute. Valid values: 0-59
CF card and CF library must be initialized for file operations. See Cf_Fat_Init.
Requires
File must be previously assigned. See Cf_Fat_Assign.
File must be open for writing. See Cf_Fat_Rewrite or Cf_Fat_Append.
Example
Cf_Fat_Set_File_Date(2005,9,30,17,41,0)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
201
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Cf_Fat_Get_File_Date
Prototype
sub procedure Cf_Fat_Get_File_Date(dim byref year as word, dim
byref month as byte, dim byref day as byte, dim byref hours as
byte, dim byref mins as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Reads time/date attributes of currently assigned file.
Parameters :
- year: buffer to store year attribute to. Upon function execution year attribute is
returned through this parameter.
- month: buffer to store month attribute to. Upon function execution month
Description
attribute is returned through this parameter.
- day: buffer to store day attribute to. Upon function execution day attribute is
returned through this parameter.
- hours: buffer to store hours attribute to. Upon function execution hours
attribute is returned through this parameter.
- mins: buffer to store minutes attribute to. Upon function execution minutes
attribute is returned through this parameter.
CF card and CF library must be initialized for file operations. See Cf_Fat_Init.
Requires
File must be previously assigned. See Cf_Fat_Assign.
Example
dim year as word
month, day, hours, mins as byte
...
Cf_Fat_Get_File_Date(year, month, day, hours, mins)
Cf_Fat_Get_File_Size
Prototype
sub function Cf_Fat_Get_File_Size() as longword
Returns
Size of the currently assigned file in bytes.
Description This function reads size of currently assigned file in bytes.
CF card and CF library must be initialized for file operations. See Cf_Fat_Init.
Requires
File must be previously assigned. See Cf_Fat_Assign.
Example
202
dim my_file_size as longword
...
my_file_size = Cf_Fat_Get_File_Size()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Cf_Fat_Get_Swap_File
Prototype
Returns
sub function Cf_Fat_Get_Swap_File(dim sectors_cnt as longint, dim
byref filename as string[11], dim file_attr as byte) as longword
- Number of the start sector for the newly created swap file, if there was
enough free space on CF card to create file of required size.
- 0 - otherwise.
This function is used to create a swap file of predefined name and size on the
CF media. If a file with specified name already exists on the media, search for
consecutive sectors will ignore sectors occupied by this file. Therefore, it is recommended to erase such file if it exists before calling this function. If it is not
erased and there is still enough space for a new swap file, this function will
delete it after allocating new memory space for a new swap file.
The purpose of the swap file is to make reading and writing to CF media as fast
as possible, by using the Cf_Read_Sector() and Cf_Write_Sector() functions
directly, without potentially damaging the FAT system. The swap file can be considered as a "window" on the media where the user can freely write/read data.
Its main purpose in the mikroBasic's library is to be used for fast data acquisition; when the time-critical acquisition has finished, the data can be re-written
into a "normal" file, and formatted in the most suitable way.
Parameters:
Description
- sectors_cnt: number of consecutive sectors that user wants the swap file to
have.
- filename: name of the file that should be assigned for file operations. The file
name should be in DOS 8.3 (file_name.extension) format. The file name and
extension will be automatically padded with spaces by the library if they have
less than length required (i.e. "mikro.tx" -> "mikro .tx "), so the user does not
have to take care of that. The file name and extension are case insensitive.
The library will convert them to the proper case automatically, so the user does
not have to take care of that.
Also, in order to keep backward compatibility with the first version of this
library, file names can be entered as UPPERCASE string of 11 bytes in length
with no dot character between the file name and extension (i.e.
"MIKROELETXT" -> MIKROELE.TXT). In this case the last 3 characters of the
string are considered to be file extension.
- file_attr: file creation and attributs flags. Each bit corresponds to the
appropriate file attribut:
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
203
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Description
Bit
Mask
Description
0
0x01
Read Only
1
0x02
Hidden
2
0x04
System
3
0x08
Volume Label
4
0x10
Subdirectory
5
0x20
Archive
6
0x40
Device (internal use only, never found on disk)
7
0x80
Not used
Note: Long File Names (LFN) are not supported.
204
Requires
CF card and CF library must be initialized for file operations. See Cf_Fat_Init.
Example
program
'-------------- Try to create a swap file with archive atribute,
whose size will be at least 1000 sectors.
'
If it succeeds, it sends the No. of start sector over USART
dim size as longword
...
main:
...
size = Cf_Fat_Get_Swap_File(1000, "mikroE.txt", 0x20)
if size then
UART1_Write(0xAA)
UART1_Write(Lo(size))
UART1_Write(Hi(size))
UART1_Write(Higher(size))
UART1_Write(Highest(size))
UART1_Write(0xAA)
end if
end.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Example
The following example is a simple demonstration of CF(Compact Flash) Library
which shows how to use CF card data accessing routines.
program CF_Fat16_Test
dim
' set compact flash pinout
Cf_Data_Port as byte at PORTD
Cf_Data_Port_Direction as byte at DDRD
CF_RDY
CF_WE
CF_OE
CF_CD1
CF_CE1
CF_A2
CF_A1
CF_A0
as
as
as
as
as
as
as
as
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
PINB.B7
PORTB.B6
PORTB.B5
PINB.B4
PORTB.B3
PORTB.B2
PORTB.B1
PORTB.B0
CF_RDY_direction as
CF_WE_direction as
CF_OE_direction as
CF_CD1_direction as
CF_CE1_direction as
CF_A2_direction as
CF_A1_direction as
CF_A0_direction as
' end of cf pinout
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
DDRB.B7
DDRB.B6
DDRB.B5
DDRB.B4
DDRB.B3
DDRB.B2
DDRB.B1
DDRB.B0
FAT_TXT as string[20]
file_contents as string[50]
filename as string[14]
' File names
character as byte
loop_, loop2 as byte
size as longint
Buffer as byte[512]
'-------------- Writes string to USART
sub procedure Write_Str(dim byref ostr as byte[2] )
dim
i as byte
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
205
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
i = 0
while ostr[i] <> 0
UART1_Write(ostr[i])
Inc(i)
wend
UART1_Write($0A)
end sub'~
'-------------- Creates new file and writes some data to it
sub procedure Create_New_File
filename[7] = "A"
Cf_Fat_Assign(filename, 0xA0)
' Will not find file and then
create file
Cf_Fat_Rewrite()
' To clear file and start with
new data
for loop_=1 to 90
' We want 5 files on the MMC
card
PORTC = loop_
file_contents[0] = loop_ div 10 + 48
file_contents[1] = loop_ mod 10 + 48
Cf_Fat_Write(file_contents, 38) ' write data to the assigned file
UART1_Write(".")
next loop_
end sub'~
'-------------- Creates many new files and writes data to them
sub procedure Create_Multiple_Files
for loop2 = "B" to "Z"
UART1_Write(loop2) ' this line can slow down the performance
filename[7] = loop2
' set filename
Cf_Fat_Assign(filename, 0xA0)
' find existing file or create a new one
Cf_Fat_Rewrite
' To clear file and start
with new data
for loop_ = 1 to 44
file_contents[0] = loop_ div 10 + 48
file_contents[1] = loop_ mod 10 + 48
Cf_Fat_Write(file_contents, 38) ' write data to the assigned
file
next loop_
next loop2
end sub'~
'-------------- Opens an existing file and rewrites it
sub procedure Open_File_Rewrite
206
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
filename[7] = "C"
' Set filename for single-file tests
Cf_Fat_Assign(filename, 0)
Cf_Fat_Rewrite
for loop_ = 1 to 55
file_contents[0] = byte(loop_ div 10 + 48)
file_contents[1] = byte(loop_ mod 10 + 48)
Cf_Fat_Write(file_contents, 38) ' write data to the assigned file
next loop_
end sub'~
'-------------- Opens an existing file and appends data to it
'
(and alters the date/time stamp)
sub procedure Open_File_Append
filename[7] = "B"
Cf_Fat_Assign(filename, 0)
Cf_Fat_Set_File_Date(2005,6,21,10,35,0)
Cf_Fat_Append
file_contents = " for mikroElektronika 2005"
' Prepare file
for append
file_contents[26] = 10
' LF
Cf_Fat_Write(file_contents, 27)
' Write data
to assigned file
end sub'~
'-------------- Opens an existing file, reads data from it and puts
it to USART
sub procedure Open_File_Read
filename[7] = "B"
Cf_Fat_Assign(filename, 0)
Cf_Fat_Reset(size)
' To read file, sub procedure returns
size of file
while size > 0
Cf_Fat_Read(character)
UART1_Write(character)
' Write data to USART
Dec(size)
wend
end sub'~
'-------------- Deletes a file. If file doesn"t exist, it will first
be created
'
and then deleted.
sub procedure Delete_File
filename[7] = "F"
Cf_Fat_Assign(filename, 0)
Cf_Fat_Delete
end sub'~
'-------------- Tests whether file exists, and if so sends its creation date
'
and file size via USART
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
207
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
sub procedure Test_File_Exist(dim fname as byte)
dim
fsize as longint
year as word
month_, day, hour_, minute_ as byte
outstr as byte[12]
filename[7] = "B"
'uncomment this line to search for file
that DOES exists
' filename[7] = "F"
'uncomment this line to search for file
that DOES NOT exist
if Cf_Fat_Assign(filename, 0) <> 0 then
'--- file has been found - get its date
Cf_Fat_Get_File_Date(year,month_,day,hour_,minute_)
WordToStr(year, outstr)
Write_Str(outstr)
ByteToStr(month_, outstr)
Write_Str(outstr)
WordToStr(day, outstr)
Write_Str(outstr)
WordToStr(hour_, outstr)
Write_Str(outstr)
WordToStr(minute_, outstr)
Write_Str(outstr)
'--- get file size
fsize = Cf_Fat_Get_File_Size
LongIntToStr(fsize, outstr)
Write_Str(outstr)
else
'--- file was not found - signal it
UART1_Write(0x55)
Delay_ms(1000)
UART1_Write(0x55)
end if
end sub'~
'-------------- Tries to create a swap file, whose size will be at
least 100
'
sectors (see Help for details)
sub procedure M_Create_Swap_File
dim i as word
for i=0 to 511
Buffer[i] = i
next i
size = Cf_Fat_Get_Swap_File(5000, "mikroE.txt", 0x20)
help on this sub function for details
' see
if (size <> 0) then
208
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
LongIntToStr(size, fat_txt)
Write_Str(fat_txt)
for i=0 to 4999
Cf_Write_Sector(size, Buffer)
size = size+1
UART1_Write(".")
next i
end if
end sub'~
'-------------- Main. Uncomment the sub function(s) to test the
desired operation(s)
main:
FAT_TXT = "FAT16 not found"
file_contents = "XX CF FAT16 library by Anton Rieckert"
file_contents[37] = 10
' newline
filename = "MIKRO00xTXT"
' we will use PORTC to signal test end
DDRC = 0xFF
PORTC = 0
UART1_Init(19200)
' Set up USART for file read-
ing
delay_ms(100)
UART1_Write_Text(":Start:")
' --- Init the FAT library
' --- use Cf_Fat_QuickFormat instead of init routine if a format is needed
if Cf_Fat_Init() = 0 then
'--- test sub functions
'----- test group #1
Create_New_File()
Create_Multiple_Files()
'----- test group #2
Open_File_Rewrite()
Open_File_Append()
Delete_File
'----- test group #3
Open_File_Read()
Test_File_Exist("F")
M_Create_Swap_File()
'--- Test termination
UART1_Write(0xAA)
else
UART1_Write_Text(FAT_TXT)
end if
'--- signal end-of-test
UART1_Write_Text(":End:")
end.'~!
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
209
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
HW Connection
Pin diagram of CF memory card
210
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
EEPROM LIBRARY
EEPROM data memory is available with a number of AVR family. The mikroBasic PRO for AVR
includes a library for comfortable work with MCU's internal EEPROM.
Note: EEPROM Library functions implementation is MCU dependent, consult the appropriate
MCU datasheet for details about available EEPROM size and address range.
Library Routines
- EEPROM_Read
- EEPROM_Write
EEPROM_Read
Prototype
sub function EEPROM_Read(dim address as word) as byte
Returns
Byte from the specified address.
Reads data from specified address.
Description Parameters :
- address: address of the EEPROM memory location to be read.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim eeAddr as word
temp as byte
...
eeAddr = 2
temp = EEPROM_Read(eeAddr)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
211
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
EEPROM_Write
Prototype
sub procedure EEPROM_Write(dim address as word, dim wrdata as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes wrdata to specified address.
Parameters :
Description
- address: address of the EEPROM memory location to be written.
- wrdata: data to be written.
Note: Specified memory location will be erased before writing starts.
212
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim eeWrite as byte
wrAddr as word
...
eeWrite = 0x02
wrAddr = 0xAA
EEPROM_Write(wrAddr, eeWrite)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Example
This example demonstrates using the EEPROM Library with ATmega16 MCU.
First, some data is written to EEPROM in byte and block mode; then the data is read
from the same locations and displayed on PORTA, PORTB and PORTC.
program EEPROM
dim counter as byte
' loop variable
main:
DDRA = 0xFF
DDRB = 0xFF
DDRC = 0xFF
for counter = 0 to 31
EEPROM_Write(0x100 + counter, counter)
address 0x100+counter
next counter
' Fill data buffer
' Write data to
EEPROM_Write(0x02,0xAA) ' Write some data at address 2
EEPROM_Write(0x150,0x55) ' Write some data at address 0x150
Delay_ms(1000)
PORTA = 0xFF
PORTB = 0xFF
Delay_ms(1000)
PORTA = 0x00
PORTB = 0x00
Delay_ms(1000)
PORTA
address
PORTB
address
' Blink PORTA and PORTB diodes
'
to indicate reading start
= EEPROM_Read(0x02)
2 and display it on PORTA
= EEPROM_Read(0x150)
0x150 and display it on PORTB
' Read data from
' Read data from
Delay_ms(1000)
for counter = 0 to 31
' Read 32 bytes block from address 0x100
PORTC = EEPROM_Read(0x100+counter)
'
and display
data on PORTC
Delay_ms(100)
next counter
end.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
213
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
FLASH MEMORY LIBRARY
This library provides routines for accessing microcontroller Flash memory. Note that prototypes
differ for MCU to MCU due to the amount of Flash memory.
Note: Due to the AVR family flash specifics, flash library is MCU dependent. Since some AVR
MCU's have more or less than 64kb of Flash memory, prototypes may be different from chip to
chip.
Please refer to datasheet before using flash library.
Note: Currently, Write operations are not supported. See mikroBasic PRO for AVR specifics for
details.
Library Routines
-
FLASH_Read_Byte
FLASH_Read_Bytes
FLASH_Read_Word
FLASH_Read_Words
FLASH_Read_Byte
' for MCUs with 64kb of Flash memory or less
sub function FLASH_Read_Byte(dim address as word) as byte
Prototype
' for MCUs with Flash memory larger than 64kb
sub function FLASH_Read_Byte(dim address as longword) as byte
Returns
Returns data byte from Flash memory.
Description Reads data from the specified address in Flash memory.
214
Requires
Nothing.
Example
' for MCUs with Flash memory larger than 64kb
dim tmp as longword
...
tmp = Flash_Read(0x0D00)
...
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
FLASH_Read_Bytes
' for MCUs with 64kb of Flash memory or less
sub procedure FLASH_Read_Bytes(dim address as word, dim buffer as
^byte, dim NoBytes as word)
Prototype
' for MCUs with Flash memory larger than 64kb
sub procedure FLASH_Read_Bytes(dim address as longword, dim
buffer as ^byte, dim NoBytes as word)
Returns
Nothing.
Description
Reads number of data bytes defined by NoBytes parameter from the specified
address in Flash memory to varibale pointed by buffer.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
'for MCUs with Flash memory larger than 64kb
const F_ADDRESS as longint = 0x200
dim dat_buff[32] as word
...
FLASH_Read_Bytes(F_ADDRESS,dat_buff, 64)
FLASH_Read_Word
' for MCUs with 64kb of Flash memory or less
sub function FLASH_Read_Word(dim address as word) as word
Prototype
' for MCUs with Flash memory larger than 64kb
sub function FLASH_Read_Word(dim address as longword) as word
Returns
Returns data word from Flash memory.
Description Reads data from the specified address in Flash memory.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
' for MCUs with Flash memory larger than 64kb
dim tmp as longword
...
tmp = Flash_Read(0x0D00)
...
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
215
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
FLASH_Read_Words
' for MCUs with 64kb of Flash memory or less
sub procedure FLASH_Read_Words(dim address as word, dim buffer as
^word, dim NoWords as word)
Prototype
' for MCUs with Flash memory larger than 64kb
sub procedure FLASH_Read_Words(dim address as longword, dim
buffer as ^word, dim NoWords as word)
Returns
Nothing.
Description
Reads number of data words defined by NoWords parameter from the specified
address in Flash memory to varibale pointed by buffer.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
'for MCUs with Flash memory larger than 64kb
const F_ADDRESS as longint = 0x200
dim dat_buff[32] as word
...
FLASH_Read_Bytes(F_ADDRESS,dat_buff, 64)
Library Example
The example demonstrates simple write to the flash memory for AVR, then reads the data and
displays it on PORTB and PORTD.
program Flash_MCU_test
const F_ADDRESS as longint = 0x200
const data_ as word[32] = (
0x0000,0x0001,0x0002,0x0003,0x0004,0x0005,0x0006,0x0007,
0x0008,0x0009,0x000A,0x000B,0x000C,0x000D,0x000E,0x000F,
0x0000,0x0100,0x0200,0x0300,0x0400,0x0500,0x0600,0x0700,
0x0800,0x0900,0x0A00,0x0B00,0x0C00,0x0D00,0x0E00,0x0F00
) org 0x200
dim counter as byte
word_ as word
dat_buff as word[32]
'dat_buff_ as word[32]
main:
DDRD = 0xFF
DDRB = 0xFF
word_ = data_[0]
216
' constant table
' set direction to be output
' set direction to be output
' link const table
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
counter = 0
while ( counter < 64 )
' reading 64 bytes in loop
PORTD = FLASH_Read_Byte(F_ADDRESS + counter)
' demonstration
of reading single byte
Inc(counter)
PORTB = FLASH_Read_Byte(F_ADDRESS + counter)
' demonstration
of reading single byte
Inc(counter)
Delay_ms(200)
wend
FLASH_Read_Bytes(F_ADDRESS, @dat_buff, 64)
' demonstration
of reading 64 bytes
for counter = 0 to 31
PORTD = dat_buff[counter]
' output low byte to PORTD
PORTB = word((dat_buff[counter] >> 8))
' output higher byte to PORTB
Delay_ms(200)
next counter
counter = 0
while (counter <= 63)
' reading 32 words in loop
word_ = FLASH_Read_Word(F_ADDRESS + counter)
' demonstration
of reading single word
PORTD = word_
' output low byte to PORTD
PORTB = Hi(word_)' >> 8)
' output higher byte to PORTB
counter = counter + 2
Delay_ms(200)
wend
FLASH_Read_Words(F_ADDRESS, @dat_buff, 32)
' demonstration
of reading 64 bytes
for counter = 0 to 31
PORTD = dat_buff[counter]
' output low byte to PORTD
PORTB = word((dat_buff[counter] >> 8))
' output higher byte to PORTB
Delay_ms(200)
next counter
end.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
217
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
GRAPHIC LCD LIBRARY
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR provides a library for operating Graphic Lcd 128x64 (with
commonly used Samsung KS108/KS107 controller).
For creating a custom set of Glcd images use Glcd Bitmap Editor Tool.
External dependencies of Graphic Lcd Library
The following variables must
be defined in all projects
using Graphic Lcd Library:
dim GLCD_DataPort as byte
sfr external
dim
GLCD_DataPort_Direction
as byte sfr external
dim GLCD_CS1 as sbit sfr
external
dim GLCD_CS2 as sbit sfr
external
dim GLCD_RS as sbit sfr
external
dim GLCD_RW as sbit sfr
external
dim GLCD_RST as sbit sfr
external
dim GLCD_EN as sbit sfr
external
218
Description:
Glcd Data Port.
Direction of the Glcd Data
Port.
Chip Select 1 line.
Chip Select 2 line.
Register select line.
Read/Write line.
Reset line.
Enable line.
Example :
dim GLCD_DataPort as
byte at PORTC
dim
GLCD_DataPort_Directi
on as byte at DDRC
dim GLCD_CS1 as sbit
at PORTD.B2
dim GLCD_CS2 as sbit
at PORTD.B3
dim GLCD_RS as sbit
at PORTD.B4
dim GLCD_RW as sbit
at PORTD.B5
dim GLCD_RST as sbit
at PORTD.B6
dim GLCD_EN as sbit
at PORTD.B7
dim GLCD_CS1_Direction as
sbit sfr external
Direction of the Chip
Select 1 pin.
dim GLCD_CS2_Direction as
sbit sfr external
Direction of the Chip
Select 2 pin.
dim
GLCD_CS1_Direction as
sbit at DDRD.B2
dim
GLCD_CS2_Direction as
sbit at DDRD.B3
dim GLCD_RS_Direction as
sbit sfr external
Direction of the Register
select pin.
dim GLCD_RS_Direction
as sbit at DDRD.B4
dim GLCD_RW_Direction as
sbit sfr external
Direction of the
Read/Write pin.
dim GLCD_RW_Direction
as sbit at DDRD.B5
dim GLCD_EN_Direction as
sbit sfr external
Direction of the Enable pin.
dim GLCD_EN_Direction
as sbit at DDRD.B6
dim GLCD_RST_Direction as
sbit sfr external
Direction of the Reset pin. GLCD_RST_Direction as
dim
sbit at DDRD.B7
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Routines
Basic routines:
-
Glcd_Init
Glcd_Set_Side
Glcd_Set_X
Glcd_Set_Page
Glcd_Read_Data
Glcd_Write_Data
Advanced routines:
-
Glcd_Fill
Glcd_Dot
Glcd_Line
Glcd_V_Line
Glcd_H_Line
Glcd_Rectangle
Glcd_Box
Glcd_Circle
Glcd_Set_Font
Glcd_Write_Char
Glcd_Write_Text
Glcd_Image
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
219
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Glcd_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Init()
Returns
Nothing.
Description
Initializes the Glcd module. Each of the control lines is both port and pin configurable, while data lines must be on a single port (pins <0:7>).
Global variables :
-
GLCD_CS1 : Chip select 1 signal pin
GLCD_CS2 : Chip select 2 signal pin
GLCD_RS : Register select signal pin
GLCD_RW : Read/Write Signal pin
GLCD_EN : Enable signal pin
GLCD_RST : Reset signal pin
GLCD_DataPort : Data port
-
GLCD_CS1_Direction : Direction of the Chip select 1 pin
GLCD_CS2_Direction : Direction of the Chip select 2 pin
GLCD_RS_Direction : Direction of the Register select signal pin
GLCD_RW_Direction : Direction of the Read/Write signal pin
GLCD_EN_Direction : Direction of the Enable signal pin
GLCD_RST_Direction : Direction of the Reset signal pin
GLCD_DataPort_Direction : Direction of the Data port
Requires
must be defined before using this function.
// Glcd module connections
dim GLCD_DataPort
as byte at PORTC
GLCD_DataPort_Direction as byte at DDRC
dim GLCD_CS1
GLCD_CS2
GLCD_RS
GLCD_RW
GLCD_EN
GLCD_RST
Example
as
as
as
as
as
as
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
at
at
at
at
at
at
PORTD.B2
PORTD.B3
PORTD.B4
PORTD.B5
PORTD.B6
PORTD.B7
dim GLCD_CS1_Direction as sbit
GLCD_CS2_Direction as sbit
GLCD_RS_Direction as sbit
GLCD_RW_Direction as sbit
GLCD_EN_Direction as sbit
GLCD_RST_Direction as sbit
// End Glcd module connections
at
at
at
at
at
at
DDRD.B2
DDRD.B3
DDRD.B4
DDRD.B5
DDRD.B6
DDRD.B7
...
Glcd_Init()
220
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Glcd_Set_Side
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Set_Side(dim x_pos as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Selects Glcd side. Refer to the Glcd datasheet for detailed explaination.
Parameters :
- x_pos: position on x-axis. Valid values: 0..127
Description
The parameter x_pos specifies the Glcd side: values from 0 to 63 specify the
left side, values from 64 to 127 specify the right side.
Note: For side, x axis and page layout explanation see schematic at the bottom
of this page.
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
The following two lines are equivalent, and both of them select the left side of
Glcd:
Example
Glcd_Select_Side(0)
Glcd_Select_Side(10)
Glcd_Set_X
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Set_X(dim x_pos as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sets x-axis position to x_pos dots from the left border of Glcd within the selected side.
Parameters :
Description
- x_pos: position on x-axis. Valid values: 0..63
Note: For side, x axis and page layout explanation see schematic at the bottom
of this page.
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Example
Glcd_Set_X(25)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
221
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Glcd_Set_Page
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Set_Page(dim page as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Selects page of the Glcd.
Parameters :
Description
- page: page number. Valid values: 0..7
Note: For side, x axis and page layout explanation see schematic at the bottom
of this page.
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Example
Glcd_Set_Page(5)
Glcd_Read_Data
Prototype
sub function Glcd_Read_Data() as byte
Returns
One byte from Glcd memory.
Description
Reads data from from the current location of Glcd memory and moves to the
next location.
Glcd needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Requires
Example
222
Glcd side, x-axis position and page should be set first. See functions
Glcd_Set_Side, Glcd_Set_X, and Glcd_Set_Page.
dim data as byte
...
data = Glcd_Read_Data()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Glcd_Write_Data
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Write_Data(dim ddata as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes one byte to the current location in Glcd memory and moves to the next
location.
Description
Parameters :
- ddata: data to be written
Glcd needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Requires
Example
Glcd side, x-axis position and page should be set first. See functions
Glcd_Set_Side, Glcd_Set_X, and Glcd_Set_Page.
dim data as byte
...
Glcd_Write_Data(data)
Glcd_Fill
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Fill(dim pattern as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Fills Glcd memory with the byte pattern.
Parameters :
Description - pattern: byte to fill Glcd memory with
To clear the Glcd screen, use Glcd_Fill(0).
To fill the screen completely, use Glcd_Fill(0xFF).
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Example
' Clear screen
Glcd_Fill(0)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
223
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Glcd_Dot
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Dot(dim x_pos as byte, dim y_pos as byte, dim
color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a dot on Glcd at coordinates (x_pos, y_pos).
Parameters :
- x_pos: x position. Valid values: 0..127
- y_pos: y position. Valid values: 0..63
Description
- color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines a dot state: 0 clears dot, 1 puts a dot, and 2
inverts dot state.
Note: For x and y axis layout explanation see schematic at the bottom of this page.
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Example
' Invert the dot in the upper left corner
Glcd_Dot(0, 0, 2)
Glcd_Line
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Line(dim x_start as integer, dim y_start as integer, dim x_end as integer, dim y_end as integer, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a line on Glcd.
Parameters :
Description
-
x_start: x coordinate of the line start. Valid values: 0..127
y_start: y coordinate of the line start. Valid values: 0..63
x_end: x coordinate of the line end. Valid values: 0..127
y_end: y coordinate of the line end. Valid values: 0..63
color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the line color: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts
each dot.
224
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Example
' Draw a line between dots (0,0) and (20,30)
Glcd_Line(0, 0, 20, 30, 1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Glcd_V_Line
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_V_Line(dim y_start as byte, dim y_end as byte,
dim x_pos as byte, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a vertical line on Glcd.
Parameters :
Description -
y_start: y coordinate of the line start. Valid values: 0..63
y_end: y coordinate of the line end. Valid values: 0..63
x_pos: x coordinate of vertical line. Valid values: 0..127
color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the line color: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts
each dot.
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Example
' Draw a vertical line between dots (10,5) and (10,25)
Glcd_V_Line(5, 25, 10, 1)
Glcd_H_Line
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_V_Line(dim x_start as byte, dim x_end as byte,
dim y_pos as byte, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a horizontal line on Glcd.
Parameters :
Description -
x_start: x coordinate of the line start. Valid values: 0..127
x_end: x coordinate of the line end. Valid values: 0..127
y_pos: y coordinate of horizontal line. Valid values: 0..63
color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the line color: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts
each dot.
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Example
' Draw a horizontal line between dots (10,20) and (50,20)
Glcd_H_Line(10, 50, 20, 1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
225
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Glcd_Rectangle
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Rectangle(dim x_upper_left as byte, dim
y_upper_left as byte, dim x_bottom_right as byte, dim
y_bottom_right as byte, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a rectangle on Glcd.
Parameters :
- x_upper_left: x coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner. Valid values:
0..127
- y_upper_left: y coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner. Valid values:
0..63
Description
- x_bottom_right: x coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner. Valid
values: 0..127
- y_bottom_right: y coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner. Valid
values: 0..63
- color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the color of the rectangle border: 0 white, 1
black, and 2 inverts each dot.
226
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Example
' Draw a rectangle between dots (5,5) and (40,40)
Glcd_Rectangle(5, 5, 40, 40, 1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Glcd_Box
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Box(dim x_upper_left as byte, dim y_upper_left
as byte, dim x_bottom_right as byte, dim y_bottom_right as byte,
dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a box on Glcd.
Parameters :
- x_upper_left: x coordinate of the upper left box corner. Valid values: 0..127
- y_upper_left: y coordinate of the upper left box corner. Valid values: 0..63
Description
- x_bottom_right: x coordinate of the lower right box corner. Valid values: 0..127
- y_bottom_right: y coordinate of the lower right box corner. Valid values: 0..63
- color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the color of the box fill: 0 white, 1 black, and 2
inverts each dot.
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Example
' Draw a box between dots (5,15) and (20,40)
Glcd_Box(5, 15, 20, 40, 1)
Glcd_Circle
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Circle(dim x_center as integer, dim y_center
as integer, dim radius as integer, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a circle on Glcd.
Parameters :
Description -
x_center: x coordinate of the circle center. Valid values: 0..127
y_center: y coordinate of the circle center. Valid values: 0..63
radius: radius size
color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the color of the circle line: 0 white, 1 black,
and 2 inverts each dot.
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Example
' Draw a circle with center in (50,50) and radius=10
Glcd_Circle(50, 50, 10, 1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
227
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Glcd_Set_Font
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Set_Font(dim byref const ActiveFont as ^byte, dim
FontWidth as byte, dim FontHeight as byte, dim FontOffs as word)
Returns
Nothing.
Sets font that will be used with Glcd_Write_Char and Glcd_Write_Text routines.
Parameters :
Description -
activeFont: font to be set. Needs to be formatted as an array of char
aFontWidth: width of the font characters in dots.
aFontHeight: height of the font characters in dots.
aFontOffs: number that represents difference between the mikroBasic PRO
for AVR character set and regular ASCII set (eg. if 'A' is 65 in ASCII character,
and 'A' is 45 in the mikroBasic PRO for AVR character set, aFontOffs is 20).
Demo fonts supplied with the library have an offset of 32, which means that
they start with space.
The user can use fonts given in the file “__Lib_GLCDFonts.mbas” file located in
the Uses folder or create his own fonts.
228
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Example
' Use the custom 5x7 font "myfont" which starts with space (32):
Glcd_Set_Font(myfont, 5, 7, 32)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Glcd_Write_Char
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Write_Char(dim chr as byte, dim x_pos as byte,
dim page_num as byte, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Prints character on the Glcd.
Parameters :
- chr: character to be written
- x_pos: character starting position on x-axis. Valid values: 0..(127-FontWidth)
- page_num: the number of the page on which character will be written. Valid
Description
values: 0..7
- color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the color of the character: 0 white, 1 black,
and 2 inverts each dot.
Note: For x axis and page layout explanation see schematic at the bottom of
this page.
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine. Use Glcd_Set_Font to specify the font for display; if no font is specified, then default 5x8 font supplied with
the library will be used.
Example
' Write character 'C' on the position 10 inside the page 2:
Glcd_Write_Char('C', 10, 2, 1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
229
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Glcd_Write_Text
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Write_Text(dim byref text as string[20], dim
x_pos as byte, dim page_num as byte, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Prints text on Glcd.
Parameters :
- text: text to be written
- x_pos: text starting position on x-axis.
- page_num: the number of the page on which text will be written. Valid values: 0..7
Description
- color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the color of the text: 0 white, 1 black, and 2
inverts each dot.
Note: For x axis and page layout explanation see schematic at the bottom of
this page.
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine. Use Glcd_Set_Font to specify the font for display; if no font is specified, then default 5x8 font supplied with
the library will be used.
Example
' Write text "Hello world!" on the position 10 inside the page 2:
Glcd_Write_Text("Hello world!", 10, 2, 1)
Glcd_Image
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Image(dim byref const image as ^byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Displays bitmap on Glcd.
Parameters :
Description
- image: image to be displayed. Bitmap array must be located in code memory.
Use the mikroBasic PRO for AVR integrated Glcd Bitmap Editor to convert
image to a constant array suitable for displaying on Glcd.
230
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Example
' Draw image my_image on Glcd
Glcd_Image(my_image)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Example
The following example demonstrates routines of the Glcd library: initialization,
clear(pattern fill), image displaying, drawing lines, circles, boxes and rectangles, text
displaying and handling.
program Glcd_Test
include bitmap
' Glcd module connections
dim GLCD_DataPort as byte at PORTC
GLCD_DataPort_Direction as byte at DDRC
dim GLCD_CS1
GLCD_CS2
GLCD_RS
GLCD_RW
GLCD_EN
GLCD_RST
as
as
as
as
as
as
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
at
at
at
at
at
at
PORTD.B2
PORTD.B3
PORTD.B4
PORTD.B5
PORTD.B6
PORTD.B7
dim GLCD_CS1_Direction as sbit
GLCD_CS2_Direction as sbit
GLCD_RS_Direction as sbit
GLCD_RW_Direction as sbit
GLCD_EN_Direction as sbit
GLCD_RST_Direction as sbit
' End Glcd module connections
at
at
at
at
at
at
DDRD.B2
DDRD.B3
DDRD.B4
DDRD.B5
DDRD.B6
DDRD.B7
dim counter as byte
someText as char[18]
sub procedure Delay2S()
function
Delay_ms(2000)
end sub
main:
Glcd_Init()
Glcd_Fill(0x00)
while TRUE
Glcd_Image(@truck_bmp)
Delay2S() delay2S()
Glcd_Fill(0x00)
Glcd_Box(62,40,124,63,1)
Glcd_Rectangle(5,5,84,35,1)
Glcd_Line(0, 0, 127, 63, 1)
Delay2S()
counter = 5
' 2 seconds delay sub
' Initialize Glcd
' Clear Glcd
' Draw image
' Clear Glcd
' Draw box
' Draw rectangle
' Draw line
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
231
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
while (counter <= 59)
' Draw horizontal and vertical lines
Delay_ms(250)
Glcd_V_Line(2, 54, counter, 1)
Glcd_H_Line(2, 120, counter, 1)
Counter = counter + 5
wend
Delay2S()
Glcd_Fill(0x00)
Glcd_Set_Font(@Character8x7, 8,
"Character8x7"
Glcd_Write_Text("mikroE", 1, 7, 2)
for counter = 1 to 10
Glcd_Circle(63,32, 3*counter, 1)
next counter
Delay2S()
Glcd_Box(12,20, 70,57, 2)
Delay2S()
' Clear Glcd
7,
32)
'
Choose
font
' Write string
' Draw circles
' Draw box
Glcd_Fill(0xFF)
' Fill Glcd
Glcd_Set_Font(@Character8x7, 8, 7, 32) ' Change font
someText = "8x7 Font"
Glcd_Write_Text(someText, 5, 0, 2)
' Write string
delay2S()
Glcd_Set_Font(@System3x6, 3, 5, 32)
someText = "3X5 CAPITALS ONLY"
Glcd_Write_Text(someText, 60, 2, 2)
delay2S()
Glcd_Set_Font(@font5x7, 5, 7, 32)
someText = "5x7 Font"
Glcd_Write_Text(someText, 5, 4, 2)
delay2S()
' Change font
' Write string
' Change font
' Write string
Glcd_Set_Font(@FontSystem5x7_v2, 5, 7, 32) ' Change font
someText = "5x7 Font (v2)"
Glcd_Write_Text(someText, 5, 6, 2)
' Write string
delay2S()
wend
end.
232
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
HW Connection
Glcd HW connection
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
233
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
KEYPAD LIBRARY
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR provides a library for working with 4x4 keypad. The
library routines can also be used with 4x1, 4x2, or 4x3 keypad. For connections
explanation see schematic at the bottom of this page.
Note: Since sampling lines for AVR MCUs are activated by logical zero Keypad
Library can not be used with hardwares that have protective diodes connected with
anode to MCU side, such as mikroElektronika's Keypad extra board HW.Rev v1.20
The following variable
must be defined in all
projects using Keypad
Library:
Description:
Example :
dim keypadPort as
byte sfr external
Keypad Port.
dim keypadPort as
byte at PORTB
dim
keypadPort_Direction
as byte sfr external
Direction of the Keypad
Port.
dim
keypadPort_Direction
as byte at DDRB
Library Routines
- Keypad_Init
- Keypad_Key_Press
- Keypad_Key_Click
234
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Keypad_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Keypad_Init()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Initializes port for working with keypad.
Global variables :
Requires
- keypadPort_Reg - Keypad port
- keypadPort_Reg_Direction - Direction of the Keypad port
must be defined before using this function.
Example
' Initialize PORTB for communication with keypad
dim keypadPort as byte at PORTB
dim keypadPort_Direction as byte at DDRB
...
Keypad_Init()
Keypad_Key_Press
Prototype
sub function Keypad_Key_Press() as byte
The code of a pressed key (1..16).
Returns
If no key is pressed, returns 0.
Description Reads the key from keypad when key gets pressed.
Requires
Port needs to be initialized for working with the Keypad library, see Keypad_Init.
Example
dim kp as byte
...
kp = Keypad_Key_Press()
Keypad_Key_Click
Prototype
sub function Keypad_Key_Click() as byte
The code of a clicked key (1..16).
Returns
If no key is clicked, returns 0.
Call to Keypad_Key_Click is a blocking call: the function waits until some key is
pressed and released. When released, the function returns 1 to 16, depending
Description on the key. If more than one key is pressed simultaneously the function will wait
until all pressed keys are released. After that the function will return the code of
the first pressed key.
Requires
Port needs to be initialized for working with the Keypad library, see Keypad_Init.
Example
dim kp as byte
...
kp = Keypad_Key_Click()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
235
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Example
This is a simple example of using the Keypad Library. It supports keypads with 1..4
rows and 1..4 columns. The code being returned by Keypad_Key_Click() function is
in range from 1..16. In this example, the code returned is transformed into ASCII
codes [0..9,A..F] and displayed on Lcd. In addition, a small single-byte counter displays in the second Lcd row number of key presses.
program Keypad_Test
dim kp, cnt, oldstate as byte
txt as byte[7]
' Keypad module connections
dim keypadPort as byte at PORTB
dim keypadPort_Direction as byte at DDRB
' End Keypad module connections
' Lcd pinout definition
dim LCD_RS as sbit at PORTD.2
LCD_EN as sbit at PORTD.3
LCD_D4 as sbit at PORTD.4
LCD_D5 as sbit at PORTD.5
LCD_D6 as sbit at PORTD.6
LCD_D7 as sbit at PORTD.7
dim LCD_RS_Direction as sbit
LCD_EN_Direction as sbit
LCD_D4_Direction as sbit
LCD_D5_Direction as sbit
LCD_D6_Direction as sbit
LCD_D7_Direction as sbit
' end Lcd pinout definitions
main:
oldstate = 0
cnt = 0
Keypad_Init()
Lcd_Init()
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CLEAR)
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CURSOR_OFF)
Lcd_Out(1, 1, "Key :")
LCD
Lcd_Out(2, 1, "Times:")
at
at
at
at
at
at
DDRD.2
DDRD.3
DDRD.4
DDRD.5
DDRD.6
DDRD.7
' Reset counter
' Initialize Keypad
' Initialize Lcd
' Clear display
' Cursor off
' Write message text on
while TRUE
kp = 0
236
' Reset key code variable
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
' Wait for key to be pressed and released
while ( kp = 0 )
kp = Keypad_Key_Click()
' Store key code in kp variable
wend
' Prepare value for output, transform key to it"s ASCII value
select case kp
'case 10: kp = 42
' "*" ' Uncomment this block for keypad4x3
'case 11: kp = 48
' "0"
'case 12: kp = 35
' "#"
'default: kp += 48
case 1
kp = 49 ' 1
case 2
kp = 50 ' 2
case 3
kp = 51 ' 3
case 4
kp = 65 ' A
case 5
kp = 52 ' 4
case 6
kp = 53 ' 5
case 7
kp = 54 ' 6
case 8
kp = 66 ' B
case 9
kp = 55 ' 7
case 10
kp = 56 ' 8
case 11
kp = 57 ' 9
case 12
kp = 67 ' C
case 13
kp = 42 ' *
case 14
kp = 48 ' 0
case 15
kp = 35 ' #
case 16
kp = 68 ' D
' Uncomment this block for keypad4x4
end select
if (kp <> oldstate) then
cnt = 1
oldstate = kp
' Pressed key differs from previous
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
237
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
else
' Pressed key is same as previous
Inc(cnt)
end if
Lcd_Chr(1, 10, kp)
if (cnt = 255) then
cnt = 0
Lcd_Out(2, 10, "
end if
WordToStr(cnt, txt)
Lcd_Out(2, 10, txt)
wend
end.
238
' Print key ASCII value on Lcd
' If counter varialble overflow
")
' Transform counter value to string
' Display counter value on Lcd
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
HW Connection
4x4 Keypad connection scheme
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
239
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
LCD LIBRARY
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR provides a library for communication with Lcds (with
HD44780 compliant controllers) through the 4-bit interface. An example of Lcd connections is given on the schematic at the bottom of this page.
For creating a set of custom Lcd characters use Lcd Custom Character Tool.
External dependencies of Lcd Library
The following variables
must be defined in all
projects using Lcd
Library:
dim LCD_RS as sbit
sfr external
dim LCD_EN as sbit
sfr external
dim LCD_D7 as sbit
sfr external
dim LCD_D6 as sbit
sfr external
dim LCD_D5 as sbit
sfr external
dim LCD_D4 as sbit
sfr external
dim LCD_RS_Direction
as sbit sfr external
dim LCD_EN_Direction
as sbit sfr external
dim LCD_D7_Direction
as sbit sfr external
dim LCD_D6_Direction
as sbit sfr external
dim LCD_D5_Direction
as sbit sfr external
dim LCD_D4_Direction
as sbit sfr external
240
Description:
Example :
dim LCD_RS as sbit at
PORTD.B2
dim LCD_EN as sbit at
Enable line.
PORTD.B3
dim LCD_D7 as sbit at
Data 7 line.
PORTD.B4
dim LCD_D6 as sbit at
Data 6 line.
PORTD.B5
dim LCD_D5 as sbit at
Data 5 line.
PORTD.B6
dim LCD_D4 as sbit at
Data 4 line.
PORTD.B7
dim LCD_RS_Direction
Register Select direction pin. as sbit at DDRD.B2
dim LCD_EN_Direction
Enable direction pin.
as sbit at DDRD.B3
dim LCD_D7_Direction
Data 7 direction pin.
as sbit at DDRD.B4
dim LCD_D6_Direction
Data 6 direction pin.
as sbit at DDRD.B5
dim LCD_D5_Direction
Data 5 direction pin.
as sbit at DDRD.B6
dim LCD_D4_Direction
Data 4 direction pin.
as sbit at DDRD.B7
Register Select line.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Routines
-
Lcd_Init
Lcd_Out
Lcd_Out_Cp
Lcd_Chr
Lcd_Chr_Cp
Lcd_Cmd
Lcd_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Lcd_Init()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Initializes Lcd module.
Global variables:
-
LCD_D7:
LCD_D6:
LCD_D5:
LCD_D4:
LCD_RS:
LCD_EN:
Data bit 7
Data bit 6
Data bit 5
Data bit 4
Register Select (data/instruction) signal pin
Enable signal pin
-
LCD_D7_Direction:
LCD_D6_Direction:
LCD_D5_Direction:
LCD_D4_Direction:
LCD_RS_Direction:
LCD_EN_Direction:
Requires
Direction
Direction
Direction
Direction
Direction
Direction
of
of
of
of
of
of
the
the
the
the
the
the
Data 7 pin
Data 6 pin
Data 5 pin
Data 4 pin
Register Select pin
Enable signal pin
must be defined before using this function.
' Lcd module connections
dim
LCD_RS as sbit at PORTD.B2
LCD_EN as sbit at PORTD.B3
LCD_D7 as sbit at PORTD.B4
LCD_D6 as sbit at PORTD.B5
LCD_D5 as sbit at PORTD.B6
LCD_D4 as sbit at PORTD.B7
Example
dim
LCD_RS as sbit
LCD_EN as sbit
LCD_D7 as sbit
LCD_D6 as sbit
LCD_D5 as sbit
LCD_D4 as sbit
' End Lcd module
...
at DDRD.B2
at DDRD.B3
at DDRD.B4
at DDRD.B5
at DDRD.B6
at DDRD.B7
connections
Lcd_Init()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
241
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Lcd_Out
Prototype
sub procedure Lcd_Out(dim row as byte, dim column as byte, dim
byref text as string[20])
Returns
Nothing.
Prints text on Lcd starting from specified position. Both string variables and literals can be passed as a text.
Description
Parameters :
- row: starting position row number
- column: starting position column number
- text: text to be written
Requires
The Lcd module needs to be initialized. See Lcd_Init routine.
Example
' Write text "Hello!" on Lcd starting from row 1, column 3:
Lcd_Out(1, 3, "Hello!")
Lcd_Out_Cp
Prototype
sub procedure Lcd_Out_Cp(dim byref text as string[19])
Returns
Nothing.
Prints text on Lcd at current cursor position. Both string variables and literals
can be passed as a text.
Description
Parameters :
- text: text to be written
242
Requires
The Lcd module needs to be initialized. See Lcd_Init routine.
Example
' Write text "Here!" at current cursor position:
Lcd_Out_Cp("Here!")
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Lcd_Chr
Prototype
sub procedure Lcd_Chr(dim row as byte, dim column as byte, dim
out_char as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Prints character on Lcd at specified position. Both variables and literals can be
passed as a character.
Description
Parameters :
- row: writing position row number
- column: writing position column number
- out_char: character to be written
Requires
The Lcd module needs to be initialized. See Lcd_Init routine.
Example
' Write character "i" at row 2, column 3:
Lcd_Chr(2, 3, 'i')
Lcd_Chr_Cp
Prototype
sub procedure Lcd_Chr_Cp(dim out_char as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Prints character on Lcd at current cursor position. Both variables and literals
can be passed as a character.
Description
Parameters :
- out_char: character to be written
Requires
The Lcd module needs to be initialized. See Lcd_Init routine.
Example
' Write character "e" at current cursor position:
Lcd_Chr_Cp('e')
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
243
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Lcd_Cmd
Prototype
sub procedure Lcd_Cmd(dim out_char as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sends command to Lcd.
Parameters :
Description
- out_char: command to be sent
Note: Predefined constants can be passed to the function, see Available SPI
Lcd Commands.
Requires
The Lcd module needs to be initialized. See Lcd_Init table.
Example
' Clear Lcd display:
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CLEAR)
Available Lcd Commands
244
Lcd Command
Purpose
LCD_FIRST_ROW
Move cursor to the 1st row
LCD_SECOND_ROW
Move cursor to the 2nd row
LCD_THIRD_ROW
Move cursor to the 3rd row
LCD_FOURTH_ROW
Move cursor to the 4th row
LCD_CLEAR
Clear display
LCD_RETURN_HOME
Return cursor to home position, returns a shifted display to its
original position. Display data RAM is unaffected.
LCD_CURSOR_OFF
Turn off cursor
LCD_UNDERLINE_ON
Underline cursor on
LCD_BLINK_CURSOR_ON
Blink cursor on
LCD_MOVE_CURSOR_LEFT
Move cursor left without changing display data RAM
LCD_MOVE_CURSOR_RIGHT
Move cursor right without changing display data RAM
LCD_TURN_ON
Turn Lcd display on
LCD_TURN_OFF
Turn Lcd display off
LCD_SHIFT_LEFT
Shift display left without changing display data RAM
LCD_SHIFT_RIGHT
Shift display right without changing display data RAM
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Example
The following code demonstrates usage of the Lcd Library routines:
' LCD module connections
dim LCD_RS as sbit at PORTD.2
dim LCD_EN as sbit at PORTD.3
dim LCD_D4 as sbit at PORTD.4
dim LCD_D5 as sbit at PORTD.5
dim LCD_D6 as sbit at PORTD.6
dim LCD_D7 as sbit at PORTD.7
dim LCD_RS_Direction as sbit
dim LCD_EN_Direction as sbit
dim LCD_D4_Direction as sbit
dim LCD_D5_Direction as sbit
dim LCD_D6_Direction as sbit
dim LCD_D7_Direction as sbit
' End Lcd module connections
dim txt1
txt2
txt3
txt4
i
as
as
as
as
as
char[17]
char[10]
char[9]
char[8]
byte
at
at
at
at
at
at
DDRD.B2
DDRD.B3
DDRD.B4
DDRD.B5
DDRD.B6
DDRD.B7
' Loop variable
sub procedure Move_Delay() ' Function used for text moving
Delay_ms(500)
' You can change the moving speed here
end sub
main:
txt1 = "mikroElektronika"
txt2 = "EasyAVR5A"
txt3 = "Lcd4bit"
txt4 = "example"
Lcd_Init()
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CLEAR)
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CURSOR_OFF)
LCD_Out(1,6,txt3)
LCD_Out(2,6,txt4)
Delay_ms(2000)
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CLEAR)
LCD_Out(1,1,txt1)
LCD_Out(2,4,txt2)
Delay_ms(500)
' Moving text
for i=0 to 3
' Initialize Lcd
' Clear display
' Cursor off
' Write text in first row
' Write text in second row
' Clear display
' Write text in first row
' Write text in second row
' Move text to the right 4 times
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
245
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_SHIFT_RIGHT)
Move_Delay()
next i
while TRUE
' Endless loop
for i=0 to 6
' Move text to the left 7 times
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_SHIFT_LEFT)
Move_Delay()
next i
for i=0 to 6
' Move text to the right 7 times
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_SHIFT_RIGHT)
Move_Delay()
next i
wend
end.
Lcd HW connection
246
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
MANCHESTER CODE LIBRARY
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR provides a library for handling Manchester coded signals. The Manchester code is a code in which data and clock signals are combined
to form a single self-synchronizing data stream; each encoded bit contains a transition at the midpoint of a bit period, the direction of transition determines whether the
bit is 0 or 1; the second half is the true bit value and the first half is the complement
of the true bit value (as shown in the figure below).
Notes: The Manchester receive routines are blocking calls (Man_Receive_Init and
Man_Synchro). This means that MCU will wait until the task has been performed
(e.g. byte is received, synchronization achieved, etc).
Note: Manchester code library implements time-based activities, so interrupts need
to be disabled when using it.
External dependencies of Manchester Code Library
The following variables
must be defined in all
projects using Manchester Code Library:
dim MANRXPIN as sbit
sfr external
dim MANTXPIN as sbit
sfr external
dim
MANRXPIN_Direction as
sbit sfr external
dim
MANTXPIN_Direction as
sbit sfr external
Description:
Receive line.
Transmit line.
Direction of the Receive
pin.
Direction of the Transmit
pin.
Example :
dim MANRXPIN as sbit
at PINB.B0
dim MANTXPIN as sbit
at PORTB.B1
dim
MANRXPIN_Direction as
sbit at DDRB.B0
dim
MANTXPIN_Direction as
sbit at DDRB.B1
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
247
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Routines
-
Man_Receive_Init
Man_Receive
Man_Send_Init
Man_Send
Man_Synchro
Man_Break
The following routines are for the internal use by compiler only:
- Manchester_0
- Manchester_1
- Manchester_Out
Man_Receive_Init
Prototype
Returns
sub function Man_Receive_Init()as word
- 0 - if initialization and synchronization were successful.
- 1 - upon unsuccessful synchronization.
The function configures Receiver pin and performs synchronization procedure in
order to retrieve baud rate out of the incoming signal.
Description
Note: In case of multiple persistent errors on reception, the user should call this
routine once again or Man_Synchro routine to enable synchronization.
Global variables :
Requires
- MANRXPIN : Receive line
- MANRXPIN_Direction : Direction of the receive pin
must be defined before using this function.
Example
248
' Initialize Receiver
dim MANRXPIN as sbit at PINB.B0
dim MANRXPIN_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B0
...
Man_Receive_Init()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Man_Receive
Prototype
sub function Man_Receive(dim byreferror as byte) as byte
Returns
A byte read from the incoming signal.
The function extracts one byte from incoming signal.
Description
Parameters :
- error: error flag. If signal format does not match the expected, the error flag
will be set to non-zero.
Requires
Example
To use this function, the user must prepare the MCU for receiving. See
Man_Receive_Init.
dim data, error as byte
...
data = 0
error = 0
data = Man_Receive(&error)
if (error <> 0) then
' error handling
end if
Man_Send_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Man_Send_Init()
Returns
Nothing.
Description The function configures Transmitter pin.
Global variables :
Requires
- MANRXPIN : Receive line
- MANRXPIN_Direction : Direction of the receive pin
must be defined before using this function.
Example
' Initialize Transmitter:
dim MANTXPIN as sbit at PINB.B1
dim MANTXPIN_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B1
...
Man_Send_Init()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
249
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Man_Send
Prototype
sub procedure Man_Send(tr_data as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sends one byte.
Parameters :
Description
- tr_data: data to be sent
Note: Baud rate used is 500 bps.
Requires
To use this function, the user must prepare the MCU for sending. See
Man_Send_Init.
Example
dim msg as byte
...
Man_Send(msg)
Man_Synchro
Prototype
sub function Man_Synchro() as word
Returns
- 0 - if synchronization was not successful.
- Half of the manchester bit length, given in multiples of 10us - upon successful
synchronization.
Description Measures half of the manchester bit length with 10us resolution.
250
Requires
To use this function, you must first prepare the MCU for receiving. See
Man_Receive_Init.
Example
dim man__half_bit_len as word
...
man__half_bit_len = Man_Synchro()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Man_Break
Prototype
sub procedure Man_Break()
Returns
Nothing.
Description
Man_Receive is blocking routine and it can block the program flow. Call this
routine from interrupt to unblock the program execution. This mechanism is similar to WDT.
Note: Interrupts should be disabled before using Manchester routines again
(see note at the top of this page).
Requires
Nothing.
dim data1, error, counter as byte
sub procedure Timer0Overflow_ISR org 0x12
counter = 0
if (counter >= 20) then
Man_Break()
counter = 0
' reset counter
else
Inc(counter)
' increment counter
end if
end sub
main:
TOIE0_bit
TCCR0_bit
Example
= 1
= 5
' Timer0 overflow interrupt enable
' Start timer with 1024 prescaler
SREG_I_bit = 0
' Interrupt disable
...
Man_Receive_Init()
...
' try Man_Receive with blocking prevention mechanism
SREG_I_bit = 1
data1 = Man_Receive(@error);
SREG_I_bit = 0
' Interrupt enable
' Interrupt disable
...
end.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
251
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Example
The following code is code for the Manchester receiver, it shows how to use the
Manchester Library for receiving data:
program Manchester_Receiver
' Lcd module connections
dim LCD_RS as sbit at PORTD.B2
LCD_EN as sbit at PORTD.B3
LCD_D4 as sbit at PORTD.B4
LCD_D5 as sbit at PORTD.B5
LCD_D6 as sbit at PORTD.B6
LCD_D7 as sbit at PORTD.B7
dim LCD_RS_Direction as sbit
LCD_EN_Direction as sbit
LCD_D4_Direction as sbit
LCD_D5_Direction as sbit
LCD_D6_Direction as sbit
LCD_D7_Direction as sbit
' End Lcd module connections
at
at
at
at
at
at
DDRD.B2
DDRD.B3
DDRD.B4
DDRD.B5
DDRD.B6
DDRD.B7
' Manchester module connections
dim MANRXPIN as sbit at PINB.B0
MANRXPIN_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B0
MANTXPIN as sbit at PORTB.B1
MANTXPIN_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B1
' End Manchester module connections
dim error_, ErrorCount, temp as byte
main:
ErrorCount = 0
Delay_10us()
Lcd_Init()
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CLEAR)
Man_Receive_Init()
' Initialize Lcd
' Clear Lcd display
' Initialize Receiver
while TRUE
' Endless loop
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_FIRST_ROW)
' Move cursor to the 1st row
while TRUE
' Wait for the "start" byte
temp = Man_Receive(error_)
' Attempt byte receive
if (temp = 0x0B) then ' "Start" byte, see Transmitter example
break
' We got the starting sequence
end if
if (error_ <> 0) then ' Exit so we do not loop forever
break
end if
wend
252
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
while (temp <> 0x0E)
temp = Man_Receive(error_)
' Attempt byte receive
if (error_ <> 0) then
' If error occured
Lcd_Chr_CP("?")
' Write question mark on Lcd
Inc(ErrorCount)
' Update error counter
if (ErrorCount > 20) then
' In case of multiple errors
temp = Man_Synchro()
' Try to synchronize again
'Man_Receive_Init()
' Alternative, try to Initialize
Receiver again
ErrorCount = 0
' Reset error counter
end if
else
' No error occured
if (temp <> 0x0E) then
' If "End" byte was received(see
Transmitter example)
Lcd_Chr_CP(temp) ' do not write received byte on Lcd
end if
Delay_ms(25)
end if
wend
wend
end.
' If "End" byte was received exit do loop
The following code is code for the Manchester transmitter, it shows how to use the
Manchester Library for transmitting data:
program Manchester_Transmitter
' Manchester module connections
dim MANRXPIN as sbit at PORTB.B0
MANRXPIN_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B0
MANTXPIN as sbit at PORTB.B1
MANTXPIN_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B1
' End Manchester module connections
dim index, character as byte
s1 as char[17]
main:
s1 = "mikroElektronika"
Man_Send_Init()
while TRUE
Man_Send(0x0B)
Delay_ms(100)
character = s1[0]
index = 0
' Initialize transmitter
' Endless loop
' Send "start" byte
' Wait for a while
' Take first char from string
' Initialize index variable
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
253
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
while (character <> 0)
Man_Send(character)
Delay_ms(90)
Inc(index)
character = s1[index]
wend
Man_Send(0x0E)
Delay_ms(1000)
' String ends with zero
' Send character
' Wait for a while
' Increment index variable
' Take next char from string
' Send "end" byte
wend
end.
Connection Example
Simple Transmitter connection
Simple Receiver connection
254
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
MULTI MEDIA CARD LIBRARY
The Multi Media Card (MMC) is a flash memory card standard. MMC cards are currently available in sizes up to and including 1 GB, and are used in cell phones, mp3
players, digital cameras, and PDA’s.
mikroBasic PRO for AVR provides a library for accessing data on Multi Media Card
via SPI communication.This library also supports SD(Secure Digital) memory cards.
Secure Digital Card
Secure Digital (SD) is a flash memory card standard, based on the older Multi Media
Card (MMC) format.
SD cards are currently available in sizes of up to and including 2 GB, and are used
in cell phones, mp3 players, digital cameras, and PDAs.
Notes:
- Routines for file handling can be used only with FAT16 file system.
- Library functions create and read files from the root directory only;
- Library functions populate both FAT1 and FAT2 tables when writing to files, but the
file data is being read from the FAT1 table only; i.e. there is no recovery if FAT1
table is corrupted.
- Prior to calling any of this library routines, Spi_Rd_Ptr needs to be initialized with
the appropriate SPI_Read routine.
External dependencies of MMC Library
The following variable
must be defined in all
projects using MMC
library:
Description:
Example :
dim Mmc_Chip_Select
dim Mmc_Chip_Select
Chip select pin.
as sbit sfr external
as sbit at PINB.B0
dim
dim
Mmc_Chip_Select_Direc Direction of the chip select Mmc_Chip_Select_Direc
tion as sbit sfr
tion as sbit at
pin.
external
DDRB.B0
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
255
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Routines
-
Mmc_Init
Mmc_Read_Sector
Mmc_Write_Sector
Mmc_Read_Cid
Mmc_Read_Csd
Routines for file handling:
-
256
Mmc_Fat_Init
Mmc_Fat_QuickFormat
Mmc_Fat_Assign
Mmc_Fat_Reset
Mmc_Fat_Read
Mmc_Fat_Rewrite
Mmc_Fat_Append
Mmc_Fat_Delete
Mmc_Fat_Write
Mmc_Fat_Set_File_Date
Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Date
Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Size
Mmc_Fat_Get_Swap_File
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Mmc_Init
Prototype
Returns
sub function Mmc_Init() as byte
- 0 - if MMC/SD card was detected and successfully initialized
- 1 - otherwise
Initializes MMC through hardware SPI interface.
Description
Parameters:
- port: chip select signal port address.
- cspin: chip select pin.
Global variables :
Requires
- Mmc_Chip_Select: Chip Select line
- Mmc_Chip_Select_Direction: Direction of the Chip Select pin
must be defined before using this function.
The appropriate hardware SPI module must be previously initialized. See the
SPI1_Init, SPI1_Init_Advanced routines.
' MMC module connections
dim Mmc_Chip_Select as sbit sfr at PORTB.B2
dim Mmc_Chip_Select_Direction as sbit sfr at DDRB.B2
' MMC module connections
Example
error = Mmc_Init() ' Init with CS line at PORTB.B2
dim i as byte
...
SPI1_Init_Advanced(_SPI_MASTER, _SPI_FCY_DIV2, _SPI_CLK_LO_LEADING)
Spi_Rd_Ptr = @SPI1_Read
// Pass pointer to SPI Read function
of used SPI module
i = Mmc_Init()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
257
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Mmc_Read_Sector
Prototype
Returns
sub function Mmc_Read_Sector(dim sector as longint, dim byref
data as byte[512]) as byte
- 0 - if reading was successful
- 1 - if an error occurred
The function reads one sector (512 bytes) from MMC card.
Description
Parameters:
- sector: MMC/SD card sector to be read.
- dbuff: buffer of minimum 512 bytes in length for data storage.
Requires
MMC/SD card must be initialized. See Mmc_Init.
' read sector 510 of the MMC/SD card
dim error as word
sectorNo as longword
dataBuffer as char[512]
...
Example
258
main:
...
sectorNo = 510
error = Mmc_Read_Sector(sectorNo, dataBuffer)
...
end.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Mmc_Write_Sector
Prototype
Returns
sub function Mmc_Write_Sector(dim sector as longint, dim byref
data_ as byte[512]) as byte
- 0 - if writing was successful
- 1 - if there was an error in sending write command
- 2 - if there was an error in writing (data rejected)
The function writes 512 bytes of data to one MMC card sector.
Description
Parameters:
- sector: MMC/SD card sector to be written to.
- dbuff: data to be written (buffer of minimum 512 bytes in length).
Requires
MMC/SD card must be initialized. See Mmc_Init.
' write to sector 510 of the MMC/SD card
dim error as word
sectorNo as longword
dataBuffer as char[512]
...
Example
main:
...
sectorNo = 510
error = Mmc_Write_Sector(sectorNo, dataBuffer)
...
end.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
259
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Mmc_Read_Cid
Prototype
sub function Mmc_Read_Cid(dim byref data_cid as byte[16]) as byte
- 0 - if CID register was read successfully
- 1 - if there was an error while reading
Returns
The function reads 16-byte CID register.
Description Parameters:
- data_cid: buffer of minimum 16 bytes in length for storing CID register content.
Requires
MMC/SD card must be initialized. See Mmc_Init.
Example
dim error as word
dataBuffer as byte[16]
...
main:
...
error = Mmc_Read_Cid(dataBuffer)
...
end.
Mmc_Read_Csd
Prototype
Returns
sub function Mmc_Read_Csd(dim byref data_for_registers as
byte[16]) as byte
- 0 - if CSD register was read successfully
- 1 - if there was an error while reading
The function reads 16-byte CSD register.
Description Parameters:
- data_csd: buffer of minimum 16 bytes in length for storing CSD register content.
260
Requires
MMC/SD card must be initialized. See Mmc_Init.
Example
dim error as word
dataBuffer as char[16]
...
main:
...
error = Mmc_Read_Csd(dataBuffer)
...
end.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Mmc_Fat_Init
Prototype
Returns
Description
sub function Mmc_Fat_Init() as byte
- 0 - if MMC/SD card was detected and successfully initialized
- 1 - if FAT16 boot sector was not found
- 255 - if MMC/SD card was not detected
Initializes MMC/SD card, reads MMC/SD FAT16 boot sector and extracts necessary data needed by the library.
Note: MMC/SD card has to be formatted to FAT16 file system.
- Mmc_Chip_Select: Chip Select line
- Mmc_Chip_Select_Direction: Direction of the Chip Select pin
Requires
must be defined before using this function.
The appropriate hardware SPI module must be previously initialized. See the
SPI1_Init, SPI1_Init_Advanced routines.
' init the FAT library
Example
if (Mmc_Fat_Init() = 0) then
...
end if
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
261
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Mmc_Fat_QuickFormat
Prototype
Returns
sub function Mmc_Fat_QuickFormat(dim mmc_fat_label as string[11])
as byte
- 0 - if MMC/SD card was detected, successfully formated and initialized
- 1 - if FAT16 format was unseccessful
- 255 - if MMC/SD card was not detected
Formats to FAT16 and initializes MMC/SD card.
Parameters:
Description
- mmc_fat_label: volume label (11 characters in length). If less than 11
characters are provided, the label will be padded with spaces. If null string is
passed volume will not be labeled
Note: This routine can be used instead or in conjunction with Mmc_Fat_Init routine.
Note: If MMC/SD card already contains a valid boot sector, it will remain
unchanged (except volume label field) and only FAT and ROOT tables will be
erased. Also, the new volume label will be set.
262
Requires
The appropriate hardware SPI module must be previously initialized.
Example
' format and initialize the FAT library
if (Mmc_Fat_QuickFormat('mikroE') = 0) then
...
end if
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Mmc_Fat_Assign
Prototype
sub function Mmc_Fat_Assign(dim byref filename as char[12], dim
file_cre_attr as byte) d
- 1 - if file already exists or file does not exist but a new file is created.
- 0 - if file does not exist and no new file is created.
Returns
Assigns file for file operations (read, write, delete...). All subsequent file operations will be applied on an assigned file.
Parameters:
- filename: name of the file that should be assigned for file operations. File
name should be in DOS 8.3 (file_name.extension) format. The file name and
extension will be automatically padded with spaces by the library if they have
less than length required (i.e. "mikro.tx" -> "mikro .tx "), so the user does no
have to take care of that. The file name and extension are case insensitive.
The library will convert them to proper case automatically, so the user does not
have to take care of that.
Also, in order to keep backward compatibility with the first version of this
library, file names can be entered as UPPERCASE string of 11 bytes in length
with no dot character between file name and extension (i.e. "MIKROELETXT" > MIKROELE.TXT). In this case last 3 characters of the string are considered
to be file extension.
Description - file_cre_attr: file creation and attributs flags. Each bit corresponds to the
appropriate file attribut:
Bit
Mask
Description
0
0x01
Read Only
1
0x02
Hidden
2
0x04
System
3
0x08
Volume Label
4
0x10
Subdirectory
5
0x20
Archive
6
0x40
Device (internal use only, never found on disk)
7
0x80
File creation flag. If the file does not exist and this flag is set,
a new file with specified name will be created.
Note: Long File Names (LFN) are not supported.
Requires
MMC/SD card and MMC library must be initialized for file operations. See
Mmc_Fat_Init.
Example
' create file with archive attribut if it does not already exist
Mmc_Fat_Assign("MIKRO007.TXT",0xA0)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
263
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Mmc_Fat_Reset
Prototype
sub procedure Mmc_Fat_Reset(dim byref size as longword)
Returns
Nothing.
Opens currently assigned file for reading.
Description
Parameters:
- size: buffer to store file size to. After file has been open for reading its size is
returned through this parameter.
Requires
MMC/SD card and MMC library must be initialized for file operations. See
Mmc_Fat_Init.
The file must be previously assigned. See Mmc_Fat_Assign.
Example
264
dim size as longword
...
main:
...
Mmc_Fat_Reset(size)
...
end.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Mmc_Fat_Read
Prototype
sub procedure Mmc_Fat_Read(dim byref bdata as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Reads a byte from the currently assigned file opened for reading. Upon function
execution file pointers will be set to the next character in the file.
Description Parameters:
- bdata: buffer to store read byte to. Upon this function execution read byte is
returned through this parameter.
MMC/SD card and MMC library must be initialized for file operations. See
Mmc_Fat_Init.
Requires
The file must be previously assigned. See Mmc_Fat_Assign.
The file must be opened for reading. See Mmc_Fat_Reset.
Example
dim character as byte
...
main:
...
Mmc_Fat_Read(character)
...
end.
Mmc_Fat_Rewrite
Prototype
sub procedure Mmc_Fat_Rewrite()
Returns
Nothing.
Description
Opens the currently assigned file for writing. If the file is not empty its content
will be erased.
Requires
MMC/SD card and MMC library must be initialized for file operations. See
Mmc_Fat_Init.
The file must be previously assigned. See Mmc_Fat_Assign.
Example
' open file for writing
Mmc_Fat_Rewrite()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
265
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Mmc_Fat_Append
Prototype
sub procedure Mmc_Fat_Append()
Returns
Nothing.
Opens the currently assigned file for appending. Upon this function execution
Description file pointers will be positioned after the last byte in the file, so any subsequent
file write operation will start from there.
Requires
MMC/SD card and MMC library must be initialized for file operations. See
Mmc_Fat_Init.
The file must be previously assigned. See Mmc_Fat_Assign.
Example
' open file for appending
Mmc_Fat_Append()
Mmc_Fat_Delete
Prototype
sub procedure Mmc_Fat_Delete()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Deletes currently assigned file from MMC/SD card.
Requires
MMC/SD card and MMC library must be initialized for file operations. See
Mmc_Fat_Init.
The file must be previously assigned. See Mmc_Fat_Assign.
Example
266
' delete current file
Mmc_Fat_Delete()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Mmc_Fat_Write
Prototype
sub procedure Mmc_Fat_Write(dim byref fdata as byte[512], dim
data_len as word)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes requested number of bytes to the currently assigned file opened for writing.
Description
Parameters:
- fdata: data to be written.
- data_len: number of bytes to be written.
MMC/SD card and MMC library must be initialized for file operations. See
Mmc_Fat_Init.
Requires
The file must be previously assigned. See Mmc_Fat_Assign.
The file must be opened for writing. See Mmc_Fat_Rewrite or
Mmc_Fat_Append.
Example
dim file_contents as char[42]
...
main:
...
Mmc_Fat_Write(file_contents, 42) ' write data to the assigned
file
...
end.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
267
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Mmc_Fat_Set_File_Date
Prototype
sub procedure Mmc_Fat_Set_File_Date(dim year as word, dim month,
day, hours, mins, seconds as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sets the date/time stamp. Any subsequent file write operation will write this
stamp to the currently assigned file's time/date attributs.
Parameters:
Description -
year: year attribute. Valid values: 1980-2107
month: month attribute. Valid values: 1-12
day: day attribute. Valid values: 1-31
hours: hours attribute. Valid values: 0-23
mins: minutes attribute. Valid values: 0-59
seconds: seconds attribute. Valid values: 0-59
MMC/SD card and MMC library must be initialized for file operations. See
Mmc_Fat_Init.
Requires
The file must be previously assigned. See Mmc_Fat_Assign.
The file must be opened for writing. See Mmc_Fat_Rewrite or
Mmc_Fat_Append.
Example
268
Mmc_Fat_Set_File_Date(2005,9,30,17,41,0)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Date
Prototype
sub procedure Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Date(dim byref year as word, dim
byref month, day, hours, mins as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Reads time/date attributes of the currently assigned file.
Parameters:
- year: buffer to store year attribute to. Upon function execution year attribute is
returned through this parameter.
- month: buffer to store month attribute to. Upon function execution month
Description
attribute is returned through this parameter.
- day: buffer to store day attribute to. Upon function execution day attribute is
returned through this parameter.
- hours: buffer to store hours attribute to. Upon function execution hours
attribute is returned through this parameter.
- mins: buffer to store minutes attribute to. Upon function execution minutes
attribute is returned through this parameter.
Requires
MMC/SD card and MMC library must be initialized for file operations. See
Mmc_Fat_Init.
The file must be previously assigned. See Mmc_Fat_Assign.
Example
dim year as word
month, day, hours, mins as byte
...
main:
...
Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Date(year, month, day, hours, mins)
...
end.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
269
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Size
Prototype
sub function Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Size() as longword
Returns
Size of the currently assigned file in bytes.
Description This function reads size of the currently assigned file in bytes.
Requires
MMC/SD card and MMC library must be initialized for file operations. See
Mmc_Fat_Init.
The file must be previously assigned. See Mmc_Fat_Assign.
Example
270
dim my_file_size as longword
...
main:
...
my_file_size = Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Size
...
end.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Mmc_Fat_Get_Swap_File
Prototype
Returns
sub function Mmc_Fat_Get_Swap_File(dim sectors_cnt as longint,
dim byref filename as string[11], dim file_attr as byte) as dword
- Number of the start sector for the newly created swap file, if there was
enough free space on the MMC/SD card to create file of required size.
- 0 - otherwise.
This function is used to create a swap file of predefined name and size on the
MMC/SD media. If a file with specified name already exists on the media,
search for consecutive sectors will ignore sectors occupied by this file. Therefore, it is recommended to erase such file if it already exists before calling this
function. If it is not erased and there is still enough space for a new swap file,
this function will delete it after allocating new memory space for a new swap file.
The purpose of the swap file is to make reading and writing to MMC/SD media
as fast as possible, by using the Mmc_Read_Sector() and Mmc_Write_Sector()
functions directly, without potentially damaging the FAT system. The swap file
can be considered as a "window" on the media where the user can freely
write/read data. It's main purpose in the mikroBasic PRO for AVR's library is to
be used for fast data acquisition; when the time-critical acquisition has finished,
the data can be re-written into a "normal" file, and formatted in the most suitable
way.
Parameters:
Description
- sectors_cnt: number of consecutive sectors that user wants the swap file to
have.
- filename: name of the file that should be assigned for file operations. File
name should be in DOS 8.3 (file_name.extension) format. The file name and
extension will be automatically padded with spaces by the library if they have
less than length required (i.e. "mikro.tx" -> "mikro .tx "), so the user does no
have to take care of that. The file name and extension are case insensitive.
The library will convert them to proper case automatically, so the user does not
have to take care of that.
Also, in order to keep backward compatibility with the first version of this
library, file names can be entered as UPPERCASE string of 11 bytes in length
with no dot character between file name and extension (i.e. "MIKROELETXT" > MIKROELE.TXT). In this case last 3 characters of the string are considered
to be file extension.
- file_attr: file creation and attributs flags. Each bit corresponds to the
appropriate file attribut:
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
271
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Description
Bit
Mask
Description
0
0x01
Read Only
1
0x02
Hidden
2
0x04
System
3
0x08
Volume Label
4
0x10
Subdirectory
5
0x20
Archive
6
0x40
Device (internal use only, never found on disk)
7
0x80
Not used
Note: Long File Names (LFN) are not supported.
272
Requires
MMC/SD card and MMC library must be initialized for file operations. See
Mmc_Fat_Init.
Example
'-------------- Try to create a swap file with archive atribute,
whose size will be at least 1000 sectors.
'
If it succeeds, it sends No. of start sector
over UART
dim size as longword
...
main:
...
size = Mmc_Fat_Get_Swap_File(1000, "mikroE.txt", 0x20)
if size then
UART1_Write(0xAA)
UART1_Write(Lo(size))
UART1_Write(Hi(size))
UART1_Write(Higher(size))
UART1_Write(Highest(size))
UART1_Write(0xAA
end if
...
end.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Example
The following example demonstrates MMC library test. Upon flashing, insert a
MMC/SD card into the module, when you should receive the "Init-OK" message.
Then, you can experiment with MMC read and write functions, and observe the
results through the Usart Terminal.
' if defined, we have a debug messages on PC terminal
program MMC_Test
{$DEFINE RS232_debug}
dim MMC_chip_select as sbit at PORTB.B2
dim MMC_chip_select_direction as sbit at DDRB.B2
' universal variables
dim k, i as word ' universal for loops and other stuff
' Variables for MMC routines
dData as byte[512] ' Buffer for MMC sector reading/writing
data_for_registers as byte[16] ' buffer for CID and CSD registers
' Display byte in hex
sub procedure printhex(dim i as byte)
dim bHi, bLo as byte
bHi = i and 0xF0
' High nibble
bHi = bHi >> 4
bHi = bHi + "0"
if (bHi>"9") then
bHi = bHi + 7
end if
bLo = (i and 0x0F) + "0"
' Low nibble
if (bLo>"9") then
bLo = bLo+7
end if
UART1_Write(bHi)
UART1_Write(bLo)
end sub
main:
DDRC = 255
PORTC = 0
{$IFDEF RS232_debug}
UART1_Init(19200)
{$ENDIF}
Delay_ms(10)
DDRA = 255
PORTA = 1
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
273
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
{$IFDEF RS232_debug}
UART1_Write_Text("AVR-Started") ' If AVR present report
UART1_Write(13)
UART1_Write(10)
{$ENDIF}
' Beffore all, we must initialise a MMC card
SPI1_Init_Advanced(_SPI_MASTER, _SPI_FCY_DIV2, _SPI_CLK_LO_LEADING)
Spi_Rd_Ptr = @SPI1_Read
i = Mmc_Init()
PORTC = i
{$IFDEF RS232_debug}
if(i = 0) then
UART1_Write_Text("MMC Init-OK") ' If MMC present report
UART1_Write(13)
UART1_Write(10)
end if
if(i) then
UART1_Write_Text("MMC Init-error") ' If error report
UART1_Write(13)
UART1_Write(10)
end if
{$ENDIF}
for i=0 to 511
dData[i] = "E" ' Fill MMC buffer with same characters
next i
i = Mmc_Write_Sector(55, dData)
{$IFDEF RS232_debug}
if(i = 0) then
UART1_Write_Text("Write-OK")
else ' if there are errors.....
UART1_Write_Text("Write-Error")
end if
UART1_Write(13)
UART1_Write(10)
{$ENDIF}
' Reading of CID and CSD register on MMC card.....
{$IFDEF RS232_debug}
i = Mmc_Read_Cid(data_for_registers)
if (i = 0) then
for k=0 to 15
printhex(data_for_registers[k])
if(k <> 15) then
UART1_Write("-")
274
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
end if
next k
UART1_Write(13)
else
UART1_Write_Text("CID-error")
end if
i = Mmc_Read_Csd(data_for_registers)
if(i = 0) then
for k=0 to 15
printhex(data_for_registers[k])
if(k <> 15) then
UART1_Write("-")
end if
next K
UART1_Write(13)
UART1_Write(10)
else
UART1_Write_Text("CSD-error")
end if
{$ENDIF}
end.
Following example consists of several blocks that demonstrate various aspects of
usage of the Mmc_Fat16 library. These are:
-
Creation
Opening
Opening
Opening
Creating
of new file and writing down to it.
existing file and re-writing it (writing from start-of-file).
existing file and appending data to it (writing from end-of-file).
a file and reading data from it (sending it to USART terminal).
and modifying several files at once.
Program MMC_FAT_Test
dim
Mmc_Chip_Select as sbit at PORTG.B1
Mmc_Chip_Select_Direction as sbit at DDRG.B1
dim
FAT_TXT as string[20]
file_contents as string[50]
filename as string[14] ' File names
character as byte
loop_, loop2 as byte
size as longint
buffer as byte[512]
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
275
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
'-------------- Writes string to USART
sub procedure Write_Str(dim byref ostr as byte[2])
dim
i as byte
i = 0
while ostr[i] <> 0
UART1_Write (ostr[i])
Inc(i)
wend
UART1_Write($0A)
end sub'~
'-------------- Creates new file
sub procedure Create_New_File
filename[7] = "A"
tests
Mmc_Fat_Assign(filename, 0xA0)
ate file
Mmc_Fat_Rewrite
new data
for loop_ = 1 to 99
card
UART1_Write(".")
file_contents[0] = loop_ div
file_contents[1] = loop_ mod
Mmc_Fat_Write(file_contents,
file
next loop_
end sub'~
and writes some data to it
' Set filename for single-file
' Will not find file and then cre' To clear file and start with
'
We want 5 files on the MMC
10 + 48
10 + 48
42)
' write data to the assigned
'-------------- Creates many new files and writes data to them
sub procedure Create_Multiple_Files
for loop2 = "B" to "Z"
UART1_Write(loop2)
' this line can slow down
the performance
filename[7] = loop2
' set filename
Mmc_Fat_Assign(filename, 0xA0)
' find existing file or create a new one
Mmc_Fat_Rewrite
' To clear file and start
with new data
for loop_ = 1 to 44
file_contents[0] = byte(loop_ div 10 + 48)
file_contents[1] = byte(loop_ mod 10 + 48)
Mmc_Fat_Write(file_contents, 42) ' write data to the assigned
file
next loop_
next loop2
end sub'~
276
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
'-------------- Opens an existing file and rewrites it
sub procedure Open_File_Rewrite
filename[7] = "C"
' Set filename for single-file tests
Mmc_Fat_Assign(filename, 0)
Mmc_Fat_Rewrite
for loop_ = 1 to 55
file_contents[0] = byte(loop_ div 10 + 48)
file_contents[1] = byte(loop_ mod 10 + 48)
Mmc_Fat_Write(file_contents, 42) ' write data to the assigned
file
next loop_
end sub'~
'-------------- Opens an existing file and appends data to it
'
(and alters the date/time stamp)
sub procedure Open_File_Append
filename[7] = "B"
Mmc_Fat_Assign(filename, 0)
Mmc_Fat_Set_File_Date(2005,6,21,10,35,0)
Mmc_Fat_Append()
' Prepare file for append
file_contents = " for mikroElektronika 2007"
' Prepare file
for append
file_contents[26] = 10
' LF
Mmc_Fat_Write(file_contents, 27) ' Write data to assigned file
end sub'~
'-------------- Opens an existing file, reads data from it and puts
it to USART
sub procedure Open_File_Read
filename[7] = "B"
Mmc_Fat_Assign(filename, 0)
Mmc_Fat_Reset(size)
dure returns size of file
while size > 0
Mmc_Fat_Read(character)
UART1_Write(character)
Dec(size)
wend
end sub'~
' To read file, sub proce-
' Write data to USART
'-------------- Deletes a file. If file doesn"t exist, it will first
be created
'
and then deleted.
sub procedure Delete_File
filename[7] = "F"
Mmc_Fat_Assign(filename, 0)
Mmc_Fat_Delete
end sub'~
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
277
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
'-------------- Tests whether file exists, and if so sends its creation date
'
and file size via USART
sub procedure Test_File_Exist
dim
fsize as longint
year as word
month_, day, hour_, minute_ as byte
outstr as byte[12]
filename[7] = "B"
if Mmc_Fat_Assign(filename, 0) <> 0 then
'--- file has been found - get its date
Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Date(year,month_,day,hour_,minute_)
WordToStr(year, outstr)
Write_Str(outstr)
ByteToStr(month_, outstr)
Write_Str(outstr)
WordToStr(day, outstr)
Write_Str(outstr)
WordToStr(hour_, outstr)
Write_Str(outstr)
WordToStr(minute_, outstr)
Write_Str(outstr)
'--- get file size
fsize = Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Size
LongIntToStr(fsize, outstr)
Write_Str(outstr)
else
'--- file was not found - signal it
UART1_Write(0x55)
Delay_ms(1000)
UART1_Write(0x55)
end if
end sub'~
'-------------- Tries to create a swap file, whose size will be at
least 100
'
sectors (see Help for details)
sub procedure M_Create_Swap_File()
dim i as word
for i=0 to 511
Buffer[i] = i
next i
size = Mmc_Fat_Get_Swap_File(5000, "mikroE.txt", 0x20)
on this sub function for details
278
' see help
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
if (size <> 0) then
LongIntToStr(size, fat_txt)
UART1_Write_Text(fat_txt)
for i=0 to 4999
Mmc_Write_Sector(size, Buffer)
size = size + 1
UART1_Write(".")
next i
end if
end sub
'-------------- Main. Uncomment the sub function(s) to test the
desired operation(s)
main:
FAT_TXT = "FAT16 not found"
file_contents = "XX MMC/SD FAT16 library by Anton Rieckert#"
file_contents[41] = 10
' newline
filename = "MIKRO00xTXT"
' we will use PORTC to signal test end
DDRC = 0xFF
PORTC = 0
UART1_Init(19200)
'delay_ms(100)
' Set up USART for file reading
UART1_Write_Text("Start")
'--- Init the FAT library
SPI1_Init_Advanced(_SPI_MASTER, _SPI_FCY_DIV128, _SPI_CLK_LO_LEADING)
Spi_Rd_Ptr = @SPI1_Read
' use fat16 quick format instead of init routine if a formatting
is needed
if Mmc_Fat_Init() = 0 then
PORTC = 0xF0
' reinitialize spi at higher speed
SPI1_Init_Advanced(_SPI_MASTER, _SPI_FCY_DIV2, _SPI_CLK_LO_LEADING)
'--- signal start-of-test
'--- test sub functions
Create_New_File
Create_Multiple_Files
Open_File_Rewrite
Open_File_Append
Open_File_Read
Delete_File
Test_File_Exist
M_Create_Swap_File()
UART1_Write("e")
else
UART1_Write_Text(FAT_TXT)
end if
'--- signal end-of-test
PORTC = $0F
UART1_Write_Text("End")
end.'~!
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
279
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
HW Connection
Pin diagram of MMC memory card
280
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
ONEWIRE LIBRARY
The OneWire library provides routines for communication via the Dallas OneWire
protocol, e.g. with DS18x20 digital thermometer. OneWire is a Master/Slave protocol, and all communication cabling required is a single wire. OneWire enabled
devices should have open collector drivers (with single pull-up resistor) on the
shared data line.
Slave devices on the OneWire bus can even get their power supply from data line.
For detailed schematic see device datasheet.
Some basic characteristics of this protocol are:
-
single master system,
low cost,
low transfer rates (up to 16 kbps),
fairly long distances (up to 300 meters),
small data transfer packages.
Each OneWire device has also a unique 64-bit registration number (8-bit device
type, 48-bit serial number and 8-bit CRC), so multiple slaves can co-exist on the
same bus.
Note: Oscillator frequency Fosc needs to be at least 8MHz in order to use the routines with Dallas digital thermometers.
External dependencies of OneWire Library
This variable must be
defined in any project
that is using OneWire
Library:
dim OW_Bit_Read as
sbit sfr external
dim OW_Bit_Write as
sbit sfr external
dim OW_Bit_Direction
as sbit sfr external
Description:
Example :
dim OW_Bit_Read as
sbit at PINB.B2
dim OW_Bit_Write as
OneWire write line.
sbit at PORTB.B2
dim OW_Bit_Direction
Direction of the OneWire pin. as sbit at DDRB.B2
OneWire read line.
Library Routines
- Ow_Reset
- Ow_Read
- Ow_Write
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
281
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Ow_Reset
Prototype
sub function Ow_Reset() as word
- 0 if the device is present
- 1 if the device is not present
Returns
Issues OneWire reset signal for DS18x20.
Description Parameters :
- None.
Devices compliant with the Dallas OneWire protocol.
Global variables :
Requires
- OW_Bit_Read: OneWire read line
- OW_Bit_Write: OneWire write line.
- OW_Bit_Direction: Direction of the OneWire pin
must be defined before using this function.
Example
' OneWire pinout
dim OW_Bit_Read as sbit at PINB.B2
dim OW_Bit_Write as sbit at PORTB.B2
dim OW_Bit_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B2
' end of OneWire pinout
' Issue Reset signal on One-Wire Bus
Ow_Reset()
282
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Ow_Read
Prototype
sub function Ow_Read() as byte
Returns
Data read from an external device over the OneWire bus.
Description Reads one byte of data via the OneWire bus.
Devices compliant with the Dallas OneWire protocol.
Global variables :
Requires
- OW_Bit_Read: OneWire read line
- OW_Bit_Write: OneWire write line.
- OW_Bit_Direction: Direction of the OneWire pin
must be defined before using this function.
Example
// OneWire pinout
dim OW_Bit_Read as sbit at PINB.B2
dim OW_Bit_Write as sbit at PORTB.B2
dim OW_Bit_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B2
// end of OneWire pinout
' Read a byte from the One-Wire Bus
dim read_data as byte
...
read_data = Ow_Read()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
283
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Ow_Write
Prototype
sub procedure Ow_Write(dim par as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes one byte of data via the OneWire bus.
Description Parameters :
- par: data to be written
Devices compliant with the Dallas OneWire protocol.
Global variables :
Requires
- OW_Bit_Read: OneWire read line
- OW_Bit_Write: OneWire write line.
- OW_Bit_Direction: Direction of the OneWire pin
must be defined before using this function.
Example
// OneWire pinout
dim OW_Bit_Read as sbit at PINB.B2
dim OW_Bit_Write as sbit at PORTB.B2
dim OW_Bit_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B2
// end of OneWire pinout
' Send a byte to the One-Wire Bus
Ow_Write(0xCC)
284
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Example
This example reads the temperature using DS18x20 connected to pin PORTB.2.
After reset, MCU obtains temperature from the sensor and prints it on the Lcd. Make
sure to pull-up PORTB.2 line and to turn off the PORTB leds.
program OneWire
' Lcd module connections
dim LCD_RS as sbit at PORTD.B2
LCD_EN as sbit at PORTD.B3
LCD_D4 as sbit at PORTD.B4
LCD_D5 as sbit at PORTD.B5
LCD_D6 as sbit at PORTD.B6
LCD_D7 as sbit at PORTD.B7
LCD_RS_Direction as sbit at
LCD_EN_Direction as sbit at
LCD_D4_Direction as sbit at
LCD_D5_Direction as sbit at
LCD_D6_Direction as sbit at
LCD_D7_Direction as sbit at
' End Lcd module connections
DDRD.B2
DDRD.B3
DDRD.B4
DDRD.B5
DDRD.B6
DDRD.B7
' OneWire pinout
dim OW_Bit_Write as sbit at PORTB.B2
OW_Bit_Read as sbit at PINB.B2
OW_Bit_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B2
' end OneWire definition
'
Set TEMP_RESOLUTION to the corresponding resolution
DS18x20 sensor:
' 18S20: 9 (default setting can be 9,10,11,or 12)
' 18B20: 12
const TEMP_RESOLUTION as byte = 12
of
used
dim text as byte[9]
temp as word
sub procedure Display_Temperature( dim temp2write as word )
const RES_SHIFT = TEMP_RESOLUTION - 8
dim temp_whole as byte
temp_fraction as word
text = "000.0000"
' check if temperature is negative
if (temp2write and 0x8000) then
text[0] = "-"
temp2write = not temp2write + 1
end if
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
285
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
' extract temp_whole
temp_whole = word(temp2write >> RES_SHIFT)
' convert temp_whole to characters
if ( temp_whole div 100 ) then
text[0] = temp_whole div 100 + 48
else
text[0] = "0"
end if
text[1] = (temp_whole div 10)mod 10 + 48 ' Extract tens digit
text[2] = temp_whole mod 10
+ 48 ' Extract ones digit
' extract temp_fraction and convert it to unsigned int
temp_fraction = word(temp2write << (4-RES_SHIFT))
temp_fraction = temp_fraction and 0x000F
temp_fraction = temp_fraction * 625
' convert temp_fraction to characters
text[4] = word(temp_fraction div 1000)
+ 48
thousands digit
text[5] = word((temp_fraction div 100)mod 10 + 48)
Extract hundreds digit
text[6] = word((temp_fraction div 10)mod 10 + 48)
Extract tens digit
text[7] = word(temp_fraction mod 10)
+ 48
ones digit
' Extract
'
'
' Extract
' print temperature on Lcd
Lcd_Out(2, 5, text)
end sub
main:
text = "000.0000"
UART1_Init(9600)
Lcd_Init()
' Initialize Lcd
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CLEAR)
' Clear Lcd
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CURSOR_OFF)
' Turn cursor off
Lcd_Out(1, 1, " Temperature:
")
' Print degree character, "C" for Centigrades
Lcd_Chr(2,13,178)
' different Lcd displays have different char
code for degree
' if you see greek alpha letter try typing
178 instead of 223
Lcd_Chr(2,14,"C")
'--- main loop
while TRUE
286
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
'--- perform temperature
Ow_Reset()
Ow_Write(0xCC)
Ow_Write(0x44)
Delay_us(120)
Ow_Reset()
Ow_Write(0xCC)
Ow_Write(0xBE)
reading
' Onewire reset signal
' Issue command SKIP_ROM
' Issue command CONVERT_T
' Issue command SKIP_ROM
' Issue command READ_SCRATCHPAD
temp = Ow_Read()
temp = (Ow_Read() << 8) + temp
'--- Format and display result on Lcd
Display_Temperature(temp)
Delay_ms(520)
wend
end.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
287
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
HW Connection
Example of DS1820 connection
288
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
PORT EXPANDER LIBRARY
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR provides a library for communication with the
Microchip’s Port Expander MCP23S17 via SPI interface. Connections of the AVR
compliant MCU and MCP23S17 is given on the schematic at the bottom of this
page.
Note: Library uses the SPI module for communication. The user must initialize SPI
module before using the Port Expander Library.
Note: Prior to calling any of this library routines, Spi_Rd_Ptr needs to be initialized
with the appropriate SPI_Read routine.
Note: Library does not use Port Expander interrupts.
External dependencies of Port Expander Library
The following variables
must be defined in all
projects using Port
Expander Library:
Description:
Example :
dim SPExpanderRST as
Reset line.
sbit sfr external
dim SPExpanderRST as
Chip Select line.
sbit at PORTB.B0
dim
SPExpanderRST_Directi
Direction of the Reset pin.
on as sbit sfr
external
dim SPExpanderRST as
sbit at PORTB.B0
dim SPExpanderCS as
sbit at PORTB.B1
dim
Direction of the Chip
SPExpanderCS_Direction
Select pin.
as sbit sfr external
dim
SPExpanderCS_Directio
ns as sbit at DDRB.B1
dim
SPExpanderRST_Directi
on as sbit at DDRB.B0
Library Routines
-
Expander_Init
Expander_Read_Byte
Expander_Write_Byte
Expander_Read_PortA
Expander_Read_PortB
Expander_Read_PortAB
Expander_Write_PortA
Expander_Write_PortB
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
289
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
-
Expander_Write_PortAB
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA
Expander_Set_DirectionPortB
Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortA
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortB
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortAB
Expander_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Expander_Init(dim ModuleAddress as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Initializes Port Expander using SPI communication.
Port Expander module settings :
Description -
hardware addressing enabled
automatic address pointer incrementing disabled (byte mode)
BANK_0 register adressing
slew rate enabled
Parameters :
- ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the bottom of this page
Global variables :
Requires
-
SPExpanderCS: Chip Select line
SPExpanderRST: Reset line
SPExpanderCS_Direction: Direction of the Chip Select pin
SPExpanderRST_Direction: Direction of the Reset pin
must be defined before using this function.
SPI module needs to be initialized. See SPI1_Init and SPI1_Init_Advanced routines.
' port expander pinout definition
dim SPExpanderCS as sbit at PORTB.B1
SPExpanderRST as sbit at PORTB.B0
SPExpanderCS_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B1
SPExpanderRST_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B0
Example
...
SPI1_Init()
Spi_Rd_Ptr = @SPI1_Read
of used SPI module
Expander_Init(0)
290
' initialize SPI module
' Pass pointer to SPI Read function
' initialize port expander
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Expander_Read_Byte
Prototype
sub function Expander_Read_Byte(dim ModuleAddress as byte, dim
RegAddress as byte) as byte
Returns
Byte read.
The function reads byte from Port Expander.
Parameters :
Description
- ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
- RegAddress: Port Expander's internal register address
Requires
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Example
' Read a byte from Port Expander's register
dim read_data as byte
...
read_data = Expander_Read_Byte(0,1)
Expander_Write_Byte
Prototype
sub procedure Expander_Write_Byte(dim ModuleAddress as byte, dim
RegAddress as byte, dim Data_ as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Routine writes a byte to Port Expander.
Parameters :
Description
- ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
- RegAddress: Port Expander's internal register address
- Data_: data to be written
Requires
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Example
' Write a byte to the Port Expander's register
Expander_Write_Byte(0,1,0xFF)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
291
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Expander_Read_PortA
Prototype
sub function Expander_Read_PortA(dim ModuleAddress as byte) as byte
Returns
Byte read.
The function reads byte from Port Expander's PortA.
Description
Parameters :
- ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Requires
Example
Port Expander's PortA should be configured as input. See Expander_Set_DirectionPortA and Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB routines.
' Read a byte from Port Expander's PORTA
dim read_data as byte
...
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA(0,0xFF)
to be input
...
read_data = Expander_Read_PortA(0)
' set expander's porta
Expander_Read_PortB
Prototype
sub function Expander_Read_PortB(dim ModuleAddress as byte) as byte
Returns
Byte read.
The function reads byte from Port Expander's PortB.
Description
Parameters :
- ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Requires
Example
292
Port Expander's PortB should be configured as input. See Expander_Set_DirectionPortB and Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB routines.
' Read a byte from Port Expander's PORTB
dim read_data as byte
...
Expander_Set_DirectionPortB(0,0xFF)
to be input
...
read_data = Expander_Read_PortB(0)
' set expander's portb
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Expander_Read_PortAB
Prototype
sub function Expander_Read_PortAB(dim ModuleAddress as byte) as word
Returns
Word read.
The function reads word from Port Expander's ports. PortA readings are in the
higher byte of the result. PortB readings are in the lower byte of the result.
Description Parameters :
- ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Requires
Example
Port Expander's PortA and PortB should be configured as inputs. See
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA, Expander_Set_DirectionPortB and
Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB routines.
' Read a byte from Port Expander's PORTA and PORTB
dim read_data as word
...
Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB(0,0xFFFF)
' set expander's
porta and portb to be input
...
read_data = Expander_Read_PortAB(0)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
293
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Expander_Write_PortA
Prototype
sub procedure Expander_Write_PortA(dim ModuleAddress as byte, dim
Data_ as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
The function writes byte to Port Expander's PortA.
Parameters :
Description
- ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
- Data_: data to be written
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Requires
Port Expander's PortA should be configured as output. See
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA and Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB routines.
' Write a byte to Port Expander's PORTA
Example
294
...
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA(0,0x00)
to be output
...
Expander_Write_PortA(0, 0xAA)
' set expander's porta
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Expander_Write_PortB
Prototype
sub procedure Expander_Write_PortB(dim ModuleAddress as byte, dim
Data_ as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
The function writes byte to Port Expander's PortB.
Parameters :
Description
- ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
- Data_: data to be written
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Requires
Port Expander's PortB should be configured as output. See
Expander_Set_DirectionPortB and Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB routines.
' Write a byte to Port Expander's PORTB
Example
...
Expander_Set_DirectionPortB(0,0x00)
to be output
...
Expander_Write_PortB(0, 0x55)
' set expander's portb
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
295
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Expander_Write_PortAB
Prototype
sub procedure Expander_Write_PortAB(dim ModuleAddress as byte,
dim Data_ as word)
Returns
Nothing.
The function writes word to Port Expander's ports.
Parameters :
Description
- ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
- Data_: data to be written. Data to be written to PortA are passed in Data's
higher byte. Data to be written to PortB are passed in Data's lower byte
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Requires
Port Expander's PortA and PortB should be configured as outputs. See
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA, Expander_Set_DirectionPortB and
Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB routines.
' Write a byte to Port Expander's PORTA and PORTB
Example
296
...
Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB(0,0x0000)
porta and portb to be output
...
Expander_Write_PortAB(0, 0xAA55)
' set expander's
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA
Prototype
sub procedure Expander_Set_DirectionPortA(dim ModuleAddress as
byte, dim Data_ as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
The function sets Port Expander's PortA direction.
Parameters :
Description - ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
- Data_: data to be written to the PortA direction register. Each bit corresponds
to the appropriate pin of the PortA register. Set bit designates corresponding
pin as input. Cleared bit designates corresponding pin as output.
Requires
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Example
' Set Port Expander's PORTA to be output
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA(0,0x00)
Expander_Set_DirectionPortB
Prototype
sub procedure Expander_Set_DirectionPortB(dim ModuleAddress as
byte, dim Data_ as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
The function sets Port Expander's PortB direction.
Parameters :
Description - ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
- Data_: data to be written to the PortB direction register. Each bit corresponds
to the appropriate pin of the PortB register. Set bit designates corresponding
pin as input. Cleared bit designates corresponding pin as output.
Requires
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Example
' Set Port Expander's PORTB to be input
Expander_Set_DirectionPortB(0,0xFF)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
297
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB
Prototype
sub procedure Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB(dim ModuleAddress as
byte, dim Direction as word)
Returns
Nothing.
The function sets Port Expander's PortA and PortB direction.
Parameters :
- ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
Description
- Direction: data to be written to direction registers. Data to be written to the
PortA direction register are passed in Direction's higher byte. Data to be
written to the PortB direction register are passed in Direction's lower byte.
Each bit corresponds to the appropriate pin of the PortA/PortB register. Set bit
designates corresponding pin as input. Cleared bit designates corresponding
pin as output.
Requires
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Example
' Set Port Expander's PORTA to be output and PORTB to be input
Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB(0,0x00FF)
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortA
Prototype
sub procedure Expander_Set_PullUpsPortA(dim ModuleAddress as
byte, dim Data_ as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
The function sets Port Expander's PortA pull up/down resistors.
Parameters :
Description - ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
- Data_: data for choosing pull up/down resistors configuration. Each bit
corresponds to the appropriate pin of the PortA register. Set bit enables pull-up
for corresponding pin.
298
Requires
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Example
' Set Port Expander's PORTA pull-up resistors
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortA(0, 0xFF)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortB
Prototype
sub procedure Expander_Set_PullUpsPortB(dim ModuleAddress as
byte, dim Data_ as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
The function sets Port Expander's PortB pull up/down resistors.
Parameters :
Description - ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
- Data_: data for choosing pull up/down resistors configuration. Each bit
corresponds to the appropriate pin of the PortB register. Set bit enables
pull-up for corresponding pin.
Requires
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Example
' Set Port Expander's PORTB pull-up resistors
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortB(0, 0xFF)
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortAB
Prototype
sub procedure Expander_Set_PullUpsPortAB(dim ModuleAddress as
byte, dim PullUps as word)
Returns
Nothing.
The function sets Port Expander's PortA and PortB pull up/down resistors.
Parameters :
- ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the botDescription tom of this page
- PullUps: data for choosing pull up/down resistors configuration. PortA pull
up/down resistors configuration is passed in PullUps's higher byte. PortB pull
up/down resistors configuration is passed in PullUps's lower byte. Each bit
corresponds to the appropriate pin of the PortA/PortB register. Set bit enables
pull-up for corresponding pin.
Requires
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Example
' Set Port Expander's PORTA and PORTB pull-up resistors
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortAB(0, 0xFFFF)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
299
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Example
The example demonstrates how to communicate with Port Expander MCP23S17.
Note that Port Expander pins A2 A1 A0 are connected to GND so Port Expander
Hardware Address is 0.
program PortExpander
' Port Expander module connections
dim SPExpanderRST as sbit at PORTB.B0
SPExpanderCS as sbit at PORTB.B1
SPExpanderRST_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B0
SPExpanderCS_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B1
' End Port Expander module connections
dim counter as byte' = 0
main:
counter = 0
DDRC = 0xFF
' Set PORTC as output
' If Port Expander Library uses SPI1 module
SPI1_Init()
' Initialize SPI module used with PortExpander
Spi_Rd_Ptr = @SPI1_Read
' Pass pointer to SPI Read
sub function of used SPI module
' If Port Expander Library uses SPI2 module
' SPI2_Init()
' Initialize SPI module used with PortExpander
' Spi_Rd_Ptr = @SPI2_Read
' Pass pointer to SPI Read
sub function of used SPI module
Expander_Init(0)
' Initialize Port Expander
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA(0, 0x00) ' Set Expander"s PORTA to be
output
Expander_Set_DirectionPortB(0,0xFF)
input
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortB(0,0xFF)
Expander"s PORTB pins
' Set Expander"s PORTB to be
while TRUE
Expander_Write_PortA(0, counter)
Inc(counter)
PORTC = Expander_Read_PortB(0)
write it to LEDs
Delay_ms(100)
wend
' Endless loop
' Write i to expander"s PORTA
' Set pull-ups to all of the
' Read expander"s PORTB and
end.
300
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
HW Connection
Port Expander HW connection
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
301
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
PS/2 LIBRARY
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR provides a library for communication with the common
PS/2 keyboard.
Note: The library does not utilize interrupts for data retrieval, and requires the oscillator clock to be at least 6MHz.
Note: The pins to which a PS/2 keyboard is attached should be connected to the
pull-up resistors.
Note: Although PS/2 is a two-way communication bus, this library does not provide
MCU-to-keyboard communication; e.g. pressing the Caps Lock key will not turn on
the Caps Lock LED.
External dependencies of PS/2 Library
The following variables
must be defined in all
projects using PS/2
Library:
dim PS2_Data as sbit
sfr external
dim PS2_In_Clock as
sbit sfr external
dim PS2_Out_Clock as
sbit sfr external
Description:
PS/2 Data line.
PS/2 Clock line in.
PS/2 Clock line out.
Example :
dim PS2_Data as sbit
at PINC.B0
dim PS2_In_Clock as
sbit at PINC.B1
dim PS2_Out_Clock as
sbit at PORTC.B0
dim
dim
Direction of the PS/2 Data
PS2_Data_Direction as
PS2_Data_Direction as
pin.
sbit sfr external
sbit at DDRC.B0
dim
PS2_Clock_Direction
as sbit sfr external
Direction of the PS/2
Clock pin.
dim
PS2_Clock_Direction
as sbit at DDRC.B1
Library Routines
- Ps2_Config
- Ps2_Key_Read
302
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Ps2_Config
Prototype
sub procedure Ps2_Config()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Initializes the MCU for work with the PS/2 keyboard.
Global variables :
Requires
-
PS2_Data: Data signal line
PS2_In_Clock: Clock signal line in
PS2_Out_Clock: Clock signal line out
PS2_Data_Direction: Direction of the Data pin
PS2_Clock_Direction: Direction of the Clock pin
must be defined before using this function.
Example
// PS2 pinout definition
dim PS2_Data as sbit at PINC.B0
dim PS2_In_Clock as sbit at PINC.B1
dim PS2_Out_Clock as sbit at PORTC.B1
dim PS2_Data_Direction as sbit at DDRC.B0
dim PS2_Clock_Direction as sbit at DDRC.B1
// End of PS2 pinout definition
...
Ps2_Config()
' Init PS/2 Keyboard
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
303
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Ps2_Key_Read
Prototype
Returns
sub function Ps2_Key_Read(dim byref value as byte, dim byref special as byte, dim byref pressed as byte) as byte
- 1 if reading of a key from the keyboard was successful
- 0 if no key was pressed
The function retrieves information on key pressed.
Parameters :
- value: holds the value of the key pressed. For characters, numerals, punctuDescription ation marks, and space value will store the appropriate ASCII code. Routine
“recognizes” the function of Shift and Caps Lock, and behaves appropriately.
For special function keys see Special Function Keys Table.
- special: is a flag for special function keys (F1, Enter, Esc, etc). If key
pressed is one of these, special will be set to 1, otherwise 0.
- pressed: is set to 1 if the key is pressed, and 0 if it is released.
304
Requires
PS/2 keyboard needs to be initialized. See Ps2_Config routine.
Example
dim value, special, pressed as byte
...
do {
if (Ps2_Key_Read(value, special, pressed)) then
if ((value = 13) and (special = 1)) then
break
end if
end if
loop until (0=1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Special Function Keys
Adapter Board T6369C datasheet
Scroll Lock
28
F1
1
Num Lock
29
F2
2
Left Arrow
30
F3
3
Right Arrow
31
F4
4
Up Arrow
32
F5
5
Down Arrow
33
F6
6
Escape
34
F7
7
Tab
35
F8
8
F9
9
F10
10
F11
11
F12
12
Enter
13
Page Up
14
Page Down
15
Backspace
16
Insert
17
Delete
18
Windows
19
Ctrl
20
Shift
21
Alt
22
Print Screen
23
Pause
24
Caps Lock
25
End
26
Home
27
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
305
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Example
This simple example reads values of the pressed keys on the PS/2 keyboard and
sends them via UART.
program PS2_Example
dim keydata, special, down as byte
dim PS2_Data
PS2_Clock_Input
PS2_Clock_Output
as sbit at PINC.B0
as sbit at PINC.B1
as sbit at PORTC.B1
PS2_Data_Direction as sbit at DDRC.B0
PS2_Clock_Direction as sbit at DDRC.B1
main:
UART1_Init(19200)
Ps2_Config()
Delay_ms(100)
UART1_Write("R")
'
'
'
'
Initialize UART module at 19200 bps
Init PS/2 Keyboard
Wait for keyboard to finish
Ready
while TRUE
'
Endless loop
if (Ps2_Key_Read(keydata, special, down) <> 0) then
' If
data was read from PS/2
if (((down <> 0) and (keydata = 16)) <> 0) then
'
Backspace read
UART1_Write(0x08)
'
Send Backspace to USART terminal
else if (((down <> 0) and (keydata = 13)) <> 0) then
'
Enter read
UART1_Write(10)
'
Send carriage return to usart terminal
UART1_Write(13)
'
Uncomment this line if usart terminal also expects line feed
'
for new line transition
else if (((down <> 0) and (special = 0) and (keydata <>
0)) <> 0) then
' Common key read
UART1_Write(keydata)
'
Send key to usart terminal
end if
end if
end if
end if
Delay_ms(10)
' Debounce period
wend
end.
306
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
HW Connection
Example of PS2 keyboard connection
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
307
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
PWM LIBRARY
CMO module is available with a number of AVR MCUs. mikroBasic PRO for AVR provides
library which simplifies using PWM HW Module.
Note: For better understanding of PWM module it would be best to start with the example provided
in Examples folder of our mikroBasic PRO for AVR compiler. When you select a MCU, mikroBasic
PRO for AVR automaticaly loads the correct PWM library (or libraries), which can be verified by looking at the Library Manager. PWM library handles and initializes the PWM module on the given AVR
MCU, but it is up to user to set the correct pins as PWM output, this topic will be covered later in this
section. mikroBasic PRO for AVR does not support enhanced PWM modules.
Library Routines
-
PWM_Init
PWM_Set_Duty
PWM_Start
PWM_Stop
PWM1_Init
PWM1_Set_Duty
PWM1_Start
PWM1_Stop
Predefined constants used in PWM library
The following variables are
used in PWM library functions:
308
Description:
_PWM_PHASE_CORRECT_MODE
Selects Phase Correct PWM mode on first PWM library.
_PWM1_PHASE_CORRECT_MODE
Selects Phase Correct PWM mode on second PWM
library (if it exists in Library Manager.
_PWM_FAST_MODE
Selects Fast PWM mode on first PWM library.
_PWM1_FAST_MODE
Selects Fast PWM mode on second PWM library (if it
exists in Library Manager.
_PWM_PRESCALER_1
Sets prescaler value to 1 (No prescaling).
_PWM_PRESCALER_8
Sets prescaler value to 8.
_PWM_PRESCALER_32
Sets prescaler value to 32 (this value is not available on
every MCU. Please use Code Assistant to see if this
value is available for the given MCU.
_PWM_PRESCALER_64
Sets prescaler value to 64.
_PWM_PRESCALER_128
Sets prescaler value to 128 (this value is not available
on every MCU. Please use Code Assistant to see if this
value is available for the given MCU.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
_PWM_PRESCALER_256
Sets prescaler value to 256.
_PWM_PRESCALER_1024
Sets prescaler value to 1024.
_PWM1_PRESCALER_1
Sets prescaler value to 1 on second PWM library (if it
exists in Library Manager).
_PWM1_PRESCALER_8
Sets prescaler value to 8 on second PWM library (if it
exists in Library Manager).
_PWM1_PRESCALER_32
Sets prescaler value to 32 on second PWM library (if it
exists in Library Manager). This value is not available
on every MCU. Please use Code Assistant to see if this
value is available for the given MCU.
_PWM1_PRESCALER_64
Sets prescaler value to 64 on second PWM library (if it
exists in Library Manager).
_PWM1_PRESCALER_128
Sets prescaler value to 128 on second PWM library (if it
exists in Library Manager). This value is not available
on every MCU. Please use Code Assistant to see if this
value is available for the given MCU.
_PWM1_PRESCALER_256
Sets prescaler value to 256 on second PWM library (if it
exists in Library Manager).
_PWM1_PRESCALER_1024
Sets prescaler value to 1024 on second PWM library (if
it exists in Library Manager).
_PWM_INVERTED
Selects the inverted PWM mode.
_PWM1_INVERTED
Selects the inverted PWM mode on second PWM
library (if it exists in Library Manager).
_PWM_NON_INVERTED
Selects the normal (non inverted) PWM mode.
_PWM1_NON_INVERTED
Selects the normal (non inverted) PWM mode on second PWM library (if it exists in Library Manager).
Note: Not all of the MCUs have both PWM and PWM1 library included. Sometimes, like its the
case with ATmega8515, MCU has only PWM library. Therefore constants that have in their
name PWM1 are invalid (for ATmega8515) and will not be visible from Code Assistant. It is
highly advisable to use this feature, since it handles all the constants (available) nad eliminates
any chance of typing error.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
309
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
PWM_Init
Prototype
sub procedure PWM_Init(dim wave_mode as byte, dim prescaler as
byte, dim inverted as byte, dim duty as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Initializes the PWM module. Parameter wave_mode is a desired PWM mode.
There are two modes: Phase Correct and Fast PWM. Parameter prescaler
chooses prescale value N = 1,8,64,256 or 1024 (some modules support 32 and
128, but for this you will need to check the datasheet for the desired MCU).
Paremeter inverted is for choosing between inverted and non inverted PWM
signal. Parameter duty sets duty ratio from 0 to 255. PWM signal graphs and
formulas are shown below.
Description
PWM_Init must be called before using other functions from PWM Library.
310
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
You need a CMO on the given MCU (that supports PWM).
Requires
Before calling this routine you must set the output pin for the PWM (according
to the datasheet):
DDRB.3 = 1; // set PORTB pin 3 as output for the PWM
This code oxample is for ATmega16, for different MCU please consult datasheet
for the correct pinout of the PWM module or modules.
Initialize PWM module:
Example
PWM_Init(_PWM_FAST_MODE, _PWM_PRESCALER_8, _PWM_NON_INVERTED,
127)
PWM_Set_Duty
Prototype
sub procedure PWM_Set_Duty(dim duty as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Changes PWM duty ratio. Parameter duty takes values from 0 to 255, where 0
Description is 0%, 127 is 50%, and 255 is 100% duty ratio. Other specific values for duty
ratio can be calculated as (Percent*255)/100.
Requires
PWM module must to be initialised (PWM_Init) before using PWM_Set_Duty
function.
For example lets set duty ratio to 75%:
Example
PWM_Set_Duty(192)
PWM_Start
Prototype
sub procedure PWM_Start()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Starts PWM.
Requires
MCU must have CMO module to use this library. PWM_Init must be called
before
using this routine.
Example
PWM_Start()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
311
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
PWM_Stop
Prototype
sub procedure PWM_Stop()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Stops the PWM.
Requires
MCU must have CMO module to use this library. PWM_Init and PWM_Start
must be called before
using this routine using this routine, otherwise it will have no effect as the PWM
module is not running.
Example
PWM_Stop()
Note: Not all the AVR MCUs support both PWM and PWM1 library. The best way to verify this is
by checking the datasheet for the desired MCU. Also you can check this by selecting a MCU in
mikroBasic PRO for AVR looking at the Library Manager. If library manager loads both PWM and
PWM1 library (you are able to check them) then this MCU supports both PWM libraries. Here you
can take full advantage of our Code Assistant and Parameter Assistant feature of our compiler.
PWM1_Init
Prototype
sub procedure PWM1_Init(dim wave_mode as byte, dim prescaler as
byte, dim inverted as byte, dim duty as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Initializes the PWM module. Parameter wave_mode is a desired PWM mode. There
are two modes: Phase Correct and Fast PWM. Parameter prescaler chooses
prescale value N = 1,8,64,256 or 1024 (some modules support 32 and 128, but for
this you will need to check the datasheet for the desired MCU). Paremeter inverted is
for choosing between inverted and non inverted PWM signal. Parameter duty sets
duty ratio from 0 to 255. PWM signal graphs and formulas are shown below.
Description
312
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Description
The N variable represents the prescaler factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024). Some
modules also support 32 and 128 prescaler value, but for this you will need to
check the datasheet for the desired MCU)
PWM1_Init must be called before using other functions from PWM Library.
You need a CMO on the given MCU (that supports PWM).
Requires
Before calling this routine you must set the output pin for the PWM (according
to the datasheet):
DDRD.7 = 1; // set PORTD pin 7 as output for the PWM1
This code oxample is for ATmega16 (second PWM module), for different MCU
please consult datasheet for the correct pinout of the PWM module or modules.
Initialize PWM module:
Example
PWM1_Init(_PWM1_FAST_MODE, _PWM1_PRESCALER_8, _PWM1_NON_INVERTED,
127)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
313
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
PWM1_Set_Duty
Prototype
sub procedure PWM1_Set_Duty(dim duty as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Changes PWM duty ratio. Parameter duty takes values from 0 to 255, where 0
Description is 0%, 127 is 50%, and 255 is 100% duty ratio. Other specific values for duty
ratio can be calculated as (Percent*255)/100.
Requires
PWM module must to be initialised (PWM1_Init) before using PWM_Set_Duty
function.
For example lets set duty ratio to 75%:
Example
PWM1_Set_Duty(192)
PWM1_Start
Prototype
sub procedure PWM1_Start()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Starts PWM.
Requires
MCU must have CMO module to use this library. PWM1_Init must be called
before
using this routine.
Example
PWM1_Start()
PWM1_Stop
Prototype
sub procedure PWM1_Stop()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Stops the PWM.
314
Requires
MCU must have CMO module to use this library. PWM1_Init and PWM1_Start
must be called before
using this routine using this routine, otherwise it will have no effect as the PWM
module is not running.
Example
PWM1_Stop();
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Example
The example changes PWM duty ratio on pin PB3 continually. If LED is connected
to PB3, you can observe the gradual change of emitted light.
program PWM_Test
dim current_duty as byte
current_duty1 as byte
main:
DDB0_bit = 0
DDB1_bit = 0
' Set PORTB pin 0 as input
' Set PORTB pin 1 as input
DDC0_bit = 0
DDC1_bit = 0
' Set PORTC pin 0 as input
' Set PORTC pin 1 as input
current_duty = 127
current_duty1 = 127
' initial value for current_duty
' initial value for current_duty
DDB3_bit = 1
' Set PORTB pin 3 as output pin
for the PWM (according to datasheet)
DDD7_bit = 1
' Set PORTD pin 7 as output pin
for the PWM1 (according to datasheet)
PWM_Init(_PWM_PHASE_CORRECT_MODE,
_PWM_NON_INVERTED, 127)
PWM1_Init(_PWM1_PHASE_CORRECT_MODE,
_PWM1_NON_INVERTED, 127)
while TRUE
_PWM_PRESCALER_8,
_PWM1_PRESCALER_8,
' Endless loop
if (PINB0_bit <> 0) then ' Detect if PORTB pin 0 is pressed
Delay_ms(40)
' Small delay to avoid deboucing effect
Inc(current_duty)
' Increment duty ratio
PWM_Set_Duty(current_duty)
' Set incremented duty
end if
if (PINB1_bit <> 0) then ' Detect if PORTB pin 1 is pressed
Delay_ms(40)
' Small delay to avoid deboucing effect
Dec(current_duty)
' Decrement duty ratio
PWM_Set_Duty(current_duty)
' Set decremented duty ratio
end if
if (PINC0_bit <> 0) then ' Detect if PORTC pin 0 is pressed
Delay_ms(40)
' Small delay to avoid deboucing effect
Inc(current_duty1)
' Increment duty ratio
PWM1_Set_Duty(current_duty1)
' Set incremented duty
end if
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
315
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
if (PINC1_bit <> 0) then ' Detect if PORTC pin 1 is pressed
Delay_ms(40)
' Small delay to avoid deboucing effect
Dec(current_duty1)
' Decrement duty ratio
PWM1_Set_Duty(current_duty1)
' Set decremented duty ratio
end if
wend
end.
HW Connection
PWM demonstration
316
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
PWM 16 BIT LIBRARY
CMO module is available with a number of AVR MCUs. mikroBasic PRO for AVR
provides library which simplifies using PWM HW Module.
Note: For better understanding of PWM module it would be best to start with the
example provided in Examples folder of our mikroBasic PRO for AVR compiler.
When you select a MCU, mikroBasic PRO for AVR automaticaly loads the correct
PWM-16bit library, which can be verified by looking at the Library Manager. PWM
library handles and initializes the PWM module on the given AVR MCU, but it is up
to user to set the correct pins as PWM output, this topic will be covered later in this
section.
Library Routines
-
PWM16bit_Init
PWM16bit_Change_Duty
PWM16bit_Start
PWM16bit_Stop
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
317
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Predefined constants used in PWM-16bit library
The following variables are used in
PWM-16bit library functions:
318
Description:
_PWM16_PHASE_CORRECT_MODE_8BIT
Selects Phase Correct, 8-bit mode.
_PWM16_PHASE_CORRECT_MODE_9BIT
Selects Phase Correct, 9-bit mode.
_PWM16_PHASE_CORRECT_MODE_10BIT
Selects Phase Correct, 10-bit mode.
_PWM16_FAST_MODE_8BIT
Selects Fast, 8-bit mode.
_PWM16_FAST_MODE_9BIT
Selects Fast, 9-bit mode.
_PWM16_FAST_MODE_10BIT
Selects Fast, 10-bit mode.
_PWM16_PRESCALER_16bit_1
Sets prescaler value to 1 (No prescaling).
_PWM16_PRESCALER_16bit_8
Sets prescaler value to 8.
_PWM16_PRESCALER_16bit_64
Sets prescaler value to 64.
_PWM16_PRESCALER_16bit_256
Sets prescaler value to 256.
_PWM16_PRESCALER_16bit_1024
Sets prescaler value to 1024.
_PWM16_INVERTED
Selects the inverted PWM-16bit mode.
_PWM16__NON_INVERTED
Selects the normal (non inverted) PWM-16bit mode.
_TIMER1
Selects the Timer/Counter1 (used with
PWM16bit_Start and PWM16bit_Stop.
_TIMER3
Selects the Timer/Counter3 (used with
PWM16bit_Start and PWM16bit_Stop.
_TIMER1_CH_A
Selects the channel A on Timer/Counter1 (used with
PWM16bit_Change_Duty).
_TIMER1_CH_B
Selects the channel B on Timer/Counter1 (used with
PWM16bit_Change_Duty).
_TIMER1_CH_C
Selects the channel C on Timer/Counter1 (used with
PWM16bit_Change_Duty).
_TIMER3_CH_A
Selects the channel A on Timer/Counter3 (used with
PWM16bit_Change_Duty).
_TIMER3_CH_B
Selects the channel B on Timer/Counter3 (used with
PWM16bit_Change_Duty).
_TIMER3_CH_C
Selects the channel C on Timer/Counter3 (used with
PWM16bit_sChange_Duty).
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Note: Not all of the MCUs have 16bit PWM, and not all of the MCUs have both Timer/Counter1
and Timer/Counter3. Sometimes, like its the case with ATmega168, MCU has only
Timer/Counter1 and channels A and B. Therefore constants that have in their name Timer3 or
channel C are invalid (for ATmega168) and will not be visible from Code Assistant. It is highly
advisable to use this feature, since it handles all the constants (available) and eliminates any
chance of typing error.
PWM16bit_Init
Prototype
sub procedure PWM16bit_Init(dim wave_mode as byte, dim prescaler as
byte, dim inverted as byte, dim duty as word, dim timer as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Initializes the PWM module. Parameter wave_mode is a desired PWM-16bit
mode.
There are several modes included :
-
PWM, Phase Correct, 8-bit
PWM, Phase Correct, 9-bit
PWM, Phase Correct, 10-bit
Fast PWM, 8-bit
Fast PWM, 9-bit
Fast PWM, 10-bit
Parameter prescaler chooses prescale value N = 1,8,64,256 or 1024 (some
modules support 32 and 128, but for this you will need to check the datasheet
for the desired MCU). Paremeter inverted is for choosing between inverted
and non inverted PWM signal. Parameter duty sets duty ratio from 0 to TOP
value (this value varies on the PWM wave mode selected). PWM signal graphs
Description
and formulas are shown below.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
319
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Description
The N variable represents the prescaler factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
PWM16bit_Init must be called before using other functions from PWM Library.
You need a CMO on the given MCU (that supports PWM-16bit).
Requires
Before calling this routine you must set the output pin for the PWM (according
to the datasheet):
DDRB.B1 = 1; // set PORTB pin 1 as output for the PWM-16bit
This code example is for ATmega168, for different MCU please consult
datasheet for the correct pinout of the PWM module or modules.
Initialize PWM-16bit module:
Example
320
PWM16bit_Init( _PWM16_PHASE_CORRECT_MODE_8BIT,
_PWM16_PRESCALER_16bit_8, _PWM16_NON_INVERTED, 255, _TIMER1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
PWM16bit_Change_Duty
Prototype
sub procedure PWM16bit_Change_Duty(dim duty as word, dim channel
as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Changes PWM duty ratio. Parameter duty takes values shown on the table
below. Where 0 is 0%, and TOP value is 100% duty ratio. Other specific values
for duty ratio can be calculated as (Percent*TOP)/100.
Description
Requires
Timer/Counter Mode of
Operation :
TOP :
Update of
OCRnX at :
TOVn Flag
Set on :
PWM, Phase Correct, 8 bit
0x00FF
TOP
BOTTOM
PWM, Phase Correct, 9 bit
0x01FF
TOP
BOTTOM
PWM, Phase Correct, 10 bit
0x03FF
TOP
BOTTOM
Fast PWM, 8 bit
0x00FF
TOP
TOP
Fast PWM, 9 bit
0x01FF
TOP
TOP
Fast PWM, 10 bit
0x03FF
TOP
TOP
PWM module must to be initialised (PWM16bit_Init) before using
PWM_Set_Duty function.
Example lets set duty ratio to :
Example
PWM16bit_Change_Duty( 300, _TIMER1_CH_A )
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
321
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
PWM16bit_Start
Prototype
sub procedure PWM16bit_Start(dim timer as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Description
Starts PWM-16bit module with alredy preset values (wave mode, prescaler,
inverted and duty) given in the PWM16bit_Init.
Requires
MCU must have CMO module to use this library. PWM16bit_Init must be called
before
using this routine, otherwise it will have no effect as the PWM module is not initialised.
PWM16bit_Start( _TIMER1 )
on Timer/Counter1
Example
// Starts the PWM-16bit module
or
PWM16bit_Start( _TIMER3 )
on Timer/Counter3
// Starts the PWM-16bit module
PWM16bit_Stop
Prototype
sub procedure PWM16_Stop(dim timer as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Description Stops the PWM-16bit module, connected to Timer/Counter set in this stop function.
Requires
MCU must have CMO module to use this library. Like in PWM16bit_Start
before, PWM16bit_Init must be called before
using this routine , otherwise it will have no effect as the PWM module is not
running.
PWM16bit_Stop( _TIMER1 )
Timer/Counter1
Example
// Stops the PWM-16bit module on
or
PWM16bit_Stop( _TIMER3 )
Timer/Counter3
// Stops the PWM-16bit module on
Library Example
The example changes PWM duty ratio continually by pressing buttons on PORTC (0-3). If LED is
connected to PORTB.B1 or PORTB.B2 ,you can observe the gradual change of emitted light. This
example is written for ATmega168. This AVR MCU has only Timer/Counter1 split over two channels A and B. In this example we are changing the duty ratio on both of these channels.
322
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
program PWM_Test
dim current_duty as byte
current_duty1 as byte
main:
DDC0_bit = 0
DDC1_bit = 0
' Set PORTC pin 0 as input
' Set PORTC pin 1 as input
DDC2_bit = 0
DDC3_bit = 0
' Set PORTC pin 2 as input
' Set PORTC pin 3 as input
current_duty = 127
current_duty1 = 127
' initial value for current_duty
' initial value for current_duty
DDB1_bit = 1
' Set PORTB pin 1 as output pin
for the PWM (according to datasheet)
DDB2_bit = 1
' Set PORTB pin 2 as output pin
for the PWM (according to datasheet)
PWM16bit_Init(_PWM16_FAST_MODE_9BIT,
_PWM16_INVERTED, 255, 1)
while TRUE
_PWM16_PRESCALER_16bit_1,
' Endless loop
if (PINC.B0 <> 0) then
' Detect if PORTC pin 0 is pressed
Delay_ms(40)
' Small delay to avoid deboucing effect
Inc(current_duty)
' Increment duty ratio
PWM_Set_Duty(current_duty)
' Set incremented duty
end if
if (PINC.B1 <> 0) then
' Detect if PORTC pin 1 is pressed
Delay_ms(40)
' Small delay to avoid deboucing effect
Dec(current_duty)
' Decrement duty ratio
PWM_Set_Duty(current_duty)
' Set decremented duty ratio
end if
if (PINC.B2 <> 0) then
' Detect if PORTC pin 2 is pressed
Delay_ms(40)
' Small delay to avoid deboucing effect
Inc(current_duty1)
' Increment duty ratio
PWM1_Set_Duty(current_duty1)
' Set incremented duty
end if
if (PINC.B3 <> 0) then ' Detect if PORTC pin 3 is pressed
Delay_ms(40)
' Small delay to avoid deboucing effect
Dec(current_duty1)
' Decrement duty ratio
PWM1_Set_Duty(current_duty1)
' Set decremented duty ratio
end if
wend
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
323
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
HW Connection
PWM demonstration
324
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
RS-485 LIBRARY
RS-485 is a multipoint communication which allows multiple devices to be connected to a single bus. The mikroBasic PRO for AVR provides a set of library routines
for comfortable work with RS485 system using Master/Slave architecture. Master
and Slave devices interchange packets of information. Each of these packets contains synchronization bytes, CRC byte, address byte and the data. Each Slave has
unique address and receives only packets addressed to it. The Slave can never initiate communication.
It is the user’s responsibility to ensure that only one device transmits via 485 bus at
a time.
The RS-485 routines require the UART module. Pins of UART need to be attached
to RS-485 interface transceiver, such as LTC485 or similar (see schematic at the
bottom of this page).
Library constants:
- START byte value = 150
- STOP byte value = 169
- Address 50 is the broadcast address for all Slaves (packets containing address 50
will be received by all Slaves except the Slaves with addresses 150 and 169).
Note:
- Prior to calling any of this library routines, UART_Wr_Ptr needs to be initialized
with the appropriate UART_Write routine.
- Prior to calling any of this library routines, UART_Rd_Ptr needs to be initialized
with the appropriate UART_Read routine.
- Prior to calling any of this library routines, UART_Rdy_Ptr needs to be initialized
with the appropriate UART_Ready routine.
- Prior to calling any of this library routines, UART_TX_Idle_Ptr needs to be
initialized with the appropriate UART_TX_Idle routine.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
325
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
External dependencies of RS-485 Library
The following variable
must be defined in all
projects using RS-485
Library:
Description:
Control RS-485 Trans-
Example :
dim RS485_rxtx_pin as
mit/Receive operation
sbit sfr external
dim RS485_rxtx_pin as
sbit at PORTD.B2
dim
RS485_rxtx_pin_direc- Direction of the RS-485
tion as sbit sfr
Transmit/Receive pin
external
dim
RS485_rxtx_pin_direction as sbit at
DDRD.B2
mode
Library Routines
-
326
RS485Master_Init
RS485Master_Receive
RS485Master_Send
RS485Slave_Init
RS485Slave_Receive
RS485Slave_Send
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
RS485Master_Init
Prototype
sub procedure RS485Master_Init()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Initializes MCU as a Master for RS-485 communication.
Global variables :
- RS485_rxtx_pin - this pin is connected to RE/DE input of RS-485
transceiver(see schematic at the bottom of this page). RE/DE signal controls
RS-485 transceiver operation mode.
Requires
- RS485_rxtx_pin_direction - direction of the RS-485 Transmit/Receive pin
must be defined before using this function.
UART HW module needs to be initialized. See UARTx_Init.
' RS485 module pinout
dim RS485_rxtx_pin as sbit at PORTD.B2
dim RS485_rxtx_pin_direction as sbit at DDRD.B2
' End of RS485 module pinout
Example
' Pass pointers to UART functions of used UART module
UART_Wr_Ptr = @UART1_Write
UART_Rd_Ptr = @UART1_Read
UART_Rdy_Ptr = @UART1_Data_Ready
UART_TX_Idle_Ptr = @UART1_TX_Idle
...
UART1_Init(9600)
' initialize UART module
RS485Master_Init()
' intialize MCU as a Master
for RS-485 communication
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
327
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
RS485Master_Receive
Prototype
sub procedure RS485Master_Receive(dim byref data_buffer as
byte[20])
Returns
Nothing.
Receives messages from Slaves. Messages are multi-byte, so this routine must
be called for each byte received.
Parameters :
Description
-
data_buffer: 7 byte buffer for storing received data, in the following manner:
data[0..2]: message content
data[3]: number of message bytes received, 1–3
data[4]: is set to 255 when message is received
data[5]: is set to 255 if error has occurred
data[6]: address of the Slave which sent the message
The function automatically adjusts data[4] and data[5] upon every received
message. These flags need to be cleared by software.
328
Requires
MCU must be initialized as a Master for RS-485 communication. See
RS485Master_Init.
Example
dim msg as byte[20]
...
RS485Master_Receive(msg)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
RS485Master_Send
Prototype
sub procedure Rs485Master_Send(dim byref data_buffer as byte[20],
dim datalen as byte, dim slave_address as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sends message to Slave(s). Message format can be found at the bottom of this
page.
Description
Parameters :
- data_buffer: data to be sent
- datalen: number of bytes for transmition. Valid values: 0...3.
- slave_address: Slave(s) address
MCU must be initialized as a Master for RS-485 communication. See
RS485Master_Init.
Requires
It is the user’s responsibility to ensure (by protocol) that only one device sends
data via 485 bus at a time.
Example
dim msg as byte[20]
...
' send 3 bytes of data to slave with address 0x12
RS485Master_Send(msg, 3, 0x12)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
329
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
RS485Slave_Init
Prototype
sub procedure RS485Slave_Init(dim slave_address as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Initializes MCU as a Slave for RS-485 communication.
Description Parameters :
- slave_address: Slave address
Global variables :
- RS485_rxtx_pin - this pin is connected to RE/DE input of RS-485
transceiver(see schematic at the bottom of this page). RE/DE signal controls
RS-485 transceiver operation mode. Valid values: 1 (for transmitting) and 0
(for receiving)
Requires
- RS485_rxtx_pin_direction - direction of the RS-485 Transmit/Receive pin
must be defined before using this function.
UART HW module needs to be initialized. See UARTx_Init.
' RS485 module pinout
dim RS485_rxtx_pin as sbit at PORTD.B2
dim RS485_rxtx_pin_direction as sbit at DDRD.B2
' End of RS485 module pinout
Example
330
' Pass pointers to UART functions of used UART module
UART_Wr_Ptr = @UART1_Write
UART_Rd_Ptr = @UART1_Read
UART_Rdy_Ptr = @UART1_Data_Ready
UART_TX_Idle_Ptr = @UART1_TX_Idle
...
UART1_Init(9600)
' initialize UART module
RS485Slave_Init(160)
' intialize MCU as a Slave
for RS-485 communication with address 160
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
RS485Slave_Receive
Prototype
sub procedure RS485Slave_Receive(dim byref data_buffer as
byte[20])
Returns
Nothing.
Receives messages from Master. If Slave address and Message address field
don't match then the message will be discarded. Messages are multi-byte, so
this routine must be called for each byte received.
Parameters :
Description
-
data_buffer: 6 byte buffer for storing received data, in the following manner:
data[0..2]: message content
data[3]: number of message bytes received, 1–3
data[4]: is set to 255 when message is received
data[5]: is set to 255 if error has occurred
The function automatically adjusts data[4] and data[5] upon every received
message. These flags need to be cleared by software.
Requires
MCU must be initialized as a Slave for RS-485 communication. See
RS485Slave_Init.
Example
dim msg as byte[5]
...
RS485Slave_Read(msg)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
331
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
RS485Slave_Send
Prototype
sub procedure RS485Slave_Send(dim byref data_buffer as byte[20],
dim datalen as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sends message to Master. Message format can be found at the bottom of this
page.
Description Parameters :
- data_buffer: data to be sent
- datalen: number of bytes for transmition. Valid values: 0...3.
Requires
MCU must be initialized as a Slave for RS-485 communication. See
RS485Slave_Init. It is the user’s responsibility to ensure (by protocol) that only
one device sends data via 485 bus at a time.
Example
dim msg as byte[8]
...
' send 2 bytes of data to the master
RS485Slave_Send(msg, 2)
Library Example
This is a simple demonstration of RS485 Library routines usage.
Master sends message to Slave with address 160 and waits for a response. The Slave accepts
data, increments it and sends it back to the Master. Master then does the same and sends incremented data back to Slave, etc.
Master displays received data on P0, while error on receive (0xAA) and number of consecutive
unsuccessful retries are displayed on P1. Slave displays received data on P0, while error on
receive (0xAA) is displayed on P1. Hardware configurations in this example are made for the
EasyAVR5A board and ATmega16.
RS485 Master code:
332
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
program RS485_Master_Example
dim dat as byte[10]
' buffer for receving/sending messages
i, j as byte
cnt as longint
dim rs485_rxtx_pin as sbit at PORTD.2
' set transcieve pin
rs485_rxtx_pin_direction as sbit at DDRD.2
' set transcieve
pin direction
' Interrupt routine
sub procedure interrupt() org 0x16
RS485Master_Receive(dat)
end sub
main:
cnt = 0
PORTA = 0
PORTB = 0
PORTC = 0
DDRA
DDRB
DDRC
' clear PORTA
' clear PORTB
' clear PORTC
= 0xFF
= 0xFF
= 0xFF
' set PORTA as output
' set PORTB as output
' set PORTB as output
' Pass pointers to UART sub functions of used UART module
UART_Wr_Ptr= @UART1_Write
UART_Rd_Ptr = @UART1_Read
UART_Rdy_Ptr = @UART1_Data_Ready
UART_TX_Idle_Ptr = @UART1_TX_Idle
UART1_Init(9600)
Delay_ms(100)
' initialize UART1 module
RS485Master_Init()
dat[0] = 0xAA
dat[1] = 0xF0
dat[2] = 0x0F
dat[4] = 0
dat[5] = 0
dat[6] = 0
' initialize MCU as Master
' ensure that message received flag is 0
' ensure that error flag is 0
RS485Master_Send(dat,1,160)
SREG_I_bit
RXCIE_bit
= 1
= 1
while TRUE
Inc(cnt)
if (dat[5] <> 0) then
PORTC = dat[5]
end if
' enable global interrupt
' enable interrupt on UART receive
' if an error detected, signal it
'
by setting PORTC
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
333
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
if (dat[4] <> 0) then
' if message received successfully
cnt = 0
dat[4] = 0
' clear message received flag
j = dat[3]
for i = 1 to dat[3]
' show data on PORTB
PORTB = dat[i-1]
next i
dat[0] = dat[0]+1
' increment received dat[0]
Delay_ms(1)
' send back to slave
RS485Master_Send(dat,1,160)
end if
if (cnt > 100000) then
' if in 100000 poll-cycles the answer
Inc(PORTA)
'
was not detected, signal
cnt = 0
'
failure of send-message
RS485Master_Send(dat,1,160)
if (PORTA > 10) then
' if sending failed 10 times
PORTA = 0
RS485Master_Send(dat,1,50)
'
send message on broadcast
address
end if
end if
wend
end.
RS485 Slave code:
program RS485_Slave_Example
dim dat as byte[20]
messages
i, j as byte
' buffer for receving/sending
dim rs485_rxtx_pin as sbit at PORTD.B2
' set transcieve pin
rs485_rxtx_pin_direction as sbit at DDRD.B2
' set transcieve
pin direction
' Interrupt routine
sub procedure interrupt() org 0x16
RS485Slave_Receive(dat)
end sub
main:
PORTB = 0
PORTC = 0
DDRB = 0xFF
DDRC = 0xFF
334
' clear PORTB
' clear PORTC
' set PORTB as output
' set PORTB as output
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
' Pass pointers to UART sub functions of used UART module
UART_Wr_Ptr = @UART1_Write
UART_Rd_Ptr = @UART1_Read
UART_Rdy_Ptr = @UART1_Data_Ready
UART_TX_Idle_Ptr = @UART1_TX_Idle
UART1_Init(9600)
Delay_ms(100)
RS485Slave_Init(160)
' Intialize MCU as slave, address 160
dat[4] = 0
dat[5] = 0
dat[6] = 0
' ensure that message received flag is 0
' ensure that message received flag is 0
' ensure that error flag is 0
SREG_I_bit = 1
RXCIE_bit = 1
' initialize UART1 module
' enable global interrupt
' enable interrupt on UARTs receive
while TRUE
if (dat[5] <> 0) then
' if an error detected, signal it by
PORTC = dat[5]
'
setting PORTC
dat[5] = 0
end if
if (dat[4] <> 0) then
' upon completed valid message receive
dat[4] = 0
'
data[4] is set to 0xFF
j = dat[3]
for i = 1 to dat[3]
' show data on PORTB
PORTB = dat[i-1]
next i
dat[0] = dat[0]+1
' increment received dat[0]
Delay_ms(1)
RS485Slave_Send(dat,1)
'
and send it back to master
end if
wend
end.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
335
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
HW Connection
Example of interfacing PC to ATmega16 MCU via RS485 bus with LTC485 as RS485 transceiver
336
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Message format and CRC calculations
Q: How is CRC checksum calculated on RS485 master side?
START_BYTE = 0x96; ' 10010110
STOP_BYTE = 0xA9; ' 10101001
PACKAGE:
-------START_BYTE 0x96
ADDRESS
DATALEN
[DATA1]
[DATA2]
[DATA3]
CRC
STOP_BYTE 0xA9
' if exists
' if exists
' if exists
DATALEN bits
-----------bit7 = 1 MASTER SENDS
0 SLAVE SENDS
bit6 = 1 ADDRESS WAS XORed with 1, IT WAS EQUAL
STOP_BYTE
0 ADDRESS UNCHANGED
bit5 = 0 FIXED
bit4 = 1
DATA3 (if exists) WAS XORed with 1,
START_BYTE or STOP_BYTE
0 DATA3 (if exists) UNCHANGED
bit3 = 1
DATA2 (if exists) WAS XORed with 1,
START_BYTE or STOP_BYTE
0 DATA2 (if exists) UNCHANGED
bit2 = 1
DATA1 (if exists) WAS XORed with 1,
START_BYTE or STOP_BYTE
0 DATA1 (if exists) UNCHANGED
bit1bit0 = 0 to 3 NUMBER OF DATA BYTES SEND
TO START_BYTE or
IT WAS EQUAL TO
IT WAS EQUAL TO
IT WAS EQUAL TO
CRC generation :
---------------crc_send = datalen ^ address;
crc_send ^= data[0];
' if exists
crc_send ^= data[1];
' if exists
crc_send ^= data[2];
' if exists
crc_send = ~crc_send;
if ((crc_send == START_BYTE) || (crc_send == STOP_BYTE))
crc_send++;
NOTE:
DATALEN<4..0>
can
STOP_BYTE<4..0> values.
not
take
the
START_BYTE<4..0>
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
or
337
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SOFTWARE I²C LIBRARY
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR provides routines for implementing Software I˛C communication. These routines are hardware independent and can be used with any
MCU. The Software I˛C library enables you to use MCU as Master in I˛C communication. Multi-master mode is not supported.
Note: This library implements time-based activities, so interrupts need to be disabled when using Software I˛C.
Note: All Software I˛C Library functions are blocking-call functions (they are waiting
for I˛C clock line to become logical one).
Note: The pins used for Software I˛C communication should be connected to the
pull-up resistors. Turning off the LEDs connected to these pins may also be
required.
External dependencies of Soft_I2C Library
The following variables
must be defined in all
projects using Soft_I2C
Library:
dim
Soft_I2C_Scl_Output
as sbit sfr external
338
Description:
Example :
dim
Soft I2C Clock output line. Soft_I2C_Scl_Output
as sbit at PORTC.B0
dim
Soft_I2C_Sda_Output
Soft I2C Data output line.
as sbit sfr external
dim
Soft_I2C_Scl_Input as Soft I2C Clock input line.
sbit sfr external
dim
Soft_I2C_Sda_Input as Soft I2C Data input line.
sbit sfr external
dim
Soft_I2C_Sda_Output
as sbit at PORTC.B1
dim
Soft_I2C_Scl_Input as
sbit at PINC.B0
dim
Soft_I2C_Sda_Input as
sbit at PINC.B1
dim
Soft_I2C_Scl_Pin_Dire Direction of the Soft I2C
ction as sbit sfr
Clock pin.
external
dim
Soft_I2C_Scl_Pin_Dire
ction as sbit at
DDRC.B0
dim
Soft_I2C_Sda_Pin_Dire Direction of the Soft I2C
ction as sbit sfr
Data pin.
external
dim
Soft_I2C_Sda_Pin_Dire
ction as sbit at
DDRC.B1
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Routines
-
Soft_I2C_Init
Soft_I2C_Start
Soft_I2C_Read
Soft_I2C_Write
Soft_I2C_Stop
Soft_I2C_Break
Soft_I2C_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Soft_I2C_Init()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Configures the software I2C module.
Global variables :
Requires
- Soft_I2C_Scl_Output: Soft I2C clock output line
- Soft_I2C_Sda_Output: Soft I2C data output line
- Soft_I2C_Scl_Input: Soft I2C clock input line
- Soft_I2C_Sda_Input: Soft I2C data input line
- Soft_I2C_Scl_Pin_Direction: Direction of the Soft I2C clock pin
- Soft_I2C_Sda_Pin_Direction: Direction of the Soft I2C data pin
must be defined before using this function.
Example
'Soft_I2C pinout definition
dim Soft_I2C_Scl_Output
as sbit at PORTC.B0
dim Soft_I2C_Sda_Output
as sbit at PORTC.B1
dim Soft_I2C_Scl_Input
as sbit at PINC.B0
dim Soft_I2C_Sda_Input
as sbit at PINC.B1
dim Soft_I2C_Scl_Pin_Direction as sbit at DDRC.B0
dim Soft_I2C_Sda_Pin_Direction as sbit at DDRC.B1
'End of Soft_I2C pinout definition
...
Soft_I2C_Init()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
339
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Soft_I2C_Start
Prototype
sub procedure Soft_I2C_Start()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Determines if the I2C bus is free and issues START signal.
Requires
Software I2C must be configured before using this function. See Soft_I2C_Init
routine.
Example
' Issue START signal
Soft_I2C_Start()
Soft_I2C_Read
Prototype
sub function Soft_I2C_Read(dim ack as word) as byte
Returns
One byte from the Slave.
Reads one byte from the slave.
Description
Parameters :
- ack: acknowledge signal parameter. If the ack==0 not acknowledge signal will
be sent after reading, otherwise the acknowledge signal will be sent.
Soft I2C must be configured before using this function. See Soft_I2C_Init routine.
Requires
Example
340
Also, START signal needs to be issued in order to use this function. See
Soft_I2C_Start routine.
dim take as word
...
' Read data and send the not_acknowledge signal
take = Soft_I2C_Read(0)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Soft_I2C_Write
Prototype
sub function Soft_I2C_Write(dim _Data as byte) as byte
- 0 if there were no errors.
Returns
- 1 if write collision was detected on the I2C bus.
Sends data byte via the I˛C bus.
Description Parameters :
- _Data: data to be sent
Soft I2C must be configured before using this function. See Soft_I2C_Init routine.
Requires
Example
Also, START signal needs to be issued in order to use this function. See
Soft_I2C_Start routine.
dim _data, error as byte
...
error = Soft_I2C_Write(data)
error = Soft_I2C_Write(0xA3)
Soft_I2C_Stop
Prototype
sub procedure Soft_I2C_Stop()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Issues STOP signal.
Requires
Soft I2C must be configured before using this function. See Soft_I2C_Init routine.
Example
' Issue STOP signal
Soft_I2C_Stop()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
341
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Soft_I2C_Break
Prototype
sub procedure Soft_I2C_Break()
Returns
Nothing.
All Software I2C Library functions can block the program flow (see note at the
top of this page). Call this routine from interrupt to unblock the program execuDescription tion. This mechanism is similar to WDT.
Note: Interrupts should be disabled before using Software I˛C routins again
(see note at the top of this page).
Requires
Nothing.
'Soft_I2C pinout definition
dim Soft_I2C_Scl_Output
as sbit at PORTC.B0
dim Soft_I2C_Sda_Output
as sbit at PORTC.B1
dim Soft_I2C_Scl_Input
as sbit at PINC.B0
dim Soft_I2C_Sda_Input
as sbit at PINC.B1
dim Soft_I2C_Scl_Pin_Direction as sbit at DDRC.B0
dim Soft_I2C_Sda_Pin_Direction as sbit at DDRC.B1
'End of Soft_I2C pinout definition
dim counter as byte
Example
sub procedure Timer0Overflow_ISR() org 0x12
counter = 0
if (counter >= 20) then
Soft_I2C_Break()
counter = 0
'reset counter
else
Inc(counter)
'increment counter
end if
end sub
main:
TOIE0_bit
TCCR0_bit
= 1
= 5
SREG_I_bit = 0
'Timer0 overflow interrupt enable
'Start timer with 1024 prescaler
'Interrupt disable
...
'try Soft_I2C_Init with blocking prevention mechanism
SREG_I_bit = 1
'Interrupt enable
Soft_I2C_Init()
SREG_I_bit = 0
'Interrupt disable
...
end.
342
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Example
The example demonstrates Software I˛C Library routines usage. The AVR MCU is
connected (SCL, SDA pins) to PCF8583 RTC (real-time clock). Program reads date
and time are read from the RTC and prints it on Lcd.
program RTC_Read
dim seconds, minutes, hours, _day, _month, year as byte
date/time variables
' Software I2C connections
dim Soft_I2C_Scl_Output
as sbit
Soft_I2C_Sda_Output
as sbit
Soft_I2C_Scl_Input
as sbit
Soft_I2C_Sda_Input
as sbit
Soft_I2C_Scl_Direction as sbit
Soft_I2C_Sda_Direction as sbit
' End Software I2C connections
' Lcd module connections
dim LCD_RS as sbit at PORTD.B2
LCD_EN as sbit at PORTD.B3
LCD_D4 as sbit at PORTD.B4
LCD_D5 as sbit at PORTD.B5
LCD_D6 as sbit at PORTD.B6
LCD_D7 as sbit at PORTD.B7
LCD_RS_Direction as sbit at
LCD_EN_Direction as sbit at
LCD_D4_Direction as sbit at
LCD_D5_Direction as sbit at
LCD_D6_Direction as sbit at
LCD_D7_Direction as sbit at
' End Lcd module connections
at
at
at
at
at
at
' Global
PORTC.B0
PORTC.B1
PINC.B0
PINC.B1
DDRC.B0
DDRC.B1
DDRD.B2
DDRD.B3
DDRD.B4
DDRD.B5
DDRD.B6
DDRD.B7
'--------------------- Reads time and date information from RTC
(PCF8583)
sub procedure Read_Time()
Soft_I2C_Start()
' Issue start signal
Soft_I2C_Write(0xA0)
' Address PCF8583, see PCF8583 datasheet
Soft_I2C_Write(2)
' Start from address 2
Soft_I2C_Start()
' Issue repeated start signal
Soft_I2C_Write(0xA1)
' Address PCF8583 for reading R/W=1
seconds = Soft_I2C_Read(1)
' Read seconds byte
minutes = Soft_I2C_Read(1)
' Read minutes byte
hours = Soft_I2C_Read(1)
' Read hours byte
_day = Soft_I2C_Read(1)
' Read year/day byte
_month = Soft_I2C_Read(0)
' Read weekday/month byte}
Soft_I2C_Stop()
' Issue stop signal}
end sub
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
343
CHAPTER 6
Libraries
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
'-------------------- Formats date and time
sub procedure Transform_Time()
seconds = ((seconds and 0xF0) >> 4)*10 + (seconds and 0x0F)
Transform seconds
minutes = ((minutes and 0xF0) >> 4)*10 + (minutes and 0x0F)
Transform months
hours
= ((hours and 0xF0) >> 4)*10 + (hours and 0x0F)
Transform hours
year
=
(_day and 0xC0) >> 6
Transform year
_day
= ((_day and 0x30) >> 4)*10
+ (_day and 0x0F)
Transform day
_month
= ((_month and 0x10) >> 4)*10 + (_month and 0x0F)
Transform month
end sub
'
'
'
'
'
'
'-------------------- Output values to Lcd
sub procedure Display_Time()
Lcd_Chr(1, 6, (_day / 10)
+ 48)
' Print tens digit of day
variable
Lcd_Chr(1, 7, (_day mod 10)
+ 48) ' Print oness digit of day
variable
Lcd_Chr(1, 9, (_month / 10) + 48)
Lcd_Chr(1,10, (_month mod 10) + 48)
Lcd_Chr(1,15, year
+ 56)
' Print year vaiable + 8
(start from year 2008)
Lcd_Chr(2, 6, (hours / 10)
+ 48)
Lcd_Chr(2, 7, (hours mod 10)
+ 48)
Lcd_Chr(2, 9, (minutes / 10) + 48)
Lcd_Chr(2,10, (minutes mod 10) + 48)
Lcd_Chr(2,12, (seconds / 10) + 48)
Lcd_Chr(2,13, (seconds mod 10) + 48)
end sub
'------------------ Performs project-wide init
sub procedure Init_Main()
Soft_I2C_Init()
' Initialize Soft I2C communication
Lcd_Init()
' Initialize Lcd
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CLEAR)
' Clear Lcd display
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CURSOR_OFF)
' Turn cursor off
Lcd_Out(1,1,"Date:")
' Prepare and output static text on Lcd
Lcd_Chr(1,8,":")
Lcd_Chr(1,11,":")
Lcd_Out(2,1,"Time:")
Lcd_Chr(2,8,":")
Lcd_Chr(2,11,":")
Lcd_Out(1,12,"200")
end sub
344
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
'----------------- Main sub procedure
main:
Init_Main()
' Perform initialization
while TRUE
Read_Time()
Transform_Time()
Display_Time()
wend
end.
' Endless loop
' Read time from RTC(PCF8583)
' Format date and time
' Prepare and display on Lcd
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
345
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SOFTWARE SPI LIBRARY
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR provides routines for implementing Software SPI communication. These routines are hardware independent and can be used with any
MCU. The Software SPI Library provides easy communication with other devices via
SPI: A/D converters, D/A converters, MAX7219, LTC1290, etc.
Library configuration:
-
SPI to Master mode
Clock value = 20 kHz.
Data sampled at the middle of interval.
Clock idle state low.
Data sampled at the middle of interval.
Data transmitted at low to high edge.
Note: The Software SPI library implements time-based activities, so interrupts need
to be disabled when using it.
External dependencies of Software SPI Library
The following variables
must be defined in all
projects using Software
SPI Library:
dim Chip_Select as
sbit sfr external
dim SoftSpi_SDI as
sbit sfr external
dim SoftSpi_SDO as
sbit sfr external
dim SoftSpi_CLK as
sbit sfr external
dim
Chip_Select_Direction
as sbit sfr external
dim
SoftSpi_SDI_Direction
as sbit sfr external
dim
SoftSpi_SDO_Direction
as sbit sfr external
dim
SoftSpi_CLK_Direction
as sbit sfr external
346
Description:
Chip select line.
Data In line.
Data Out line.
Clock line.
Direction of the Chip
Select pin.
Direction of the Data In
pin.
Direction of the Data Out
pin
Direction of the Clock pin.
Example :
dim Chip_Select as
sbit at PORTB.B0
dim SoftSpi_SDI as
sbit at PINB.B6
dim SoftSpi_SDO as
sbit at PORTB.B5
dim SoftSpi_CLK as
sbit at PORTB.B7
dim
Chip_Select_Direction
as sbit at DDRB.B0
dim
SoftSpi_SDI_Direction
as sbit at DDRB.B6
dim
SoftSpi_SDO_Direction
as sbit at DDRB.B5
dim
SoftSpi_CLK_Direction
as sbit at DDRB.B7
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Routines
- Soft_SPI_Init
- Soft_SPI_Read
- Soft_SPI_Write
Soft_SPI_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Soft_SPI_Init()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Configures and initializes the software SPI module.
Global variables:
Requires
-
Chip_Select: Chip select line
SoftSpi_SDI: Data in line
SoftSpi_SDO: Data out line
SoftSpi_CLK: Data clock line
Chip_Select_Direction: Direction
SoftSpi_SDI_Direction: Direction
SoftSpi_SDO_Direction: Direction
SoftSpi_CLK_Direction: Direction
of
of
of
of
the
the
the
the
Chip select pin
Data in pin
Data out pin
Data clock pin
must be defined before using this function.
Example
' soft_spi pinout definition
dim Chip_Select as sbit at PORTB.B0
dim SoftSpi_SDI as sbit at PINB.B6
dim SoftSpi_SDO as sbit at PORTB.B5
dim SoftSpi_CLK as sbit at PORTB.B7
dim Chip_Select_Direction as sbit at
dim SoftSpi_SDI_Direction as sbit at
dim SoftSpi_SDO_Direction as sbit at
dim SoftSpi_CLK_Direction as sbit at
' end of soft_spi pinout definition
DDRB.B0
DDRB.B6
DDRB.B5
DDRB.B7
...
Soft_SPI_Init() ' Init Soft_SPI
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
347
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Soft_SPI_Read
Prototype
sub function Soft_SPI_Read(dim sdata as byte) as word
Returns
Byte received via the SPI bus.
This routine performs 3 operations simultaneously. It provides clock for the Software SPI bus, reads a byte and sends a byte.
Description
Parameters :
- sdata: data to be sent.
Requires
Soft SPI must be initialized before using this function. See Soft_SPI_Init routine.
Example
dim data_read as byte
data_send as byte
...
' Read a byte and assign it to data_read variable
' (data_send byte will be sent via SPI during the Read operation)
data_read = Soft_SPI_Read(data_send)
Soft_SPI_Write
Prototype
sub procedure Soft_SPI_Write(dim sdata as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
This routine sends one byte via the Software SPI bus.
Description Parameters :
- sdata: data to be sent.
348
Requires
Soft SPI must be initialized before using this function. See Soft_SPI_Init routine.
Example
' Write a byte to the Soft SPI bus
Soft_SPI_Write(0xAA)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Example
This code demonstrates using library routines for Soft_SPI communication. Also, this
example demonstrates working with Microchip's MCP4921 12-bit D/A converter.
program Soft_SPI
' DAC module connections
dim Chip_Select as sbit at
SoftSpi_CLK as sbit at
SoftSpi_SDI as sbit at
SoftSpi_SDO as sbit at
PORTB.0
PORTB.7
PINB.6
PORTB.5
dim Chip_Select_Direction as
SoftSpi_CLK_Direction as
SoftSpi_SDI_Direction as
SoftSpi_SDO_Direction as
' End DAC module connections
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
' Note: Input signal
at
at
at
at
DDRB.0
DDRB.7
DDRB.6
DDRB.5
dim value as word
sub procedure InitMain()
DDA0_bit = 0
DDA1_bit = 0
Chip_Select = 1
Chip_Select_Direction = 1
Soft_Spi_Init()
end sub
'
'
'
'
'
Set PA0 pin as input
Set PA1 pin as input
Deselect DAC
Set CS# pin as Output
Initialize Soft_SPI
' DAC increments (0..4095) --> output voltage (0..Vref)
sub procedure DAC_Output(dim valueDAC as word)
dim temp as byte
Chip_Select = 0
' Select DAC chip
' Send High Byte
temp = word(valueDAC >> 8) and 0x0F
' Store valueDAC[11..8] to
temp[3..0]
temp = temp or 0x30
MCP4921 datasheet
Soft_SPI_Write(temp)
' Send Low Byte
temp = valueDAC
Soft_SPI_Write(temp)
Chip_Select = 1
end sub
main:
InitMain()
' Define DAC setting, see
' Send high byte via Soft SPI
' Store valueDAC[7..0] to temp[7..0]
' Send low byte via Soft SPI
' Deselect DAC chip
' Perform main initialization
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
349
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
value = 2048
' When program starts, DAC gives
'
the output in the mid-range
while (TRUE)
' Endless loop
if ((PINA0_bit) and (value < 4095)) then
' If PA0 button is
pressed
Inc(value)
'
increment value
else
if ((PINA1_bit) and (value > 0)) then
' If PA1 button is
pressed
Dec(value)
'
decrement value
end if
end if
DAC_Output(value)
Delay_ms(1)
wend
end.
350
' Send value to DAC chip
' Slow down key repeat pace
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SOFTWARE UART LIBRARY
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR provides routines for implementing Software UART
communication. These routines are hardware independent and can be used with
any MCU. The Software UART Library provides easy communication with other
devices via the RS232 protocol.
Note: The Software UART library implements time-based activities, so interrupts
need to be disabled when using it.
External dependencies of Software UART Library
The following variables
must be defined in all
projects using Software
UART Library:
dim Soft_UART_Rx_Pin
as sbit sfr external
dim Soft_UART_Tx_Pin
as sbit sfr external
Description:
Receive line.
Transmit line.
Example :
dim Soft_UART_Rx_Pin
as sbit at PIND.B0
dim Soft_UART_Tx_Pin
as sbit at PORTD.B1
dim
Soft_UART_Rx_Pin_Dire Direction of the Receive
ction as sbit sfr
pin.
external
dim
Soft_UART_Rx_Pin_Dire
ction as sbit at
DDRD.B0
dim
Soft_UART_Tx_Pin_Dire Direction of the Transmit
ction as sbit sfr
pin.
external
dim
Soft_UART_Tx_Pin_Dire
ction as sbit at
DDRD.B1
Library Routines
-
Soft_UART_Init
Soft_UART_Read
Soft_UART_Write
Soft_UART_Break
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
351
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Soft_UART_Init
Prototype
sub function Soft_UART_Init(dim baud_rate as longword, dim
inverted as byte) as byte
- 2 - error, requested baud rate is too low
- 1 - error, requested baud rate is too high
- 0 - successfull initialization
Returns
Configures and initializes the software UART module.
Parameters :
- baud_rate: baud rate to be set. Maximum baud rate depends on the MCU’s
clock and working conditions.
- inverted: inverted output flag. When set to a non-zero value, inverted logic
Description
on output is used.
Software UART routines use Delay_Cyc routine. If requested baud rate is too
low then calculated parameter for calling Delay_Cyc exceeeds Delay_Cyc argument range.
If requested baud rate is too high then rounding error of Delay_Cyc argument
corrupts Software UART timings.
Global variables:
Requires
-
Soft_UART_Rx_Pin: Receiver pin
Soft_UART_Tx_Pin: Transmiter pin
Soft_UART_Rx_Pin_Direction: Direction of the Receiver pin
Soft_UART_Tx_Pin_Direction: Direction of the Transmiter pin
must be defined before using this function.
Example
' Soft UART connections
dim Soft_UART_Rx_Pin
as sbit at PIND.B0
dim Soft_UART_Tx_Pin
as sbit at PORTD.B1
dim Soft_UART_Rx_Pin_Direction as sbit at DDRD.B0
dim Soft_UART_Tx_Pin_Direction as sbit at DDRD.B1
' Soft UART connections
' Initialize Software UART communication on pins Rx, Tx, at 9600
bps
Soft_UART_Init(9600, 0)
352
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Soft_UART_Read
Prototype
sub function Soft_UART_Read(dim byref error as byte) as byte
Returns
Byte received via UART.
The function receives a byte via software UART.
This is a blocking function call (waits for start bit). Programmer can unblock it by
calling Soft_UART_Break routine.
Description
Parameters :
- error: Error flag. Error code is returned through this variable.
- 0 - no error
- 1 - stop bit error
- 255 - user abort, Soft_UART_Break called
Requires
Example
Software UART must be initialized before using this function. See the
Soft_UART_Init routine.
dim data as byte
error as byte
...
' wait until data is received
do
data = Soft_Uart_Read(error)
loop until (error = 0)
' Now we can work with data:
if (data) then
...
end if
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
353
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Soft_UART_Write
Prototype
sub procedure Soft_UART_Write(udata as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
This routine sends one byte via the Software UART bus.
Description Parameters :
- udata: data to be sent.
Software UART must be initialized before using this function. See the
Soft_UART_Init routine.
Requires
Example
354
Be aware that during transmission, software UART is incapable of receiving
data – data transfer protocol must be set in such a way to prevent loss of information.
dim some_byte as byte
...
' Write a byte via Soft Uart
some_byte = 0x0A
Soft_Uart_Write(some_byte)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Soft_UART_Break
Prototype
sub procedure Soft_UART_Break()
Returns
Nothing.
Description
Soft_UART_Read is blocking routine and it can block the program flow. Call this
routine from interrupt to unblock the program execution. This mechanism is similar to WDT.
Note: Interrupts should be disabled before using Software UART routines again
(see note at the top of this page).
Requires
Nothing.
dim data1, error, counter as byte
sub procedure Timer0Overflow_ISR() org 0x12
counter = 0
if (counter >= 20) then
Soft_UART_Break()
counter = 0
' reset counter
else
Inc(counter)
' increment counter
end if
end sub
main:
Example
TOIE0_bit
enable
TCCR0_bit
prescaler
= 1
' Timer0 overflow interrupt
= 5
' Start timer with 1024
SREG_I_bit = 0
' Interrupt disable
...
Soft_UART_Init(9600)
Soft_UART_Write(0x55)
...
' try Soft_UART_Read with blocking prevention mechanism
SREG_I_bit = 1
' Interrupt enable
data1 = Soft_UART_Read(&error)
SREG_I_bit = 0
' Interrupt disable
...
end.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
355
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Example
This example demonstrates simple data exchange via software UART. If MCU is
connected to the PC, you can test the example from the mikroBasic PRO for AVR
USART Terminal Tool.
program Soft_UART
' Soft UART connections
dim Soft_UART_Rx_Pin as sbit at PIND.B0
Soft_UART_Tx_Pin as sbit at PORTD.B1
Soft_UART_Rx_Pin_Direction as sbit at DDRD.B0
Soft_UART_Tx_Pin_Direction as sbit at DDRD.B1
' End Soft UART connections
dim error_, counter, byte_read as byte
main:
DDRB = 0xFF
PORTB = 0
' Auxiliary variables
' Set PORTB as output (error signalization)
' No error
error_ = Soft_UART_Init(9600, 0) ' Initialize Soft UART at 9600 bps
if (error_ > 0) then
PORTB = error_
' Signalize Init error
while TRUE
nop
' Stop program
wend
end if
Delay_ms(100)
for counter = "z" to "A" step -1
Soft_UART_Write(counter)
Delay_ms(100)
next counter
' Send bytes from 'z' downto 'A'
while TRUE
' Endless loop
byte_read = Soft_UART_Read(error_) ' Read byte, then test error flag
if (error_ <> 0) then
' If error was detected
PORTB = error_
'
signal it on PORTB
else
Soft_UART_Write(byte_read)
' If error was not detected, return byte read
end if
wend
end.
356
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SOUND LIBRARY
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR provides a Sound Library to supply users with routines
necessary for sound signalization in their applications. Sound generation needs
additional hardware, such as piezo-speaker (example of piezo-speaker interface is
given on the schematic at the bottom of this page).
External dependencies of Sound Library
The following variables
must be defined in all
projects using Sound
Library:
Description:
dim Sound_Play_Pin as
Sound output pin.
sbit sfr external
Example :
dim Sound_Play_Pin as
sbit at PORTC.B3
dim
dim
Sound_Play_Pin_Direct Direction of the Sound out- Sound_Play_Pin_Direct
ion as sbit sfr
ion as sbit at
put pin.
external
DDRC.B3
Library Routines
- Sound_Init
- Sound_Play
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
357
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Sound_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Sound_Init()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Configures the appropriate MCU pin for sound generation.
Global variables:
Requires
- Sound_Play_Pin: Sound output pin
- Sound_Play_Pin_Direction: Direction of the Sound output pin
must be defined before using this function.
Example
' Sound library connections
dim Sound_Play_Pin as sbit at PORTC.B3
dim Sound_Play_Pin_Direction as sbit at DDRC.B3
' End of Sound library connections
...
Sound_Init()
Sound_Play
Prototype
sub procedure Sound_Play(dim freq_in_Hz as word, dim duration_ms
as word)
Returns
Nothing.
Generates the square wave signal on the appropriate pin.
Description
Parameters :
- freq_in_Hz: signal frequency in Hertz (Hz)
- duration_ms: signal duration in miliseconds (ms)
358
Requires
In order to hear the sound, you need a piezo speaker (or other hardware) on
designated port. Also, you must call Sound_Init to prepare hardware for output
before using this function.
Example
' Play sound of 1KHz in duration of 100ms
Sound_Play(1000, 100)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Example
The example is a simple demonstration of how to use the Sound Library for playing
tones on a piezo speaker.
program Sound
' Sound connections
dim Sound_Play_Pin as sbit at PORTC.B3
dim Sound_Play_Pin_direction as sbit at DDRC.B3
' End Sound connections
sub procedure Tone1
Sound_Play(500, 200)
end sub
' Frequency = 500Hz, Duration = 200ms
sub procedure Tone2
Sound_Play(555, 200)
end sub
' Frequency = 555Hz, Duration = 200ms
sub procedure Tone3
Sound_Play(625, 200)
end sub
' Frequency = 625Hz, Duration = 200ms
sub procedure Melody
Tone1() Tone2() Tone3()
Tone1() Tone2() Tone3()
Tone1() Tone2() Tone3()
Tone1() Tone2() Tone3()
Tone1() Tone2() Tone3()
Tone3() Tone3() Tone2()
end sub
sub procedure ToneA
Sound_Play(1250, 20)
end sub
' Plays the melody "Yellow house"
Tone3()
Tone3()
Tone3()
Tone2() Tone1()
' Tones used in Melody2 function
sub procedure ToneC
Sound_Play(1450, 20)
end sub
sub procedure ToneE
Sound_Play(1650, 80)
end sub
sub procedure Melody2
' Plays Melody2
dim counter as byte
for counter = 9 to 1 step -1
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
359
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
ToneA
ToneC
ToneE
next counter
end sub
main:
DDRB = 0x00
Delay_ms(2000)
Sound_Init()
Sound_Play(2000, 1000)
ond
360
' Configure PORTB as input
' Initialize sound pin
' Play starting sound, 2kHz, 1 sec-
while TRUE
if (PINB.7 <> 0) then
Tone1()
while (PINB.7 <> 0)
nop
wend
end if
' endless loop
' If PORTB.7 is pressed play Tone1
if (PINB.6 <> 0) then
Tone2()
while (PINB.6 <> 0)
nop
wend
end if
' If PORTB.6 is pressed play Tone2
if (PINB.5 <> 0) then
Tone3()
while (PINB.5 <> 0)
nop
wend
end if
' If PORTB.5 is pressed play Tone3
if (PINB.4 <> 0) then
Melody2()
while (PINB.4 <> 0)
nop
wend
end if
' If PORTB.4 is pressed play Melody2
if (PINB.3 <> 0) then
Melody()
while (PINB.3)
nop
wend
end if
wend
end.
' If PORTB.3 is pressed play Melody
' Wait for button to be released
' Wait for button to be released
' Wait for button to be released
' Wait for button to be released
' Wait for button to be released
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
HW Connection
Example of Sound Library sonnection
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
361
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI LIBRARY
mikroBasic PRO for AVR provides a library for comfortable with SPI work in Master mode. The
AVR MCU can easily communicate with other devices via SPI: A/D converters, D/A converters,
MAX7219, LTC1290, etc.
Note: Some AVR MCU's have alternative SPI ports, which SPI signals can be redirected to by
setting or clearing SPIPS (SPI Pin Select) bit of the MCUCR register. Please consult the appropriate datasheet.
Library Routines
-
SPI1_Init
SPI1_Init_Advanced
SPI1_Read
SPI1_Write
SPI1_Init
SPI1_Init
Prototype
sub procedure SPI1_Init()
Returns
Nothing.
This routine configures and enables SPI module with the following settings:
Description
-
362
master mode
8 bit data transfer
most significant bit sent first
serial clock low when idle
data sampled on leading edge
serial clock = fosc/4
Requires
MCU must have SPI module.
Example
' Initialize the SPI module with default settings
SPI1_Init()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI1_Init_Advanced
Prototype
sub procedure SPI1_Init_Advanced(dim mode, fcy_div,
clock_and_edge as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Configures and initializes SPI. SPI1_Init_Advanced or SPI1_Init needs to be
called before using other functions of SPI Library.
Parameters mode, fcy_div and clock_and_edge determine the work mode for
SPI, and can have the following values:
Mask
Predefined library
const
Description
SPI mode constants:
0x10
Master mode
_SPI_MASTER
0x00
Slave mode
_SPI_SLAVE
Clock rate select constants:
Description
0x00
Sck = Fosc/4, Master mode
_SPI_FCY_DIV4
0x01
Sck = Fosc/16, Master mode
_SPI_FCY_DIV16
0x02
Sck = Fosc/64, Master mode
_SPI_FCY_DIV64
0x03
Sck = Fosc/128, Master mode
_SPI_FCY_DIV128
0x04
Sck = Fosc/2, Master mode
_SPI_FCY_DIV2
0x05
Sck = Fosc/8, Master mode
_SPI_FCY_DIV8
0x06
Sck = Fosc/32, Master mode
_SPI_FCY_DIV32
SPI clock polarity and phase constants:
0x00
0x04
0x08
0x0C
Clock idle
on
Clock idle
on
level is low, sample
rising edge
level is low, sample
falling edge
Clock idle level is high, sample
on rising edge
Clock idle level is high, sample
on falling edge
_SPI_CLK_LO_LEADING
_SPI_CLK_LO_TRAILING
_SPI_CLK_HI_LEADING
_SPI_CLK_HI_TRAILING
Note: Some SPI clock speeds are not supported by all AVR MCUs and these
are: Fosc/2, Fosc/8, Fosc/32. Please consult appropriate datasheet.
Requires
MCU must have SPI module.
Example
' Set SPI to the Master Mode, clock = Fosc/32 , clock idle level
is high, data sampled on falling edge:
SPI1_Init_Advanced(_SPI_MASTER, _SPI_FCY_DIV32,
_SPI_CLK_HI_TRAILING);
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
363
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI1_Read
Prototype
sub function SPI1_Read(dim buffer as byte) as byte
Returns
Received data.
Reads one byte from the SPI bus.
Description
Parameters :
- buffer: dummy data for clock generation (see device Datasheet for SPI
modules implementation details)
Requires
SPI module must be initialized before using this function. See SPI1_Init and
SPI1_Init_Advanced routines.
Example
' read a byte from the SPI bus
dim take, dummy1 as byte
...
take = SPI1_Read(dummy1)
SPI1_Write
Prototype
sub procedure SPI1_Write(dim wrdata as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes byte via the SPI bus.
Description Parameters :
- wrdata: data to be sent
364
Requires
SPI module must be initialized before using this function. See SPI1_Init and
SPI1_Init_Advanced routines.
Example
' write a byte to the SPI bus
dim buffer as byte
...
SPI1_Write(buffer)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Example
The code demonstrates how to use SPI library functions for communication between
SPI module of the MCU and Microchip's MCP4921 12-bit D/A converter
program SPI
' DAC module connections
dim Chip_Select as sbit at PORTB.B0
Chip_Select_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B0
' End DAC module connections
dim value as word
sub procedure InitMain()
DDA0_bit = 0
DDA1_bit = 0
Chip_Select = 1
Chip_Select_Direction = 1
SPI1_Init()
end sub
'
'
'
'
'
Set PA0 pin as input
Set PA1 pin as input
Deselect DAC
Set CS# pin as Output
Initialize SPI1 module
' DAC increments (0..4095) --> output voltage (0..Vref)
sub procedure DAC_Output(dim valueDAC as word)
dim temp as byte
Chip_Select = 0
' Select DAC chip
' Send High Byte
temp = word(valueDAC >> 8) and 0x0F
' Store valueDAC[11..8] to
temp[3..0]
temp = temp or 0x30 ' Define DAC setting, see MCP4921 datasheet
SPI1_Write(temp)
' Send high byte via SPI
' Send Low Byte
temp = valueDAC
SPI1_Write(temp)
Chip_Select = 1
end sub
main:
InitMain()
value = 2048
while TRUE
' Store valueDAC[7..0] to temp[7..0]
' Send low byte via SPI
' Deselect DAC chip
' Perform main initialization
' When program starts, DAC gives
'
the output in the mid-range
' Endless loop
if ((PINA0_bit) and (value < 4095)) then ' If PA0 button is
pressed
Inc(value)
'
increment value
else
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
365
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
if ((PINA1_bit) and (value > 0)) then
Dec(value)
end if
end if
DAC_Output(value)
Delay_ms(1)
wend
end.
' If PA1 button is pressed
'
decrement value
' Send value to DAC chip
' Slow down key repeat pace
HW Connection
SPI HW connection
366
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI ETHERNET LIBRARY
The ENC28J60 is a stand-alone Ethernet controller with an industry standard Serial
Peripheral Interface (SPI™). It is designed to serve as an Ethernet network interface
for any controller equipped with SPI.
The ENC28J60 meets all of the IEEE 802.3 specifications. It incorporates a number
of packet filtering schemes to limit incoming packets. It also provides an internal
DMA module for fast data throughput and hardware assisted IP checksum calculations. Communication with the host controller is implemented via two interrupt pins
and the SPI, with data rates of up to 10 Mb/s. Two dedicated pins are used for LED
link and network activity indication.
This library is designed to simplify handling of the underlying hardware (ENC28J60).
It works with any AVR MCU with integrated SPI and more than 4 Kb ROM memory.
SPI Ethernet library supports:
- IPv4 protocol.
- ARP requests.
- ICMP echo requests.
- UDP requests.
- TCP requests (no stack, no packet reconstruction).
- packet fragmentation is NOT supported.
Note: Prior to calling any of this library routines, Spi_Rd_Ptr needs to be initialized
with the appropriate SPI_Read routine.
Note: The appropriate hardware SPI module must be initialized before using any of
the SPI Ethernet library routines. Refer to SPI Library.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
367
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
External dependencies of SPI Ethernet Library
The following variables
must be defined in all
projects using SPI Ethernet Library:
dim SPI_Ethernet_CS
as sbit sfr external
dim SPI_Ethernet_RST
as sbit sfr external
dim
SPI_Ethernet_CS_Direc
tion as sbit sfr
external
dim
SPI_Ethernet_RST_Dire
ction as sbit sfr
external
Description:
Example :
dim SPI_Ethernet_CS
ENC28J60 chip select pin. as sbit at PORTB.B4
dim SPI_Ethernet_RST
as sbit at PORTB.B5
dim
Direction of the ENC28J60 SPI_Ethernet_CS_Direc
tion as sbit at
chip select pin.
DDRB.B4
dim
Direction of the ENC28J60 SPI_Ethernet_RST_Dire
ction as sbit at
reset pin.
DDRB.B5
ENC28J60 reset pin.
The following routines must be defined in all project
using SPI Ethernet Library:
sub function Spi_Ethernet_UserTCP(dim remoteHost
as ^byte,
dim
remotePort as word,
dim
localPort as word,
dim
reqLength as word) as word
Description:
Refer to the
library example
at the bottom
TCP request
of this page
handler.
sub function Spi_Ethernet_UserUDP(dim remoteHost
as ^byte,
dim remotePort
UDP request
as word,
dim destPort as handler.
word,
dim reqLength as
word) as word
368
Example :
for code
implementation.
Refer to the
library example
at the bottom
of this page
for code
implementation.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Routines
-
Spi_Ethernet_Init
Spi_Ethernet_Enable
Spi_Ethernet_Disable
Spi_Ethernet_doPacket
Spi_Ethernet_putByte
Spi_Ethernet_putBytes
Spi_Ethernet_putString
Spi_Ethernet_putConstString
Spi_Ethernet_putConstBytes
Spi_Ethernet_getByte
Spi_Ethernet_getBytes
Spi_Ethernet_UserTCP
Spi_Ethernet_UserUDP
Spi_Ethernet_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Ethernet_Init(dim mac as ^byte, dim ip as
^byte, dim fullDuplex as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
This is MAC module routine. It initializes ENC28J60 controller. This function is
internaly splited into 2 parts to help linker when coming short of memory.
ENC28J60 controller settings (parameters not mentioned here are set to default):
- receive buffer start address : 0x0000.
- receive buffer end address : 0x19AD.
- transmit buffer start address: 0x19AE.
- transmit buffer end address : 0x1FFF.
- RAM buffer read/write pointers in auto-increment mode.
- receive filters set to default: CRC + MAC Unicast + MAC Broadcast in OR mode.
Description
- flow control with TX and RX pause frames in full duplex mode.
- frames are padded to 60 bytes + CRC.
- maximum packet size is set to 1518.
- Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap: 0x15 in full duplex mode; 0x12 in half duplex mode.
- Non-Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap: 0x0012 in full duplex mode; 0x0C12 in
half duplex mode.
- Collision window is set to 63 in half duplex mode to accomodate some
ENC28J60 revisions silicon bugs.
- CLKOUT output is disabled to reduce EMI generation.
- half duplex loopback disabled.
- LED configuration: default (LEDA-link status, LEDB-link activity).
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
369
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Parameters:
Description
Requires
- mac: RAM buffer containing valid MAC address.
- ip: RAM buffer containing valid IP address.
- fullDuplex: ethernet duplex mode switch. Valid values: 0 (half duplex mode)
and 1 (full duplex mode).
The appropriate hardware SPI module must be previously initialized.
const Spi_Ethernet_HALFDUPLEX = 0
const Spi_Ethernet_FULLDUPLEX = 1
Example
myMacAddr as
myIpAddr as
...
myMacAddr[0]
myMacAddr[1]
myMacAddr[2]
myMacAddr[3]
myMacAddr[4]
myMacAddr[5]
byte[6] ' my MAC address
byte[4] ' my IP addr
=
=
=
=
=
=
0x00
0x14
0xA5
0x76
0x19
0x3F
myIpAddr[0]
myIpAddr[1]
myIpAddr[2]
myIpAddr[3]
=
=
=
=
192
168
20
60
Spi_Init()
Spi_Ethernet_Init(PORTC, 0, PORTC, 1, myMacAddr, myIpAddr,
Spi_Ethernet_FULLDUPLEX)
370
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Spi_Ethernet_Enable
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Ethernet_Enable(dim enFlt as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
This is MAC module routine. This routine enables appropriate network traffic on
the ENC28J60 module by the means of it's receive filters (unicast, multicast,
broadcast, crc). Specific type of network traffic will be enabled if a corresponding bit of this routine's input parameter is set. Therefore, more than one type of
network traffic can be enabled at the same time. For this purpose, predefined
library constants (see the table below) can be ORed to form appropriate input
value.
Parameters:
- enFlt: network traffic/receive filter flags. Each bit corresponds to the
appropriate network traffic/receive filter:
Bit
Mask
0
0x01
MAC Broadcast traffic/receive filter
Spi_Ethernet_BROADCAST
flag. When set, MAC broadcast
traffic will be enabled.
1
0x02
MAC Multicast traffic/receive filter
flag. When set, MAC multicast traf- Spi_Ethernet_MULTICAST
fic will be enabled.
2
0x04
not used
none
3
0x08
not used
none
4
0x10
not used
none
5
0x20
CRC check flag. When set, packets with invalid CRC field will be
discarded.
Spi_Ethernet_CRC
6
0x40
not used
none
7
0x80
MAC Unicast traffic/receive filter
flag. When set, MAC unicast traffic Spi_Ethernet_UNICAST
will be enabled.
Description
Description
Predefined library const
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
371
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Description
Note: Advance filtering available in the ENC28J60 module such as Pattern
Match, Magic Packet and Hash Table can not be enabled by this routine.
Additionaly, all filters, except CRC, enabled with this routine will work in OR
mode, which means that packet will be received if any of the enabled filters
accepts it.
Note: This routine will change receive filter configuration on-the-fly. It will not, in
any way, mess with enabling/disabling receive/transmit logic or any other part of
the ENC28J60 module. The ENC28J60 module should be properly cofigured by
the means of Spi_Ethernet_Init routine.
Requires
Ethernet module has to be initialized. See Spi_Ethernet_Init.
Example
Spi_Ethernet_Enable(Spi_Ethernet_CRC or Spi_Ethernet_UNICAST) '
enable CRC checking and Unicast traffic
Spi_Ethernet_Disable
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Ethernet_Disable(dim disFlt as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
This is MAC module routine. This routine disables appropriate network traffic on
the ENC28J60 module by the means of it's receive filters (unicast, multicast,
broadcast, crc). Specific type of network traffic will be disabled if a corresponding bit of this routine's input parameter is set. Therefore, more than one type of
network traffic can be disabled at the same time. For this purpose, predefined
library constants (see the table below) can be ORed to form appropriate input
Description
value.
Parameters:
- disFlt: network traffic/receive filter flags. Each bit corresponds to the
appropriate network traffic/receive filter:
372
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Bit Mask
Description
Predefined library const
MAC Broadcast traffic/receive filter
0
0x01 flag. When set, MAC broadcast traffic Spi_Ethernet_BROADCAST
will be disabled.
MAC Multicast traffic/receive filter
1
0x02 flag. When set, MAC multicast traffic
Spi_Ethernet_MULTICAST
will be disabled.
Description
2
0x04 not used
none
3
0x08 not used
none
4
0x10 not used
none
5
0x20 will be disabled and packets with invalid Spi_Ethernet_CRC
CRC check flag. When set, CRC check
CRC field will be accepted.
6
0x40 not used
7
0x80 When set, MAC unicast traffic will be Spi_Ethernet_UNICAST
none
MAC Unicast traffic/receive filter flag.
disabled.
Note: Advance filtering available in the ENC28J60 module such as Pattern
Match, Magic Packet and Hash Table can not be disabled by this routine.
Note: This routine will change receive filter configuration on-the-fly. It will not, in
any way, mess with enabling/disabling receive/transmit logic or any other part of
the ENC28J60 module. The ENC28J60 module should be properly cofigured by
the means of Spi_Ethernet_Init routine.
Requires
Ethernet module has to be initialized. See Spi_Ethernet_Init.
Example
Spi_Ethernet_Disable(Spi_Ethernet_CRC or Spi_Ethernet_UNICAST) '
disable CRC checking and Unicast traffic
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
373
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Spi_Ethernet_doPacket
Prototype
sub function Spi_Ethernet_doPacket() as byte
Returns
- 0 - upon successful packet processing (zero packets received or received
packet processed successfully).
- 1 - upon reception error or receive buffer corruption. ENC28J60 controller
needs to be restarted.
- 2 - received packet was not sent to us (not our IP, nor IP broadcast address).
- 3 - received IP packet was not IPv4.
- 4 - received packet was of type unknown to the library.
This is MAC module routine. It processes next received packet if such exists.
Packets are processed in the following manner:
- ARP & ICMP requests are replied automatically.
- upon TCP request the Spi_Ethernet_UserTCP function is called for further
Description
processing.
- upon UDP request the Spi_Ethernet_UserUDP function is called for further
processing.
Note: Spi_Ethernet_doPacket must be called as often as possible in user's code.
374
Requires
Ethernet module has to be initialized. See Spi_Ethernet_Init.
Example
while TRUE
...
Spi_Ethernet_doPacket() ' process received packets
...
wend
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Spi_Ethernet_putByte
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Ethernet_putByte(dim v as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
This is MAC module routine. It stores one byte to address pointed by the current ENC28J60 write pointer (EWRPT).
Description
Parameters:
- v: value to store
Requires
Ethernet module has to be initialized. See Spi_Ethernet_Init.
Example
dim data as byte
...
Spi_Ethernet_putByte(data) ' put an byte into ENC28J60 buffer
Spi_Ethernet_putBytes
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Ethernet_putBytes(dim ptr as ^byte, dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
This is MAC module routine. It stores requested number of bytes into ENC28J60
RAM starting from current ENC28J60 write pointer (EWRPT) location.
Description Parameters:
- ptr: RAM buffer containing bytes to be written into ENC28J60 RAM.
- n: number of bytes to be written.
Requires
Ethernet module has to be initialized. See Spi_Ethernet_Init.
Example
dim
buffer as byte[17]
...
buffer = "mikroElektronika"
...
Spi_Ethernet_putBytes(buffer, 16) ' put an RAM array into
ENC28J60 buffer
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
375
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Spi_Ethernet_putConstBytes
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Ethernet_putConstBytes(const ptr as ^byte, dim
n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
This is MAC module routine. It stores requested number of const bytes into
ENC28J60 RAM starting from current ENC28J60 write pointer (EWRPT) location.
Description Parameters:
- ptr: const buffer containing bytes to be written into ENC28J60 RAM.
- n: number of bytes to be written.
Requires
Ethernet module has to be initialized. See Spi_Ethernet_Init.
Example
const
buffer as byte[17]
...
buffer = "mikroElektronika"
...
Spi_Ethernet_putConstBytes(buffer, 16) ' put a const array into
ENC28J60 buffer
Spi_Ethernet_putString
Prototype
sub function Spi_Ethernet_putString(dim ptr as ^byte) as word
Returns
Number of bytes written into ENC28J60 RAM.
This is MAC module routine. It stores whole string (excluding null termination) into
ENC28J60 RAM starting from current ENC28J60 write pointer (EWRPT) location.
Description
Parameters:
- ptr: string to be written into ENC28J60 RAM.
376
Requires
Ethernet module has to be initialized. See Spi_Ethernet_Init.
Example
dim
buffer as string[16]
...
buffer = "mikroElektronika"
...
Spi_Ethernet_putString(buffer) ' put a RAM string into ENC28J60
buffer
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Spi_Ethernet_putConstString
Prototype
sub function Spi_Ethernet_putConstString(const ptr as ^byte) as word
Returns
Number of bytes written into ENC28J60 RAM.
This is MAC module routine. It stores whole const string (excluding null termination) into ENC28J60 RAM starting from current ENC28J60 write pointer (EWRPT)
location.
Description
Parameters:
- ptr: const string to be written into ENC28J60 RAM.
Requires
Ethernet module has to be initialized. See Spi_Ethernet_Init.
Example
const
buffer as string[16]
...
buffer = "mikroElektronika"
...
Spi_Ethernet_putConstString(buffer) ' put a const string into
ENC28J60 buffer
Spi_Ethernet_getByte
Prototype
sub function Spi_Ethernet_getByte() as byte
Returns
Byte read from ENC28J60 RAM.
Description
This is MAC module routine. It fetches a byte from address pointed to by current ENC28J60 read pointer (ERDPT).
Requires
Ethernet module has to be initialized. See Spi_Ethernet_Init.
Example
dim buffer as byte<>
...
buffer = Spi_Ethernet_getByte() ' read a byte from ENC28J60
buffer
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
377
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Spi_Ethernet_getBytes
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Ethernet_getBytes(dim ptr as ^byte, dim addr as
word, dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
This is MAC module routine. It fetches equested number of bytes from
ENC28J60 RAM starting from given address. If value of 0xFFFF is passed as the
address parameter, the reading will start from current ENC28J60 read pointer
(ERDPT) location.
Description
Parameters:
- ptr: buffer for storing bytes read from ENC28J60 RAM.
- addr: ENC28J60 RAM start address. Valid values: 0..8192.
- n: number of bytes to be read.
378
Requires
Ethernet module has to be initialized. See Spi_Ethernet_Init.
Example
dim
buffer as byte[16]
...
Spi_Ethernet_getBytes(buffer, 0x100, 16) ' read 16 bytes,
starting from address 0x100
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Spi_Ethernet_UserTCP
Prototype
sub function Spi_Ethernet_UserTCP(dim remoteHost as ^byte, dim
remotePort as word, dim localPort as word, dim reqLength as word)
as word
- 0 - there should not be a reply to the request.
- Length of TCP/HTTP reply data field - otherwise.
Returns
This is TCP module routine. It is internally called by the library. The user
accesses to the TCP/HTTP request by using some of the Spi_Ethernet_get routines. The user puts data in the transmit buffer by using some of the Spi_Ethernet_put routines. The function must return the length in bytes of the TCP/HTTP
reply, or 0 if there is nothing to transmit. If there is no need to reply to the
TCP/HTTP requests, just define this function with return(0) as a single statement.
Description Parameters:
-
remoteHost: client's IP address.
remotePort: client's TCP port.
localPort: port to which the request is sent.
reqLength: TCP/HTTP request data field length.
Note: The function source code is provided with appropriate example projects.
The code should be adjusted by the user to achieve desired reply.
Requires
Ethernet module has to be initialized. See Spi_Ethernet_Init.
Example
This function is internally called by the library and should not be called by the
user's code.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
379
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Spi_Ethernet_UserUDP
Prototype
sub function Spi_Ethernet_UserUDP(dim remoteHost as ^byte, dim
remotePort as word, dim destPort as word, dim reqLength as word)
as word
- 0 - there should not be a reply to the request.
- Length of UDP reply data field - otherwise.
Returns
This is UDP module routine. It is internally called by the library. The user
accesses to the UDP request by using some of the Spi_Ethernet_get routines.
The user puts data in the transmit buffer by using some of the Spi_Ethernet_put
routines. The function must return the length in bytes of the UDP reply, or 0 if
nothing to transmit. If you don't need to reply to the UDP requests, just define
this function with a return(0) as single statement.
Description
Parameters:
-
remoteHost: client's IP address.
remotePort: client's port.
destPort: port to which the request is sent.
reqLength: UDP request data field length.
Note: The function source code is provided with appropriate example projects.
The code should be adjusted by the user to achieve desired reply.
380
Requires
Ethernet module has to be initialized. See Spi_Ethernet_Init.
Example
This function is internally called by the library and should not be called by the
user's code.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Example
This code shows how to use the AVR mini Ethernet library :
- the board will reply to ARP & ICMP echo requests
- the board will reply to UDP requests on any port :
returns the request in upper char with a header made of remote host IP &
port number
- the board will reply to HTTP requests on port 80, GET method with pathnames :
/ will return the HTML main page
/s will return board status as text string
/t0 ... /t7 will toggle P3.b0 to P3.b7 bit and return HTML main page
all other requests return also HTML main page.
Main program code:
include eth_enc28j60_utils 'this is where you should write implementation for UDP and HTTP
'***********************************
'* RAM variables
'*
'***********************************
dim myMacAddr
as byte[6]
' my MAC address
myIpAddr
as byte[4]
' my IP address
gwIpAddr
as byte[4]
' gateway (router) IP address
ipMask
as byte[4]
' network mask (for example :
255.255.255.0)
dnsIpAddr
as byte[4]
' DNS server IP address
' mE ehternet NIC pinout
SPI_Ethernet_Rst as sbit at PORTB.B4
SPI_Ethernet_CS as sbit at PORTB.B5
SPI_Ethernet_Rst_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B4
SPI_Ethernet_CS_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B5
' end ethernet NIC definitions
dim i as word
main:
' set PORTC as input
DDRC = 0
' set PORTD as output
DDRD = 0xFF
httpCounter = 0
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
381
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
myMacAddr[0]
myMacAddr[1]
myMacAddr[2]
myMacAddr[3]
myMacAddr[4]
myMacAddr[5]
0x00
0x14
0xA5
0x76
0x19
0x3F
myIpAddr[0]
myIpAddr[1]
myIpAddr[2]
myIpAddr[3]
=
=
=
=
192
168
20
60
gwIpAddr[0]
gwIpAddr[1]
gwIpAddr[2]
gwIpAddr[3]
=
=
=
=
192
168
20
6
ipMask[0]
ipMask[1]
ipMask[2]
ipMask[3]
255
255
255
0
=
=
=
=
dnsIpAddr[0]
dnsIpAddr[1]
dnsIpAddr[2]
dnsIpAddr[3]
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
=
=
=
=
=
=
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
=
=
=
=
192
168
20
1
starts ENC28J60 with :
reset bit on PORTB.B4
CS bit on PORTB.B5
my MAC & IP address
full duplex
SPI1_Init_Advanced(_SPI_MASTER, _SPI_FCY_DIV2, _SPI_CLK_LO_LEADING)
SPI_Rd_Ptr = @SPI1_Read
SPI_Ethernet_UserTCP_Ptr = @SPI_Ethernet_UserTCP
SPI_Ethernet_UserUDP_Ptr = @SPI_Ethernet_UserUDP
SPI_Ethernet_Init(myMacAddr, myIpAddr, SPI_Ethernet_FULLDUPLEX)
' dhcp will not be used here, so use preconfigured addresses
SPI_Ethernet_confNetwork(ipMask, gwIpAddr, dnsIpAddr)
while TRUE
' do forever
SPI_Ethernet_doPacket()
' process incoming Ethernet packets
'*
'* add your stuff here if needed
'* SPI_Ethernet_doPacket() must be called as often as possible
'* otherwise packets could be lost
'*
wend
end.
382
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Module eth_enc28j60_utils code:
module eth_enc28j60_utils
'************************************************************
'* ROM constant strings
'************************************************************
const httpHeader as string[30] = "HTTP/1.1 200 OK"+chr(10)+"Contenttype: "
' HTTP header
const httpMimeTypeHTML as string[13]
= "text/html"+chr(10)+chr(10)
' HTML MIME type
const
httpMimeTypeScript
as
string[14]
=
"text/plain"+chr(10)+chr(10)
' TEXT MIME type
const httpMethod as string[5] = "GET /"
'*
'* web page, splited into 2 parts :
'* when coming short of ROM, fragmented data is handled more efficiently by linker
'*
'* this HTML page calls the boards to get its status, and builds
itself with javascript
'*
const indexPage as string[513] =
"<meta http-equiv=" + Chr(34) + "refresh" +
Chr(34) + " content=" + Chr(34) + "3;url=http://192.168.20.60" +
Chr(34) + ">" +
"<HTML><HEAD></HEAD><BODY>"+
"<h1>AVR + ENC28J60 Mini Web Server</h1>"+
"<a href=/>Reload</a>"+
"<script src=/s></script>"+
"<table><tr><td valign=top><table border=1
style="+chr(34)+"font-size:20px
;font-family:
terminal
;"+chr(34)+">"+
"<tr><th colspan=2>PINC</th></tr>"+
"<script>"+
"var str,i;"+
"str="+chr(34)+chr(34)+";"+
"for(i=0;i<8;i++)"+
"{str+="+chr(34)+"<tr><td bgcolor=pink>BUTTON
#"+chr(34)+"+i+"+chr(34)+"</td>"+chr(34)+";"+
"if(PINC&(1<<i)){str+="+chr(34)+"<td
bgcolor=red>ON"+chr(34)+";}"+
"else {str+="+chr(34)+"<td
bgcolor=#cccccc>OFF"+chr(34)+";}"+
"str+="+chr(34)+"</td></tr>"+chr(34)+";}"+
"document.write(str) ;"+
"</script>"
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
383
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
const indexPage2 as string[466] =
"</table></td><td>"+
"<table border=1 style="+chr(34)+"font-size:20px
;font-family: terminal ;"+chr(34)+">"+
"<tr><th colspan=3>PORTD</th></tr>"+
"<script>"+
"var str,i;"+
"str="+chr(34)+chr(34)+";"+
"for(i=0;i<8;i++)"+
"{str+="+chr(34)+"<tr><td bgcolor=yellow>LED
#"+chr(34)+"+i+"+chr(34)+"</td>"+chr(34)+";"+
"if(PORTD&(1<<i)){str+="+chr(34)+"<td
bgcolor=red>ON"+chr(34)+";}"+
"else {str+="+chr(34)+"<td
bgcolor=#cccccc>OFF"+chr(34)+";}"+
"str+="+chr(34)+"</td><td><a
href=/t"+chr(34)+"+i+"+chr(34)+">Toggle</a></td></tr>"+chr(34)+";}"+
"document.write(str) ;"+
"</script>"+
"</table></td></tr></table>"+
"This is HTTP request
#<script>document.write(REQ)</script></BODY></HTML>"
dim
sub
dim
sub
dim
getRequest as byte[15] ' HTTP request buffer
dyna
as byte[31] ' buffer for dynamic response
httpCounter as word
' counter of HTTP requests
function SPI_Ethernet_UserTCP(dim byref remoteHost as byte[4],
remotePort, localPort, reqLength as word) as word
function SPI_Ethernet_UserUDP(dim byref remoteHost as byte[4],
remotePort, destPort, reqLength as word) as word
implements
'*******************************************
'* user defined sub functions
'*
'*
'* put the constant string pointed to by s to the ENC transmit buffer
'*
sub function putConstString (dim const s as ^byte) as word
result = 0
while(s^ <> 0)
SPI_Ethernet_putByte(s^)
Inc(s)
Inc(result)
wend
end sub
384
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
'*
'* put the string pointed to by s to the ENC transmit buffer
'*
sub function putString(dim byref s as byte[100]) as word
result = 0
while(s[result] <> 0)
SPI_Ethernet_putByte(s[result])
Inc(result)
wend
end sub
'*
'* this sub function is called by the library
'* the user accesses to the HTTP request by successive calls to
SPI_Ethernet_getByte()
'* the user puts data in the transmit buffer by successive calls to
SPI_Ethernet_putByte()
'* the sub function must return the length in bytes of the HTTP reply,
or 0 if nothing to transmit
'*
'* if you don"t need to reply to HTTP requests,
'* just define this sub function with a return(0) as single statement
'*
'*
sub function Spi_Ethernet_UserTCP(dim byref remoteHost as byte[4],
dim remotePort, localPort, reqLength
as word) as word
dim len_ as word
' my reply length
bitMask as byte
' for bit mask
tmp as byte[5]
' to copy const array to ram for memcmp
len_ = 0
if(localPort <> 80) then
result = 0
exit
end if
' I listen only to web request on port 80
' get 10 first bytes only of the request, the rest does not matter here
for len_ = 0 to 9
getRequest[len_] = SPI_Ethernet_getByte()
next len_
getRequest[len_] = 0
len_ = 0
while (httpMethod[len_] <> 0)
tmp[len_] = httpMethod[len_]
Inc(len_)
wend
len_ = 0
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
385
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
if(memcmp (@getRequest, @tmp, 5) <> 0) then
supported here
result = 0
exit
end if
httpCounter = httpCounter + 1
' only GET method is
' one more request done
if(getRequest[5] = "s") then
' if request path
name starts with s, store dynamic data in transmit buffer
' the text string replied by this request can be interpreted
as javascript statements
' by browsers
len_ = putConstString(@httpHeader) ' HTTP header
len_ = len_ + putConstString(@httpMimeTypeScript)
' with text
MIME type
' add PORTC value (buttons) to reply
len_ = len_ + putString("var PINC= ")
WordToStr(PINC, dyna)
len_ = len_ + putString(dyna)
len_ = len_ + putString(";")
' add PORTD value (LEDs) to reply
len_ = len_ + putString("var PORTD= ")
WordToStr(PORTD, dyna)
len_ = len_ + putString(dyna)
len_ = len_ + putString(";")
' add HTTP requests counter to reply
WordToStr(httpCounter, dyna)
len_ = len_ + putString("var REQ=
")
len_ = len_ + putString(dyna)
len_ = len_ + putString(";")
else
if(getRequest[5] = "t") then
' if request path
name starts with t, toggle PORTD (LED) bit number that comes after
bitMask = 0
if(isdigit(getRequest[6]) <> 0) then
' if 0 <=
bit number <= 9, bits 8 & 9 does not exist but does not matter
bitMask = getRequest[6] - "0"
' convert ASCII
to integer
bitMask = 1 << bitMask
' create bit mask
PORTD
= PORTD xor bitMask
' toggle PORTD
with xor operator
end if
end if
end if
386
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
if(len_ = 0) then
' what do to by default
len_ = putConstString(@httpHeader)
' HTTP header
len_ = len_ + putConstString(@httpMimeTypeHTML)
' with HTML
MIME type
len_ = len_ + putConstString(@indexPage) ' HTML page first part
len_ = len_ + putConstString(@indexPage2)
' HTML page
second part
end if
result = len_
' return to the library with the
number of bytes to transmit
end sub
' *
' * this sub function is called by the library
' * the user accesses to the UDP request by successive calls to
SPI_Ethernet_getByte()
' * the user puts data in the transmit buffer by successive calls to
SPI_Ethernet_putByte()
' * the sub function must return the length in bytes of the UDP reply,
or 0 if nothing to transmit
' *
' * if you don"t need to reply to UDP requests,
' * just define this sub function with a return(0) as single statement
' *
' *
sub function Spi_Ethernet_UserUDP(dim byref remoteHost as byte[4],
dim remotePort, destPort, reqLength
as word) as word
dim len_ as word
' my reply length
ptr as ^byte
' pointer to the dynamic buffer
tmp as string[5]
' reply is made of the remote host IP address in human readable
format
byteToStr(remoteHost[0], dyna)
' first IP address byte
dyna[3] = "."
byteToStr(remoteHost[1], tmp)
dyna[4] = tmp[0]
dyna[5] = tmp[1]
dyna[6] = tmp[2]
dyna[7] = "."
' second
byteToStr(remoteHost[2], tmp)
dyna[8] = tmp[0]
dyna[9] = tmp[1]
dyna[10] = tmp[2]
dyna[11] = "."
' second
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
387
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
byteToStr(remoteHost[3], tmp)
dyna[12] = tmp[0]
dyna[13] = tmp[1]
dyna[14] = tmp[2]
dyna[15] = ":"
' second
' add separator
' then remote host port number
WordToStr(remotePort, tmp)
dyna[16] = tmp[0]
dyna[17] = tmp[1]
dyna[18] = tmp[2]
dyna[19] = tmp[3]
dyna[20] = tmp[4]
dyna[21] = " "
dyna[22] = "["
WordToStr(destPort, tmp)
dyna[23] = tmp[0]
dyna[24] = tmp[1]
dyna[25] = tmp[2]
dyna[26] = tmp[3]
dyna[27] = tmp[4]
dyna[28] = "]"
dyna[29] = " "
dyna[30] = 0
' the total length of the request is the length of the dynamic
string plus the text of the request
len_ = 30 + reqLength
' puts the dynamic string into the transmit buffer
ptr = @dyna
while (ptr^ <> 0)
SPI_Ethernet_putByte(ptr^)
ptr = ptr + 1
wend
' then puts the request string converted into upper char into
the transmit buffer
while(reqLength <> 0)
SPI_Ethernet_putByte(SPI_Ethernet_getByte())
reqLength = reqLength - 1
wend
result = len_
of the UDP reply
end sub
' back to the library with the length
end.
388
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
HW Connection
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
389
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI GRAPHIC LCD LIBRARY
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR provides a library for operating Graphic Lcd 128x64
(with commonly used Samsung KS108/KS107 controller) via SPI interface.
For creating a custom set of Glcd images use Glcd Bitmap Editor Tool.
Note: The library uses the SPI module for communication. User must initialize SPI
module before using the SPI Graphic Lcd Library.
Note: This Library is designed to work with the mikroElektronika's Serial Lcd/Glcd
Adapter Board pinout, see schematic at the bottom of this page for details.
External dependencies of SPI Graphic Lcd Library
The implementation of SPI Graphic Lcd Library routines is based on Port Expander
Library routines.
Prior to calling any of this library routines, Spi_Rd_Ptr needs to be initialized with the
appropriate SPI_Read routine.
External dependencies are the same as Port Expander Library external dependencies.
Library Routines
Basic routines:
-
SPI_Glcd_Init
SPI_Glcd_Set_Side
SPI_Glcd_Set_Page
SPI_Glcd_Set_X
SPI_Glcd_Read_Data
SPI_Glcd_Write_Data
Advanced routines:
-
390
SPI_Glcd_Fill
SPI_Glcd_Dot
SPI_Glcd_Line
SPI_Glcd_V_Line
SPI_Glcd_H_Line
SPI_Glcd_Rectangle
SPI_Glcd_Box
SPI_Glcd_Circle
SPI_Glcd_Set_Font
SPI_Glcd_Write_Char
SPI_Glcd_Write_Text
SPI_Glcd_Image
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_Glcd_Init
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Glcd_Init(dim DeviceAddress as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Initializes the Glcd module via SPI interface.
Description
Parameters :
- DeviceAddress: SPI expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
Global variables :
Requires
-
SPExpanderCS: Chip Select line
SPExpanderRST: Reset line
SPExpanderCS_Direction: Direction of the Chip Select pin
SPExpanderRST_Direction: Direction of the Reset pin
must be defined before using this function.
SPI module needs to be initialized. See SPI1_Init and SPI1_Init_Advanced routines.
Example
' port expander pinout definition
dim SPExpanderCS as sbit at PORTB.B1
SPExpanderRST as sbit at PORTB.B0
SPExpanderCS_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B1
SPExpanderRST_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B0
...
' If Port Expander Library uses SPI1 module :
SPI1_Init_Advanced(_SPI_MASTER, _SPI_FCY_DIV2, _SPI_CLK_HI_TRAILING) ' Initialize SPI module used with PortExpander
SPI_Rd_Ptr = @SPI1_Read
' Pass pointer to SPI
Read function of used SPI module
SPI_Glcd_Init(0)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
391
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_Glcd_Set_Side
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Glcd_Set_Side(dim x_pos as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Selects Glcd side. Refer to the Glcd datasheet for detail explanation.
Parameters :
- x_pos: position on x-axis. Valid values: 0..127
Description
The parameter x_pos specifies the Glcd side: values from 0 to 63 specify the
left side, values from 64 to 127 specify the right side.
Note: For side, x axis and page layout explanation see schematic at the bottom
of this page.
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Glcd_Init routines.
The following two lines are equivalent, and both of them select the left side of Glcd:
Example
SPI_Glcd_Set_Side(0)
SPI_Glcd_Set_Side(10)
SPI_Glcd_Set_Page
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Glcd_Set_Page(dim page as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Selects page of Glcd.
Parameters :
Description
- page: page number. Valid values: 0..7
Note: For side, x axis and page layout explanation see schematic at the bottom
of this page.
392
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Glcd_Init routines.
Example
SPI_Glcd_Set_Page(5)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_Glcd_Set_X
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Glcd_Set_X(dim x_pos as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sets x-axis position to x_pos dots from the left border of Glcd within the selected side.
Parameters :
Description
- x_pos: position on x-axis. Valid values: 0..63
Note: For side, x axis and page layout explanation see schematic at the bottom
of this page.
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Glcd_Init routines.
Example
SPI_Glcd_Set_X(25)
SPI_Glcd_Read_Data
Prototype
sub function SPI_Glcd_Read_Data() as byte
Returns
One byte from Glcd memory.
Description
Reads data from the current location of Glcd memory and moves to the next
location.
Glcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Glcd_Init routines.
Requires
Example
Glcd side, x-axis position and page should be set first. See the functions
SPI_Glcd_Set_Side, SPI_Glcd_Set_X, and SPI_Glcd_Set_Page.
dim data as byte
...
data = SPI_Glcd_Read_Data()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
393
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_Glcd_Write_Data
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Glcd_Write_Data(dim Ddata as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes one byte to the current location in Glcd memory and moves to the next
location.
Description
Parameters :
- Ddata: data to be written
Glcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Glcd_Init routines.
Requires
Example
Glcd side, x-axis position and page should be set first. See the functions
SPI_Glcd_Set_Side, SPI_Glcd_Set_X, and SPI_Glcd_Set_Page.
dim ddata as byte
...
SPI_Glcd_Write_Data(ddata)
SPI_Glcd_Fill
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Glcd_Fill(dim pattern as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Fills Glcd memory with byte pattern.
Parameters :
Description - pattern: byte to fill Glcd memory with
To clear the Glcd screen, use SPI_Glcd_Fill(0).
To fill the screen completely, use SPI_Glcd_Fill(0xFF).
394
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Glcd_Init routines.
Example
' Clear screen
SPI_Glcd_Fill(0)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_Glcd_Dot
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Glcd_Dot(dim x_pos as byte, dim y_pos as byte,
dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a dot on Glcd at coordinates (x_pos, y_pos).
Parameters :
Description
- x_pos: x position. Valid values: 0..127
- y_pos: y position. Valid values: 0..63
- color: colx_pos as byte; page_num as byte; color as byte)
or parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the dot state: 0 clears dot, 1 puts a dot, and 2
inverts dot state.
Note: For x and y axis layout explanation see schematic at the bottom of this page.
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Glcd_Init routines.
Example
' Invert the dot in the upper left corner
SPI_Glcd_Dot(0, 0, 2)
SPI_Glcd_Line
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Glcd_Line(dim x_start as integer, dim y_start
as integer, dim x_end as integer, dim y_end as integer, dim color
as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a line on Glcd.
Parameters :
Description -
x_start: x coordinate of the line start. Valid values: 0..127
y_start: y coordinate of the line start. Valid values: 0..63
x_end: x coordinate of the line end. Valid values: 0..127
y_end: y coordinate of the line end. Valid values: 0..63
color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
Parameter color determines the line color: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts each dot.
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Glcd_Init routines.
Example
' Draw a line between dots (0,0) and (20,30)
SPI_Glcd_Line(0, 0, 20, 30, 1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
395
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_Glcd_V_Line
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Glcd_V_Line(dim y_start as byte, dim y_end as
byte, dim x_pos as byte, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a vertical line on Glcd.
Parameters :
Description
-
y_start: y coordinate of the line start. Valid values: 0..63
y_end: y coordinate of the line end. Valid values: 0..63
x_pos: x coordinate of vertical line. Valid values: 0..127
color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
Parameter color determines the line color: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts each dot.
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Glcd_Init routines.
Example
' Draw a vertical line between dots (10,5) and (10,25)
SPI_Glcd_V_Line(5, 25, 10, 1)
SPI_Glcd_H_Line
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Glcd_V_Line(dim x_start as byte, dim x_end as
byte, dim y_pos as byte, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a horizontal line on Glcd.
Parameters :
Description -
x_start: x coordinate of the line start. Valid values: 0..127
x_end: x coordinate of the line end. Valid values: 0..127
y_pos: y coordinate of horizontal line. Valid values: 0..63
color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the line color: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts
each dot.
396
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Glcd_Init routines.
Example
' Draw a horizontal line between dots (10,20) and (50,20)
SPI_Glcd_H_Line(10, 50, 20, 1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_Glcd_Rectangle
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Glcd_Rectangle(dim x_upper_left as byte, dim
y_upper_left as byte, dim x_bottom_right as byte, dim
y_bottom_right as byte, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a rectangle on Glcd.
Parameters :
- x_upper_left: x coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner. Valid values: 0..127
- y_upper_left: y coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner. Valid values: 0..63
- x_bottom_right: x coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner. Valid
Description
values: 0..127
- y_bottom_right: y coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner. Valid
values: 0..63
- color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the color of the rectangle border: 0 white, 1
black, and 2 inverts each dot.
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Glcd_Init routines.
Example
' Draw a rectangle between dots (5,5) and (40,40)
SPI_Glcd_Rectangle(5, 5, 40, 40, 1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
397
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_Glcd_Box
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Glcd_Box(dim x_upper_left as byte, dim
y_upper_left as byte, dim x_bottom_right as byte, dim
y_bottom_right as byte, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a box on Glcd.
Parameters :
- x_upper_left: x coordinate of the upper left box corner. Valid values: 0..127
- y_upper_left: y coordinate of the upper left box corner. Valid values: 0..63
Description
- x_bottom_right: x coordinate of the lower right box corner. Valid values: 0..127
- y_bottom_right: y coordinate of the lower right box corner. Valid values: 0..63
- color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the color of the box fill: 0 white, 1 black, and 2
inverts each dot.
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Glcd_Init routines.
Example
' Draw a box between dots (5,15) and (20,40)
SPI_Glcd_Box(5, 15, 20, 40, 1)
SPI_Glcd_Circle
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Glcd_Circle(dim x_center as integer, dim y_center as integer, dim radius as integer, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a circle on Glcd.
Parameters :
Description -
x_center: x coordinate of the circle center. Valid values: 0..127
y_center: y coordinate of the circle center. Valid values: 0..63
radius: radius size
color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the color of the circle line: 0 white, 1 black,
and 2 inverts each dot.
398
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Glcd_Init routine.
Example
' Draw a circle with center in (50,50) and radius=10
SPI_Glcd_Circle(50, 50, 10, 1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_Glcd_Set_Font
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Glcd_Set_Font(dim activeFont as longint, dim
aFontWidth as byte, dim aFontHeight as byte, dim aFontOffs as word)
Returns
Nothing.
Sets font that will be used with SPI_Glcd_Write_Char and SPI_Glcd_Write_Text
routines.
Parameters :
Description -
activeFont: font to be set. Needs to be formatted as an array of char
aFontWidth: width of the font characters in dots.
aFontHeight: height of the font characters in dots.
aFontOffs: number that represents difference between the mikroBasic PRO
character set and regular ASCII set (eg. if 'A' is 65 in ASCII character, and 'A'
is 45 in the mikroBasic PRO character set, aFontOffs is 20). Demo fonts
supplied with the library have an offset of 32, which means that they start with
space.
The user can use fonts given in the file “__Lib_GLCD_fonts.mbas” file located in
the Uses folder or create his own fonts.
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Glcd_Init routines.
Example
' Use the custom 5x7 font "myfont" which starts with space (32):
SPI_Glcd_Set_Font(@myfont, 5, 7, 32)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
399
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_Glcd_Write_Char
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Glcd_Write_Char(dim chr1 as byte, dim x_pos as
byte, dim page_num as byte, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Prints character on Glcd.
Parameters :
- chr1: character to be written
- x_pos: character starting position on x-axis. Valid values: 0..(127-FontWidth)
- page_num: the number of the page on which character will be written. Valid
Description
values: 0..7
- color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the color of the character: 0 white, 1 black,
and 2 inverts each dot.
Note: For x axis and page layout explanation see schematic at the bottom of
this page.
Glcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Glcd_Init routines.
Requires
Example
400
Use the SPI_Glcd_Set_Font to specify the font for display; if no font is specified, then the default 5x8 font supplied with the library will be used.
' Write character 'C' on the position 10 inside the page 2:
SPI_Glcd_Write_Char("C", 10, 2, 1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_Glcd_Write_Text
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Glcd_Write_Text(dim byref text as string[40],
dim x_pos as byte, dim page_numb as byte, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Prints text on Glcd.
Parameters :
- text: text to be written
- x_pos: text starting position on x-axis.
- page_num: the number of the page on which text will be written. Valid values: 0..7
Description
- color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the color of the text: 0 white, 1 black, and 2
inverts each dot.
Note: For x axis and page layout explanation see schematic at the bottom of
this page.
Glcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Glcd_Init routines.
Requires
Example
Use the SPI_Glcd_Set_Font to specify the font for display; if no font is specified, then the default 5x8 font supplied with the library will be used.
' Write text "Hello world!" on the position 10 inside the page 2:
SPI_Glcd_Write_Text("Hello world!", 10, 2, 1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
401
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_Glcd_Image
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Glcd_Image(dim const image as ^byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Displays bitmap on Glcd.
Parameters :
Description
- image: image to be displayed. Bitmap array can be located in both code and
RAM memory (due to the mikroBasic PRO for AVR pointer to const and
pointer to RAM equivalency).
Use the mikroBasic PRO’s integrated Glcd Bitmap Editor (menu option Tools ›
Glcd Bitmap Editor) to convert image to a constant array suitable for displaying on Glcd.
Requires
Glcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Glcd_Init routines.
Example
' Draw image my_image on Glcd
SPI_Glcd_Image(my_image)
Library Example
The example demonstrates how to communicate to KS0108 Glcd via the SPI module, using serial to parallel convertor MCP23S17.
program SPI_Glcd
include bitmap
' Port Expander module connections
dim SPExpanderRST as sbit at PORTB.0
SPExpanderCS as sbit at PORTB.1
SPExpanderRST_Direction as sbit at DDRB.0
SPExpanderCS_Direction as sbit at DDRB.1
' End Port Expander module connections
dim someText as char[20]
counter as byte
sub procedure Delay2S
delay_ms(2000)
end sub
402
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
main:
' If Port Expander Library uses SPI1 module
SPI1_Init_Advanced(_SPI_MASTER, _SPI_FCY_DIV2, _SPI_CLK_HI_TRAILING) ' Initialize SPI module used with PortExpander
Spi_Rd_Ptr = @SPI1_Read
' Pass pointer to
SPI Read sub function of used SPI module
' ' If Port Expander Library uses SPI2 module
'
SPI2_Init_Advanced(_SPI_MASTER,
_SPI_FCY_DIV2,
_SPI_CLK_HI_TRAILING) ' Initialize SPI module used with PortExpander
' Spi_Rd_Ptr = &SPI2_Read
' Pass pointer to
SPI Read sub function of used SPI module
SPI_Glcd_Init(0)
via SPI
SPI_Glcd_Fill(0x00)
while TRUE
SPI_Glcd_Image(@truck_bmp)
Delay2s() Delay2s()
SPI_Glcd_Fill(0x00)
Delay2s
SPI_Glcd_Box(62,40,124,56,1)
SPI_Glcd_Rectangle(5,5,84,35,1)
SPI_Glcd_Line(0, 63, 127, 0,1)
Delay2s()
counter = 5
while (counter < 60)
and vertical line
Delay_ms(250)
SPI_Glcd_V_Line(2, 54, counter, 1)
SPI_Glcd_H_Line(2, 120, counter, 1)
counter = counter + 5
wend
Delay2s()
' Initialize Glcd
' Clear Glcd
' Draw image
' Clear Glcd
' Draw box
' Draw rectangle
' Draw line
' Draw horizontal
SPI_Glcd_Fill(0x00)
' Clear Glcd
SPI_Glcd_Set_Font(@Character8x7, 8, 8, 32)
' Choose font
"Character8x7"
SPI_Glcd_Write_Text("mikroE", 5, 7, 2)
' Write string
for counter = 1 to 10 ' Draw circles
SPI_Glcd_Circle(63,32, 3*counter, 1)
next counter
Delay2s()
SPI_Glcd_Box(12,20, 70,63, 2)
Delay2s()
' Draw box
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
403
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_Glcd_Fill(0xFF)
' Fill Glcd
SPI_Glcd_Set_Font(@Character8x7, 8, 7, 32)
someText = "8x7 Font"
SPI_Glcd_Write_Text(someText, 5, 1, 2)
Delay2s()
' Change font
SPI_Glcd_Set_Font(@System3x6, 3, 5, 32)
someText = "3X5 CAPITALS ONLY"
SPI_Glcd_Write_Text(someText, 5, 3, 2)
Delay2s()
' Change font
SPI_Glcd_Set_Font(@font5x7, 5, 7, 32)
someText = "5x7 Font"
SPI_Glcd_Write_Text(someText, 5, 5, 2)
Delay2s()
' Change font
' Write string
' Write string
' Write string
SPI_Glcd_Set_Font(@FontSystem5x7_v2, 5, 7, 32) ' Change font
someText = "5x7 Font (v2)"
SPI_Glcd_Write_Text(someText, 5, 7, 2)
' Write string
Delay2s()
wend
end.
404
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
HW Connection
SPI Glcd HW connection
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
405
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI LCD LIBRARY
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR provides a library for communication with Lcd (with
HD44780 compliant controllers) in 4-bit mode via SPI interface.
For creating a custom set of Lcd characters use Lcd Custom Character Tool.
Note: The library uses the SPI module for communication. The user must initialize
the SPI module before using the SPI Lcd Library.
Note: This Library is designed to work with the mikroElektronika's Serial Lcd
Adapter Board pinout. See schematic at the bottom of this page for details.
External dependencies of SPI Lcd Library
The implementation of SPI Lcd Library routines is based on Port Expander Library
routines.
Prior to calling any of this library routines, Spi_Rd_Ptr needs to be initialized with the
appropriate SPI_Read routine.
External dependencies are the same as Port Expander Library external dependencies.
Library Routines
-
406
SPI_Lcd_Config
SPI_Lcd_Out
SPI_Lcd_Out_Cp
SPI_Lcd_Chr
SPI_Lcd_Chr_Cp
SPI_Lcd_Cmd
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_Lcd_Config
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Lcd_Config(dim DeviceAddress as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Initializes the Lcd module via SPI interface.
Description
Parameters :
- DeviceAddress: spi expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
Global variables :
Requires
-
SPExpanderCS: Chip Select line
SPExpanderRST: Reset line
SPExpanderCS_Direction: Direction of the Chip Select pin
SPExpanderRST_Direction: Direction of the Reset pin
must be defined before using this function.
SPI module needs to be initialized. See SPI1_Init and SPI1_Init_Advanced routines.
Example
' port expander pinout definition
dim SPExpanderCS as sbit at PORTB.B1
SPExpanderRST as sbit at PORTB.B0
SPExpanderCS_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B1
SPExpanderRST_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B0
...
' If Port Expander Library uses SPI1 module
SPI1_Init()
' Initialize SPI module used with
PortExpander
Spi_Rd_Ptr = @SPI1_Read
' Pass pointer to SPI Read function of used SPI module
SPI_Lcd_Config(0)
' initialize lcd over spi interface
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
407
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_Lcd_Out
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Lcd_Out(dim row as byte, dim column as byte,
dim byref text as string[20])
Returns
Nothing.
Prints text on the Lcd starting from specified position. Both string variables and
literals can be passed as a text.
Description
Parameters :
- row: starting position row number
- column: starting position column number
- text: text to be written
Requires
Lcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Lcd_Config routines.
Example
' Write text "Hello!" on Lcd starting from row 1, column 3:
SPI_Lcd_Out(1, 3, "Hello!")
SPI_Lcd_Out_Cp
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Lcd_Out_CP(dim text as string[19])
Returns
Nothing.
Prints text on the Lcd at current cursor position. Both string variables and literals can be passed as a text.
Description
Parameters :
- text: text to be written
408
Requires
Lcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Lcd_Config routines.
Example
' Write text "Here!" at current cursor position:
SPI_Lcd_Out_CP("Here!")
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_Lcd_Chr
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Lcd_Chr(dim Row as byte, dim Column as byte,
dim Out_Char as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Prints character on Lcd at specified position. Both variables and literals can be
passed as character.
Description
Parameters :
- Row: writing position row number
- Column: writing position column number
- Out_Char: character to be written
Requires
Lcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Lcd_Config routines.
Example
' Write character "i" at row 2, column 3:
SPI_Lcd_Chr(2, 3, 'i')
SPI_Lcd_Chr_Cp
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Lcd_Chr_CP(dim Out_Char as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Prints character on Lcd at current cursor position. Both variables and literals
can be passed as character.
Description
Parameters :
- Out_Char: character to be written
Requires
Lcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Lcd_Config routines.
Example
' Write character "e" at current cursor position:
SPI_Lcd_Chr_Cp('e')
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
409
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_Lcd_Cmd
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Lcd_Cmd(dim out_char as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sends command to Lcd.
Parameters :
Description
- out_char: command to be sent
Note: Predefined constants can be passed to the function, see Available SPI
Lcd Commands.
Requires
Lcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Lcd_Config routines.
Example
' Clear Lcd display:
SPI_Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CLEAR)
Available SPI Lcd Commands
Lcd Command
410
Purpose
LCD_FIRST_ROW
Move cursor to the 1st row
LCD_SECOND_ROW
Move cursor to the 2nd row
LCD_THIRD_ROW
Move cursor to the 3rd row
LCD_FOURTH_ROW
Move cursor to the 4th row
LCD_CLEAR
Clear display
LCD_RETURN_HOME
Return cursor to home position, returns a shifted display
to its original position. Display data RAM is unaffected.
LCD_CURSOR_OFF
Turn off cursor
LCD_UNDERLINE_ON
Underline cursor on
LCD_BLINK_CURSOR_ON
Blink cursor on
LCD_MOVE_CURSOR_LEFT
Move cursor left without changing display data RAM
LCD_MOVE_CURSOR_RIGHT
Move cursor right without changing display data RAM
LCD_TURN_ON
Turn Lcd display on
LCD_TURN_OFF
Turn Lcd display off
LCD_SHIFT_LEFT
Shift display left without changing display data RAM
LCD_SHIFT_RIGHT
Shift display right without changing display data RAM
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Example
This example demonstrates how to communicate Lcd via the SPI module, using
serial to parallel convertor MCP23S17.
program Spi_Lcd
dim text as char[17]
' Port Expander module connections
dim SPExpanderRST as sbit at PORTB.B0
SPExpanderCS as sbit at PORTB.B1
SPExpanderRST_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B0
SPExpanderCS_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B1
' End Port Expander module connections
main:
text = "mikroElektronika"
' If Port Expander Library uses SPI1 module
SPI1_Init()
' Initialize SPI module
used with PortExpander
Spi_Rd_Ptr = @SPI1_Read
' Pass pointer to SPI Read
sub function of used SPI module
' If Port Expander Library uses SPI2 module
' SPI2_Init()
' Initialize SPI module
used with PortExpander
' Spi_Rd_Ptr = &SPI2_Read
' Pass pointer to SPI Read
sub function of used SPI module
SPI_Lcd_Config(0)
' Initialize Lcd over SPI
interface
SPI_Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CLEAR)
' Clear display
SPI_Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CURSOR_OFF)
' Turn cursor off
SPI_Lcd_Out(1,6, "mikroE")
' Print text to Lcd, 1st
row, 6th column
SPI_Lcd_Chr_CP("!")
' Append "!"
SPI_Lcd_Out(2,1, text)
' Print text to Lcd, 2nd
row, 1st column
end.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
411
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
HW Connection
SPI Lcd HW connection
412
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI LCD8 (8-BIT INTERFACE) LIBRARY
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR provides a library for communication with Lcd (with
HD44780 compliant controllers) in 8-bit mode via SPI interface.
For creating a custom set of Lcd characters use Lcd Custom Character Tool.
Note: Library uses the SPI module for communication. The user must initialize the
SPI module before using the SPI Lcd Library.
Note: This Library is designed to work with mikroElektronika's Serial Lcd/Glcd
Adapter Board pinout, see schematic at the bottom of this page for details.
External dependencies of SPI Lcd Library
The implementation of SPI Lcd Library routines is based on Port Expander Library
routines.
Prior to calling any of this library routines, Spi_Rd_Ptr needs to be initialized with the
appropriate SPI_Read routine.
External dependencies are the same as Port Expander Library external dependencies.
Library Routines
-
SPI_Lcd8_Config
SPI_Lcd8_Out
SPI_Lcd8_Out_Cp
SPI_Lcd8_Chr
SPI_Lcd8_Chr_Cp
SPI_Lcd8_Cmd
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
413
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_Lcd8_Config
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Lcd8_Config(dim DeviceAddress as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Initializes the Lcd module via SPI interface.
Description
Parameters :
- DeviceAddress: spi expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
Global variables :
Requires
-
SPExpanderCS: Chip Select line
SPExpanderRST: Reset line
SPExpanderCS_Direction: Direction of the Chip Select pin
SPExpanderRST_Direction: Direction of the Reset pin
must be defined before using this function.
SPI module needs to be initialized. See SPI1_Init and SPI1_Init_Advanced routines.
Example
414
' port expander pinout definition
dim SPExpanderCS as sbit at PORTB.B1
SPExpanderRST as sbit at PORTB.B0
SPExpanderCS_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B1
SPExpanderRST_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B0
...
Spi1_Init()
' Initialize spi
interface
Spi_Rd_Ptr = @SPI1_Read
' Pass pointer to
SPI Read function of used SPI module
SPI_Lcd8_Config(0)
' Intialize lcd in
8bit mode via spi
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_Lcd8_Out
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Lcd8_Out(dim row as byte, dim column as byte,
dim byref text as string[19])
Returns
Nothing.
Prints text on Lcd starting from specified position. Both string variables and literals can be passed as a text.
Description
Parameters :
- row: starting position row number
- column: starting position column number
- text: text to be written
Requires
Lcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Lcd8_Config routines.
Example
' Write text "Hello!" on Lcd starting from row 1, column 3:
SPI_Lcd8_Out(1, 3, "Hello!")
SPI_Lcd8_Out_Cp
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Lcd8_Out_CP(dim text as string[19])
Returns
Nothing.
Prints text on Lcd at current cursor position. Both string variables and literals
can be passed as a text.
Description
Parameters :
- text: text to be written
Requires
Lcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Lcd8_Config routines.
Example
' Write text "Here!" at current cursor position:
SPI_Lcd8_Out_CP("Here!")
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
415
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_Lcd8_Chr
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Lcd8_Chr(dim Row as byte, dim Column as byte,
dim Out_Char as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Prints character on Lcd at specified position. Both variables and literals can be
passed as character.
Description
Parameters :
- row: writing position row number
- column: writing position column number
- out_char: character to be written
Requires
Lcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Lcd8_Config routines.
Example
' Write character "i" at row 2, column 3:
SPI_Lcd8_Chr(2, 3, 'i')
SPI_Lcd8_Chr_Cp
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Lcd8_Chr_CP(dim Out_Char as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Prints character on Lcd at current cursor position. Both variables and literals
can be passed as character.
Description
Parameters :
- out_char: character to be written
Requires
Lcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Lcd8_Config routines.
Print “e” at current cursor position:
Example
416
' Write character "e" at current cursor position:
SPI_Lcd8_Chr_Cp('e')
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_Lcd8_Cmd
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Lcd8_Cmd(dim out_char as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sends command to Lcd.
Parameters :
Description
- out_char: command to be sent
Note: Predefined constants can be passed to the function, see Available SPI
Lcd8 Commands.
Requires
Lcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Lcd8_Config routines.
Example
' Clear Lcd display:
SPI_Lcd8_Cmd(LCD_CLEAR)
Available SPI Lcd8 Commands
Lcd Command
Purpose
LCD_FIRST_ROW
Move cursor to the 1st row
LCD_SECOND_ROW
Move cursor to the 2nd row
LCD_THIRD_ROW
Move cursor to the 3rd row
LCD_FOURTH_ROW
Move cursor to the 4th row
LCD_CLEAR
Clear display
LCD_RETURN_HOME
Return cursor to home position, returns a shifted display
to its original position. Display data RAM is unaffected.
LCD_CURSOR_OFF
Turn off cursor
LCD_UNDERLINE_ON
Underline cursor on
LCD_BLINK_CURSOR_ON
Blink cursor on
LCD_MOVE_CURSOR_LEFT
Move cursor left without changing display data RAM
LCD_MOVE_CURSOR_RIGHT
Move cursor right without changing display data RAM
LCD_TURN_ON
Turn Lcd display on
LCD_TURN_OFF
Turn Lcd display off
LCD_SHIFT_LEFT
Shift display left without changing display data RAM
LCD_SHIFT_RIGHT
Shift display right without changing display data RAM
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
417
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Example
This example demonstrates how to communicate Lcd in 8-bit mode via the SPI module, using serial to parallel convertor MCP23S17.
program Spi_Lcd8_Test
dim text as char[16]
' Port Expander module connections
dim SPExpanderRST as sbit at PORTB.0
SPExpanderCS as sbit at PORTB.1
SPExpanderRST_Direction as sbit at DDRB.0
SPExpanderCS_Direction as sbit at DDRB.1
' End Port Expander module connections
main:
text = "mikroE"
' If Port Expander Library uses SPI1 module
SPI1_Init()
' Initialize SPI module used with PortExpander
Spi_Rd_Ptr = @SPI1_Read
' Pass pointer to SPI
Read sub function of used SPI module
' ' If Port Expander Library uses SPI2 module
' SPI2_Init()
' Initialize SPI module used with PortExpander
' Spi_Rd_Ptr = &SPI2_Read
' Pass pointer to SPI
Read sub function of used SPI module
SPI_Lcd8_Config(0)
8bit mode via SPI
SPI_Lcd8_Cmd(LCD_CLEAR)
SPI_Lcd8_Cmd(LCD_CURSOR_OFF)
SPI_Lcd8_Out(1,6, text)
1st row, 6th column...
SPI_Lcd8_Chr_CP("!")
SPI_Lcd8_Out(2,1, "mikroelektronika")
2nd row, 1st column...
SPI_Lcd8_Out(3,1, text)
more than two rows
SPI_Lcd8_Out(4,15, text)
more than two rows
end.
418
' Intialize Lcd in
' Clear display
' Turn cursor off
' Print text to Lcd,
' Append "!"
' Print text to Lcd,
' For Lcd modules with
' For Lcd modules with
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
HW Connection
SPI Lcd8 HW connection
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
419
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI T6963C GRAPHIC LCD LIBRARY
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR provides a library for working with Glcds based on
TOSHIBA T6963C controller via SPI interface. The Toshiba T6963C is a very popular Lcd controller for the use in small graphics modules. It is capable of controlling
displays with a resolution up to 240x128. Because of its low power and small outline it is most suitable for mobile applications such as PDAs, MP3 players or mobile
measurement equipment. Although this controller is small, it has a capability of displaying and merging text and graphics and it manages all interfacing signals to the
displays Row and Column drivers.
For creating a custom set of Glcd images use Glcd Bitmap Editor Tool.
Note: The library uses the SPI module for communication. The user must initialize
SPI module before using the SPI T6963C Glcd Library.
Note: This Library is designed to work with mikroElektronika's Serial Glcd 240x128
and 240x64 Adapter Boards pinout, see schematic at the bottom of this page for
details.
Note: Some mikroElektronika's adapter boards have pinout different from T6369C
datasheets. Appropriate relations between these labels are given in the table below:
Adapter Board T6369C datasheet
RS
C/D
R/W
/RD
E
/WR
External dependencies of SPI T6963C Graphic Lcd Library
The implementation of SPI T6963C Graphic Lcd Library routines is based on Port
Expander Library routines.
Prior to calling any of this library routines, Spi_Rd_Ptr needs to be initialized with the
appropriate SPI_Read routine.
External dependencies are the same as Port Expander Library external dependencies.
420
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Routines
-
SPI_T6963C_Config
SPI_T6963C_WriteData
SPI_T6963C_WriteCommand
SPI_T6963C_SetPtr
SPI_T6963C_WaitReady
SPI_T6963C_Fill
SPI_T6963C_Dot
SPI_T6963C_Write_Char
SPI_T6963C_Write_Text
SPI_T6963C_Line
SPI_T6963C_Rectangle
SPI_T6963C_Box
SPI_T6963C_Circle
SPI_T6963C_Image
SPI_T6963C_Sprite
SPI_T6963C_Set_Cursor
SPI_T6963C_ClearBit
SPI_T6963C_SetBit
SPI_T6963C_NegBit
SPI_T6963C_DisplayGrPanel
SPI_T6963C_DisplayTxtPanel
SPI_T6963C_SetGrPanel
SPI_T6963C_SetTxtPanel
SPI_T6963C_PanelFill
SPI_T6963C_GrFill
SPI_T6963C_TxtFill
SPI_T6963C_Cursor_Height
SPI_T6963C_Graphics
SPI_T6963C_Text
SPI_T6963C_Cursor
SPI_T6963C_Cursor_Blink
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
421
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_T6963C_Config
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_Config(dim width as word, dim height as
word, dim fntW as word, dim DeviceAddress as byte, dim wr as
byte, dim rd as byte, dim cd as byte, dim rst as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Initalizes the Graphic Lcd controller.
Parameters :
-
width: width of the Glcd panel
height: height of the Glcd panel
fntW: font width
DeviceAddress: SPI expander hardware address, see schematic at the
-
bottom of this page
wr: write signal pin on Glcd control port
rd: read signal pin on Glcd control port
cd: command/data signal pin on Glcd control port
rst: reset signal pin on Glcd control port
Display RAM organization:
The library cuts RAM into panels : a complete panel is one graphics panel followed by a text panel (see schematic below).
Description
422
schematic:
+---------------------+ /\
+ GRAPHICS PANEL #0
+ |
+
+ |
+
+ |
+
+ |
+---------------------+ | PANEL 0
+ TEXT PANEL #0
+ |
+
+ \/
+---------------------+ /\
+ GRAPHICS PANEL #1
+ |
+
+ |
+
+ |
+
+ |
+---------------------+ | PANEL 1
+ TEXT PANEL #2
+ |
+
+ |
+---------------------+ \/
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Global variables :
Requires
-
SPExpanderCS: Chip Select line
SPExpanderRST: Reset line
SPExpanderCS_Direction: Direction of the Chip Select pin
SPExpanderRST_Direction: Direction of the Reset pin
must be defined before using this function.
SPI module needs to be initialized. See SPI1_Init and SPI1_Init_Advanced routines.
Example
// port expander pinout definition
dim SPExpanderCS as sbit at PORTB.B1
SPExpanderRST as sbit at PORTB.B0
SPExpanderCS_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B1
SPExpanderRST_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B0
...
' Initialize SPI module
SPI1_Init_Advanced(_SPI_MASTER, _SPI_FCY_DIV32,
_SPI_CLK_HI_TRAILING)
SPI_Rd_Ptr = @SPI1_Read
' Pass pointer to
SPI Read function of used SPI module
SPI_T6963C_Config(240, 64, 8, 0, 0, 1, 3, 4)
SPI_T6963C_WriteData
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_WriteData(dim Ddata as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes data to T6963C controller via SPI interface.
Description Parameters :
- Ddata: data to be written
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
SPI_T6963C_WriteData(AddrL)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
423
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_T6963C_WriteCommand
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_WriteCommand(dim Ddata as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes command to T6963C controller via SPI interface.
Description Parameters :
- Ddata: command to be written
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
SPI_T6963C_WriteCommand(SPI_T6963C_CURSOR_POINTER_SET)
SPI_T6963C_SetPtr
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_SetPtr(dim p as word, dim c as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sets the memory pointer p for command c.
Description
Parameters :
- p: address where command should be written
- c: command to be written
Requires
SToshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
SPI_T6963C_SetPtr(T6963C_grHomeAddr + start,
T6963C_ADDRESS_POINTER_SET)
SPI_T6963C_WaitReady
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_WaitReady()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Pools the status byte, and loops until Toshiba Glcd module is ready.
424
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
SPI_T6963C_WaitReady()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_T6963C_Fill
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_Fill(dim v as byte, dim start as word,
dim len as word)
Returns
Nothing.
Fills controller memory block with given byte.
Parameters :
Description
- v: byte to be written
- start: starting address of the memory block
- len: length of the memory block in bytes
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
SPI_T6963C_Fill(0x33, 0x00FF, 0x000F)
SPI_T6963C_Dot
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_Dot(dim x as integer, dim y as integer,
dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a dot in the current graphic panel of Glcd at coordinates (x, y).
Parameters :
Description
- x: dot position on x-axis
- y: dot position on y-axis
- color: color parameter. Valid values: SPI_T6963C_BLACK and
SPI_T6963C_WHITE
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
SPI_T6963C_Dot(x0, y0, pcolor)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
425
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_T6963C_Write_Char
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_Write_Char(dim c as byte, dim x as byte,
dim y as byte, dim mode as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes a char in the current text panel of Glcd at coordinates (x, y).
Parameters :
-
c: char to be written
x: char position on x-axis
y: char position on y-axis
mode: mode parameter. Valid values: SPI_T6963C_ROM_MODE_OR,
SPI_T6963C_ROM_MODE_XOR, SPI_T6963C_ROM_MODE_AND and
SPI_T6963C_ROM_MODE_TEXT
Mode parameter explanation:
Description
- OR Mode: In the OR-Mode, text and graphics can be displayed and the data
is logically “OR-ed”. This is the most common way of combining text and
graphics for example labels on buttons.
- XOR-Mode: In this mode, the text and graphics data are combined via the
logical “exclusive OR”. This can be useful to display text in negative mode, i.e.
white text on black background.
- AND-Mode: The text and graphic data shown on display are combined via the
logical “AND function”.
- TEXT-Mode: This option is only available when displaying just a text. The Text
Attribute values are stored in the graphic area of display memory.
For more details see the T6963C datasheet.
426
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
SPI_T6963C_Write_Char("A",22,23,AND)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_T6963C_Write_Text
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_Write_Text(dim byref str as byte[10],
dim x as byte, dim y as byte, dim mode as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes text in the current text panel of Glcd at coordinates (x, y).
Parameters :
- str: text to be written
- x: text position on x-axis
- y: text position on y-axis
- mode: mode parameter. Valid values: SPI_T6963C_ROM_MODE_OR,
SPI_T6963C_ROM_MODE_XOR, SPI_T6963C_ROM_MODE_AND and
SPI_T6963C_ROM_MODE_TEXT
Mode parameter explanation:
Description
- OR Mode: In the OR-Mode, text and graphics can be displayed and the data
is logically “OR-ed”. This is the most common way of combining text and
graphics for example labels on buttons.
- XOR-Mode: In this mode, the text and graphics data are combined via the
logical “exclusive OR”. This can be useful to display text in negative mode, i.e.
white text on black background.
- AND-Mode: The text and graphic data shown on the display are combined via
the logical “AND function”.
- TEXT-Mode: This option is only available when displaying just a text. The Text
Attribute values are stored in the graphic area of display memory.
For more details see the T6963C datasheet.
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
SPI_T6963C_Write_Text("Glcd LIBRARY DEMO, WELCOME !", 0, 0,
T6963C_ROM_MODE_EXOR)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
427
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_T6963C_Line
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_Line(dim x0 as integer, dim y0 as integer, dim x1 as integer, dim y1 as integer, dim pcolor as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a line from (x0, y0) to (x1, y1).
Parameters :
Description
-
x0: x coordinate of the line start
y0: y coordinate of the line end
x1: x coordinate of the line start
y1: y coordinate of the line end
pcolor: color parameter. Valid values: SPI_T6963C_BLACK and
SPI_T6963C_WHITE
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
SPI_T6963C_Line(0, 0, 239, 127, T6963C_WHITE)
SPI_T6963C_Rectangle
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_Rectangle(dim x0 as integer, dim y0 as
integer, dim x1 as integer, dim y1 as integer, dim pcolor as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a rectangle on Glcd.
Parameters :
Description
-
x0: x coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner
y0: y coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner
x1: x coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner
y1: y coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner
pcolor: color parameter. Valid values: SPI_T6963C_BLACK and
SPI_T6963C_WHITE
428
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
SPI_T6963C_Rectangle(20, 20, 219, 107, T6963C_WHITE)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_T6963C_Box
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_Box(dim x0 as integer, dim y0 as integer,
dim x1 as integer, dim y1 as integer, dim pcolor as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a box on the Glcd
Parameters :
Description
-
x0: x coordinate of the upper left box corner
y0: y coordinate of the upper left box corner
x1: x coordinate of the lower right box corner
y1: y coordinate of the lower right box corner
pcolor: color parameter. Valid values: SPI_T6963C_BLACK and
SPI_T6963C_WHITE
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
SPI_T6963C_Box(0, 119, 239, 127, T6963C_WHITE)
SPI_T6963C_Circle
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_Circle(dim x as integer, dim y as integer, dim r as longint, dim pcolor as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a circle on the Glcd.
Parameters :
Description -
x: x coordinate of the circle center
y: y coordinate of the circle center
r: radius size
pcolor: color parameter. Valid values: SPI_T6963C_BLACK and
SPI_T6963C_WHITE
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
SPI_T6963C_Circle(120, 64, 110, T6963C_WHITE)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
429
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_T6963C_Image
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_image(const pic as ^byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Displays bitmap on Glcd.
Parameters :
Description
- pic: image to be displayed. Bitmap array can be located in both code and
RAM memory (due to the mikroBasic PRO for AVR pointer to const and
pointer to RAM equivalency).
Use the mikroBasic PRO’s integrated Glcd Bitmap Editor (menu option Tools ›
Glcd Bitmap Editor) to convert image to a constant array suitable for displaying on Glcd.
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
SPI_T6963C_Image(my_image)
SPI_T6963C_Sprite
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_sprite(dim px, py, sx, sy as byte, const
pic as ^byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Fills graphic rectangle area (px, py) to (px+sx, py+sy) with custom size picture.
Parameters :
- px: x coordinate of the upper left picture corner. Valid values: multiples of the
font width
Description - py: y coordinate of the upper left picture corner
- pic: picture to be displayed
- sx: picture width. Valid values: multiples of the font width
- sy: picture height
Note: If px and sx parameters are not multiples of the font width they will be
scaled to the nearest lower number that is a multiple of the font width.
430
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
SPI_T6963C_Sprite(76, 4, einstein, 88, 119) ' draw a sprite
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_T6963C_Set_Cursor
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_set_cursor(dim x, y as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sets cursor to row x and column y.
Description
Parameters :
- x: cursor position row number
- y: cursor position column number
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
SPI_T6963C_Set_Cursor(cposx, cposy)
SPI_T6963C_ClearBit
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_clearBit(dim b as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Clears control port bit(s).
Description Parameters :
- b: bit mask. The function will clear bit x on control port if bit x in bit mask is set to 1.
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
' clear bits 0 and 1 on control port
SPI_T6963C_ClearBit(0x03)
SPI_T6963C_SetBit
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_setBit(dim b as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sets control port bit(s).
Description Parameters :
- b: bit mask. The function will set bit x on control port if bit x in bit mask is set to 1.
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
' set bits 0 and 1 on control port
SPI_T6963C_SetBit(0x03)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
431
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_T6963C_NegBit
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_negBit(dim b as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Negates control port bit(s).
Description
Parameters :
- b: bit mask. The function will negate bit x on control port if bit x in bit mask is
set to 1.
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
' negate bits 0 and 1 on control port
SPI_T6963C_NegBit(0x03)
SPI_T6963C_DisplayGrPanel
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_DisplayGrPanel(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Display selected graphic panel.
Description Parameters :
- n: graphic panel number. Valid values: 0 and 1.
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
' display graphic panel 1
SPI_T6963C_DisplayGrPanel(1)
SPI_T6963C_DisplayTxtPanel
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_DisplayTxtPanel(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Display selected text panel.
Description Parameters :
- n: text panel number. Valid values: 0 and 1.
432
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
' display text panel 1
SPI_T6963C_DisplayTxtPanel(1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_T6963C_SetGrPanel
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_SetGrPanel(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Compute start address for selected graphic panel and set appropriate internal
pointers. All subsequent graphic operations will be preformed at this graphic
panel.
Description
Parameters :
- n: graphic panel number. Valid values: 0 and 1.
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
' set graphic panel 1 as current graphic panel.
SPI_T6963C_SetGrPanel(1)
SPI_T6963C_SetTxtPanel
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_SetTxtPanel(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Compute start address for selected text panel and set appropriate internal pointers. All subsequent text operations will be preformed at this text panel.
Description
Parameters :
- n: text panel number. Valid values: 0 and 1.
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
' set text panel 1 as current text panel.
SPI_T6963C_SetTxtPanel(1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
433
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_T6963C_PanelFill
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_PanelFill(dim v as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Fill current panel in full (graphic+text) with appropriate value (0 to clear).
Description Parameters :
- v: value to fill panel with.
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
clear current panel
SPI_T6963C_PanelFill(0)
SPI_T6963C_GrFill
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_GrFill(dim v as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Fill current graphic panel with appropriate value (0 to clear).
Description Parameters :
- v: value to fill graphic panel with.
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
' clear current graphic panel
SPI_T6963C_GrFill(0)
SPI_T6963C_TxtFill
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_TxtFill(dim v as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Fill current text panel with appropriate value (0 to clear).
Description Parameters :
- v: this value increased by 32 will be used to fill text panel.
434
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
' clear current text panel
SPI_T6963C_TxtFill(0)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_T6963C_Cursor_Height
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_Cursor_Height(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Set cursor size.
Description Parameters :
- n: cursor height. Valid values: 0..7.
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
SPI_T6963C_Cursor_Height(7)
SPI_T6963C_Graphics
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_Graphics(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Enable/disable graphic displaying.
Description
Parameters :
- n: graphic enable/disable parameter. Valid values: 0 (disable graphic
dispaying) and 1 (enable graphic displaying).
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
' enable graphic displaying
SPI_T6963C_Graphics(1)
SPI_T6963C_Text
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_Text(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Enable/disable text displaying.
Description
Parameters :
- n: text enable/disable parameter. Valid values: 0 (disable text dispaying) and 1
(enable text displaying).
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
' enable text displaying
SPI_T6963C_Text(1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
435
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI_T6963C_Cursor
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_Cursor(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.3q
Set cursor on/off.
Description Parameters :
- n: on/off parameter. Valid values: 0 (set cursor off) and 1 (set cursor on).
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
' set cursor on
SPI_T6963C_Cursor(1)
SPI_T6963C_Cursor_Blink
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_T6963C_Cursor_Blink(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Enable/disable cursor blinking.
Description
Parameters :
- n: cursor blinking enable/disable parameter. Valid values: 0 (disable cursor
blinking) and 1 (enable cursor blinking).
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
' enable cursor blinking
SPI_T6963C_Cursor_Blink(1)
Library Example
The following drawing demo tests advanced routines of the SPI T6963C Glcd library. Hardware
configurations in this example are made for the T6963C 240x128 display, EasyAVR5A board and
ATmega16.
436
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
program SPI_T6963C_240x128
include __Lib_SPIT6963C_Const
include bitmap
include bitmap2
dim
' Port Expander module connections
SPExpanderRST as sbit at PORTB.B0
SPExpanderCS as sbit at PORTB.B1
SPExpanderRST_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B0
SPExpanderCS_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B1
' End Port Expander module connections
dim
panel as byte
i as word
curs as byte
cposx,
cposy as word
txt, txt1 as string[29]
' current panel
' general purpose register
' cursor visibility
' cursor x-y position
txt1 = " EINSTEIN WOULD HAVE LIKED mE"
txt = " GLCD LIBRARY DEMO, WELCOME !"
DDRA = 0x00
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
' configure PORTA as input
init display for 240 pixel width and 128 pixel height
8 bits character width
data bus on MCP23S17 portB
control bus on MCP23S17 portA
bit 2 is !WR
bit 1 is !RD
bit 0 is !CD
bit 4 is RST
chip enable, reverse on, 8x8 font internaly set in library
' Pass pointer to SPI Read function of used SPI module
Spi_Rd_Ptr = @SPI1_Read
' Initialize SPI module
SPI1_Init_Advanced(_SPI_MASTER, _SPI_FCY_DIV2, _SPI_CLK_HI_TRAILING)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
437
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
' ' If Port Expander Library uses SPI2 module
' Pass pointer to SPI Read function of used SPI module
' Spi_Rd_Ptr = @SPI2_Read
' Pass pointer to SPI Read
function of used SPI module
' Initialize SPI module used with PortExpander
'
SPI2_Init_Advanced(_SPI_MASTER,
_SPI_CLK_HI_TRAILING)
_SPI_FCY_DIV2,
' Initialize SPI Toshiba 240x128
SPI_T6963C_Config(240, 128, 8, 0, 2, 1, 0, 4)
'Delay_ms(1000)
' *
' * Enable both graphics and text display at the same time
' *
SPI_T6963C_graphics(1)
SPI_T6963C_text(1)
panel = 0
i = 0
curs = 0
cposx = 0
cposy = 0
' *
' * Text messages
' *
SPI_T6963C_write_text(txt, 0, 0, SPI_T6963C_ROM_MODE_XOR)
SPI_T6963C_write_text(txt1, 0, 15, SPI_T6963C_ROM_MODE_XOR)
'*
'* Cursor
'*
SPI_T6963C_cursor_height(8)
SPI_T6963C_set_cursor(0, 0)
SPI_T6963C_cursor(0)
' 8 pixel height
' move cursor to top left
' cursor off
'*
'* Draw rectangles
'*
SPI_T6963C_rectangle(0, 0, 239, 127, SPI_T6963C_WHITE)
SPI_T6963C_rectangle(20, 20, 219, 107, SPI_T6963C_WHITE)
SPI_T6963C_rectangle(40, 40, 199, 87, SPI_T6963C_WHITE)
SPI_T6963C_rectangle(60, 60, 179, 67, SPI_T6963C_WHITE)
438
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
'*
'* Draw a cross
'*
SPI_T6963C_line(0, 0, 239, 127, SPI_T6963C_WHITE)
SPI_T6963C_line(0, 127, 239, 0, SPI_T6963C_WHITE)
'*
'* Draw solid boxes
'*
SPI_T6963C_box(0, 0, 239, 8, SPI_T6963C_WHITE)
SPI_T6963C_box(0, 119, 239, 127, SPI_T6963C_WHITE)
'*
'* Draw circles
'*
SPI_T6963C_circle(120,
SPI_T6963C_circle(120,
SPI_T6963C_circle(120,
SPI_T6963C_circle(120,
SPI_T6963C_circle(120,
SPI_T6963C_circle(120,
SPI_T6963C_circle(120,
64,
64,
64,
64,
64,
64,
64,
10,
30,
50,
70,
90,
110,
130,
SPI_T6963C_WHITE)
SPI_T6963C_WHITE)
SPI_T6963C_WHITE)
SPI_T6963C_WHITE)
SPI_T6963C_WHITE)
SPI_T6963C_WHITE)
SPI_T6963C_WHITE)
SPI_T6963C_sprite(76, 4, @einstein, 88, 119)
SPI_T6963C_setGrPanel(1)
graphic panel
SPI_T6963C_image(@mikroe)
graphic screen with a picture
while TRUE
' Draw a sprite
' Select other
' Fill the
' Endless loop
'*
'* If PORTA_0 is pressed, toggle the display between graphic
panel 0 and graphic 1
'*
if( PINA0_bit = 0) then
Inc(panel)
panel = panel and 1
SPI_T6963C_setPtr((SPI_T6963C_grMemSize
+
SPI_T6963C_txtMemSize) * panel, SPI_T6963C_GRAPHIC_HOME_ADDRESS_SET)
Delay_ms(300)
'*
'* If PORTA_1 is pressed, display only graphic panel
'*
else
if ( PINA1_bit = 0) then
SPI_T6963C_graphics(1)
SPI_T6963C_text(0)
Delay_ms(300)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
439
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
'*
'* If PORTA_3 is pressed, display text and graphic panels
'*
else
if ( PINA3_bit = 0) then
SPI_T6963C_graphics(1)
SPI_T6963C_text(1)
Delay_ms(300)
'*
'* If PORTA_4 is pressed, change cursor
'*
else
if( PINA4_bit = 0) then
Inc(curs)
if (curs = 3) then
curs = 0
end if
select case curs
case 0
' no cursor
SPI_T6963C_cursor(0)
case 1
' blinking cursor
SPI_T6963C_cursor(1)
SPI_T6963C_cursor_blink(1)
case 2
' non blinking cursor
SPI_T6963C_cursor(1)
SPI_T6963C_cursor_blink(0)
end select
Delay_ms(300)
end if
end if
end if
end if
end if
'*
'* Move cursor, even if not visible
'*
Inc(cposx)
if (cposx = SPI_T6963C_txtCols) then
cposx = 0
Inc(cposy)
if (cposy = SPI_T6963C_grHeight / SPI_T6963C_CHARACTER_HEIGHT)
then
cposy = 0
end if
end if
SPI_T6963C_set_cursor(cposx, cposy)
Delay_ms(100)
wend
end.
440
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
HW Connection
SPI T6963C Glcd HW connection
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
441
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
SPI T6963C GRAPHIC LCD LIBRARY
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR provides a library for working with Glcds based on
TOSHIBA T6963C controller. The Toshiba T6963C is a very popular Lcd controller
for the use in small graphics modules. It is capable of controlling displays with a resolution up to 240x128. Because of its low power and small outline it is most suitable
for mobile applications such as PDAs, MP3 players or mobile measurement equipment. Although small, this contoller has a capability of displaying and merging text
and graphics and it manages all the interfacing signals to the displays Row and Column drivers.
For creating a custom set of Glcd images use Glcd Bitmap Editor Tool.
Note: ChipEnable(CE), FontSelect(FS) and Reverse(MD) have to be set to appropriate levels by the user outside of the T6963C_Init function. See the Library Example code at the bottom of this page.
Note: Some mikroElektronika's adapter boards have pinout different from T6369C
datasheets. Appropriate relations between these labels are given in the table below:
Adapter Board T6369C datasheet
442
RS
C/D
R/W
/RD
E
/WR
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
External dependencies of T6963C Graphic Lcd Library
The following variables
must be defined in all
projects using T6963C
Graphic Lcd library:
dim T6963C_dataPort
as byte sfr external
dim T6963C_ctrlPort
as byte sfr external
dim T6963C_ctrlwr as
sbit sfr external
dim T6963C_ctrlrd as
sbit sfr external
dim T6963C_ctrlcd as
sbit sfr external
dim T6963C_ctrlrst as
sbit sfr external
dim
T6963C_dataPort_Direc
tion as byte sfr
external
Description:
Example :
Reset signal.
dim T6963C_dataPort
as byte at PORTD
dim T6963C_ctrlPort
as byte at PORTC
dim T6963C_ctrlwr as
sbit at PORTC.B2
dim T6963C_ctrlrd as
sbit at PORTC.B1
dim T6963C_ctrlcd as
sbit at PORTC.B0
dim T6963C_ctrlrst as
sbit at PORTC.B4
Direction of the T6963C
Data Port.
dim
T6963C_dataPort_Direc
tion as byte at DDRD
dim
T6963C_ctrlPort_Direc Direction of the T6963C
tion as byte sfr
Control Port.
external
dim
T6963C_ctrlPort_Direc
tion as byte at DDRC
dim
T6963C_ctrlwr_Directi
Direction of the Write pin.
on as sbit sfr
external
dim
T6963C_ctrlwr_Directi
on as sbit at DDRC.B2
dim
T6963C_ctrlrd_Directi
Direction of the Read pin.
on as sbit sfr
external
dim
T6963C_ctrlrd_Directi
on as sbit at DDRC.B1
T6963C Data Port.
T6963C Control Port.
Write signal.
Read signal.
Command/Data signal.
dim
T6963C_ctrlcd_Directi Direction of the Comon as sbit sfr
mand/Data pin.
external
dim
T6963C_ctrlrst_Direct
Direction of the Reset pin.
ion as sbit sfr
external
dim
T6963C_ctrlcd_Directi
on as sbit at DDRC.B0
dim
T6963C_ctrlrst_Direct
ion as sbit at
DDRC.B4
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
443
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Routines
- T6963C_Init
- T6963C_WriteData
- T6963C_WriteCommand
- T6963C_SetPtr
- T6963C_WaitReady
- T6963C_Fill
- T6963C_Dot
- T6963C_Write_Char
- T6963C_Write_Text
- T6963C_Line
- T6963C_Rectangle
- T6963C_Box
- T6963C_Circle
- T6963C_Image
- T6963C_Sprite
- T6963C_Set_Cursor
- T6963C_DisplayGrPanel
- T6963C_DisplayTxtPanel
- T6963C_SetGrPanel
- T6963C_SetTxtPanel
- T6963C_PanelFill
- T6963C_GrFill
- T6963C_TxtFill
- T6963C_Cursor_Height
- T6963C_Graphics
- T6963C_Text
- T6963C_Cursor
- T6963C_Cursor_Blink
444
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
T6963C_Init
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_init(dim width, height, fntW as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Initalizes the Graphic Lcd controller.
Parameters :
- width: width of the Glcd panel
- height: height of the Glcd panel
- fntW: font width
Display RAM organization:
The library cuts the RAM into panels : a complete panel is one graphics panel
followed by a text panel (see schematic below).
Description
schematic:
+---------------------+ /\
+ GRAPHICS PANEL #0
+ |
+
+ |
+
+ |
+
+ |
+---------------------+ | PANEL 0
+ TEXT PANEL #0
+ |
+
+ \/
+---------------------+ /\
+ GRAPHICS PANEL #1
+ |
+
+ |
+
+ |
+
+ |
+---------------------+ | PANEL 1
+ TEXT PANEL #2
+ |
+
+ |
+---------------------+ \/
Global variables :
Requires
-
T6963C_dataPort: Data Port
T6963C_ctrlPort: Control Port
T6963C_ctrlwr: Write signal pin
T6963C_ctrlrd: Read signal pin
T6963C_ctrlcd: Command/Data signal pin
T6963C_ctrlrst: Reset signal pin
T6963C_dataPort_Direction: Direction of Data Port
T6963C_ctrlPort_Direction: Direction of Control Port
T6963C_ctrlwr_Direction: Direction of Write signal pin
T6963C_ctrlrd_Direction: Direction of Read signal pin
T6963C_ctrlcd_Direction: Direction of Command/Data signal pin
T6963C_ctrlrst_Direction: Direction of Reset signal pin
must be defined before using this function.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
445
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
' T6963C module connections
dim T6963C_ctrlPort as byte at PORTC
dim T6963C_dataPort as byte at PORTD
dim T6963C_ctrlPort_Direction as byte at DDRD
dim T6963C_dataPort_Direction as byte at DDRC
Example
dim T6963C_ctrlwr as sbit at PORTC.B2
dim T6963C_ctrlrd as sbit at PORTC.B1
dim T6963C_ctrlcd as sbit at PORTC.B0
dim T6963C_ctrlrst as sbit at PORTC.B4
dim T6963C_ctrlwr_Direction as sbit at DDRC.B2
dim T6963C_ctrlrd_Direction as sbit at DDRC.B1
dim T6963C_ctrlcd_Direction as sbit at DDRC.B0
dim T6963C_ctrlrst_Direction as sbit at DDRC.B4
' End of T6963C module connections
...
' init display for 240 pixel width, 128 pixel height and 8 bits
character width
T6963C_init(240, 128, 8)
T6963C_WriteData
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_WriteData(dim mydata as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes data to T6963C controller.
Description Parameters :
- mydata: data to be written
446
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_WriteData(AddrL)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
T6963C_WriteCommand
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_WriteCommand(dim mydata as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes command to T6963C controller.
Description Parameters :
- mydata: command to be written
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_WriteCommand(T6963C_CURSOR_POINTER_SET)
T6963C_SetPtr
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_SetPtr(dim p as word, dim c as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sets the memory pointer p for command c.
Description
Parameters :
- p: address where command should be written
- c: command to be written
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_SetPtr(T6963C_grHomeAddr + start,
T6963C_ADDRESS_POINTER_SET)
T6963C_WaitReady
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_WaitReady()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Pools the status byte, and loops until Toshiba Glcd module is ready.
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_WaitReady()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
447
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
T6963C_Fill
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Fill(dim v as byte, dim start, len as word)
Returns
Nothing.
Fills controller memory block with given byte.
Parameters :
Description
- v: byte to be written
- start: starting address of the memory block
- len: length of the memory block in bytes
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_Fill(0x33,0x00FF,0x000F)
T6963C_Dot
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Dot(dim x, y as integer, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a dot in the current graphic panel of Glcd at coordinates (x, y).
Parameters :
Description
- x: dot position on x-axis
- y: dot position on y-axis
- color: color parameter. Valid values: T6963C_BLACK and T6963C_WHITE
448
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_Dot(x0, y0, pcolor)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
T6963C_Write_Char
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Write_Char(dim c, x, y, mode as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes a char in the current text panel of Glcd at coordinates (x, y).
Parameters :
-
c: char to be written
x: char position on x-axis
y: char position on y-axis
mode: mode parameter. Valid values: T6963C_ROM_MODE_OR,
T6963C_ROM_MODE_XOR, T6963C_ROM_MODE_AND and
T6963C_ROM_MODE_TEXT
Mode parameter explanation:
Description
- OR Mode: In the OR-Mode, text and graphics can be displayed and the data
is logically “OR-ed”. This is the most common way of combining text and
graphics for example labels on buttons.
- XOR-Mode: In this mode, the text and graphics data are combined via the
logical “exclusive OR”. This can be useful to display text in the negative mode,
i.e. white text on black background.
- AND-Mode: The text and graphic data shown on display are combined via the
logical “AND function”.
- TEXT-Mode: This option is only available when displaying just a text. The Text
Attribute values are stored in the graphic area of display memory.
For more details see the T6963C datasheet.
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_Write_Char('A',22,23,AND)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
449
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
T6963C_Write_Text
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Write_Text(dim byref str as byte[10], dim x,
y, mode as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes text in the current text panel of Glcd at coordinates (x, y).
Parameters :
-
str: text to be written
x: text position on x-axis
y: text position on y-axis
mode: mode parameter. Valid values: T6963C_ROM_MODE_OR,
T6963C_ROM_MODE_XOR, T6963C_ROM_MODE_AND and
T6963C_ROM_MODE_TEXT
Mode parameter explanation:
Description
- OR Mode: In the OR-Mode, text and graphics can be displayed and the data
is logically “OR-ed”. This is the most common way of combining text and
graphics for example labels on buttons.
- XOR-Mode: In this mode, the text and graphics data are combined via the
logical “exclusive OR”. This can be useful to display text in the negative mode,
i.e. white text on black background.
- AND-Mode: The text and graphic data shown on display are combined via the
logical “AND function”.
- TEXT-Mode: This option is only available when displaying just a text. The Text
Attribute values are stored in the graphic area of display memory.
For more details see the T6963C datasheet.
450
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_Write_Text(" GLCD LIBRARY DEMO, WELCOME !", 0, 0,
T6963C_ROM_MODE_XOR)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
T6963C_Line
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Line(dim x0, y0, x1, y1 as integer, dim
pcolor as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a line from (x0, y0) to (x1, y1).
Parameters :
Description -
x0: x coordinate of the line start
y0: y coordinate of the line end
x1: x coordinate of the line start
y1: y coordinate of the line end
pcolor: color parameter. Valid values: T6963C_BLACK and T6963C_WHITE
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_Line(0, 0, 239, 127, T6963C_WHITE)
T6963C_Rectangle
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Rectangle(dim x0, y0, x1, y1 as integer, dim
pcolor as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a rectangle on Glcd.
Parameters :
Description -
x0: x coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner
y0: y coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner
x1: x coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner
y1: y coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner
pcolor: color parameter. Valid values: T6963C_BLACK and T6963C_WHITE
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_Rectangle(20, 20, 219, 107, T6963C_WHITE)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
451
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
T6963C_Box
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Box(dim x0, y0, x1, y1 as integer, dim pcolor as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a box on Glcd
Parameters :
Description -
x0: x coordinate of the upper left box corner
y0: y coordinate of the upper left box corner
x1: x coordinate of the lower right box corner
y1: y coordinate of the lower right box corner
pcolor: color parameter. Valid values: T6963C_BLACK and T6963C_WHITE
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_Box(0, 119, 239, 127, T6963C_WHITE)
T6963C_Circle
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Circle(dim x, y as integer, dim r as
longint, dim pcolor as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a circle on Glcd.
Parameters :
Description
452
-
x: x coordinate of the circle center
y: y coordinate of the circle center
r: radius size
pcolor: color parameter. Valid values: T6963C_BLACK and T6963C_WHITE
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_Circle(120, 64, 110, T6963C_WHITE)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
T6963C_Image
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Image(const pic as ^byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Displays bitmap on Glcd.
Parameters :
Description
- pic: image to be displayed. Bitmap array can be located in both code and
RAM memory (due to the mikroBasic PRO for AVR pointer to const and
pointer to RAM equivalency).
Use the mikroBasic PRO’s integrated Glcd Bitmap Editor (menu option Tools ›
Glcd Bitmap Editor) to convert image to a constant array suitable for displaying on Glcd.
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_Image(mc)
T6963C_Sprite
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Sprite(dim px, py, sx, sy as byte, const pic
as ^byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Fills graphic rectangle area (px, py) to (px+sx, py+sy) with custom size picture.
Parameters :
- px: x coordinate of the upper left picture corner. Valid values: multiples of the
font width
Description - py: y coordinate of the upper left picture corner
- pic: picture to be displayed
- sx: picture width. Valid values: multiples of the font width
- sy: picture height
Note: If px and sx parameters are not multiples of the font width they will be
scaled to the nearest lower number that is a multiple of the font width.
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_Sprite(76, 4, einstein, 88, 119) ' draw a sprite
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
453
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
T6963C_Set_Cursor
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Set_Cursor(dim x, y as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sets cursor to row x and column y.
Description
Parameters :
- x: cursor position row number
- y: cursor position column number
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_Set_Cursor(cposx, cposy)
T6963C_DisplayGrPanel
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_DisplayGrPanel(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Display selected graphic panel.
Description Parameters :
- n: graphic panel number. Valid values: 0 and 1.
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
' display graphic panel 1
T6963C_DisplayGrPanel(1)
T6963C_DisplayTxtPanel
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_DisplayTxtPanel(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Display selected text panel.
Description Parameters :
- n: text panel number. Valid values: 0 and 1.
454
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
' display text panel 1
T6963C_DisplayTxtPanel(1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
T6963C_SetGrPanel
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_SetGrPanel(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Compute start address for selected graphic panel and set appropriate internal
pointers. All subsequent graphic operations will be preformed at this graphic
panel.
Description
Parameters :
- n: graphic panel number. Valid values: 0 and 1.
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
' set graphic panel 1 as current graphic panel.
T6963C_SetGrPanel(1)
T6963C_SetTxtPanel
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_SetTxtPanel(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Compute start address for selected text panel and set appropriate internal pointers. All subsequent text operations will be preformed at this text panel.
Description
Parameters :
- n: text panel number. Valid values: 0 and 1.
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
' set text panel 1 as current text panel.
T6963C_SetTxtPanel(1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
455
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
T6963C_PanelFill
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_PanelFill(dim v as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Fill current panel in full (graphic+text) with appropriate value (0 to clear).
Description Parameters :
- v: value to fill panel with.
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
clear current panel
T6963C_PanelFill(0)
T6963C_GrFill
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_PanelFill(dim v as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Fill current panel in full (graphic+text) with appropriate value (0 to clear).
Description Parameters :
- v: value to fill panel with.
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
clear current panel
T6963C_PanelFill(0)
T6963C_TxtFill
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_TxtFill(dim v as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Fill current text panel with appropriate value (0 to clear).
Description Parameters :
- v: this value increased by 32 will be used to fill text panel.
456
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
' clear current text panel
T6963C_TxtFill(0)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
T6963C_Cursor_Height
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Cursor_Height(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Set cursor size.
Description Parameters :
- n: cursor height. Valid values: 0..7.
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_Cursor_Height(7)
T6963C_Graphics
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Graphics(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Enable/disable graphic displaying.
Description
Parameters :
- n: on/off parameter. Valid values: 0 (disable graphic dispaying) and 1 (enable
graphic displaying).
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
' enable graphic displaying
T6963C_Graphics(1)
T6963C_Text
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Text(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Enable/disable text displaying.
Description
Parameters :
- n: on/off parameter. Valid values: 0 (disable text dispaying) and 1 (enable text
displaying).
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
' enable text displaying
T6963C_Text(1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
457
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
T6963C_Cursor
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Cursor(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Set cursor on/off.
Description Parameters :
- n: on/off parameter. Valid values: 0 (set cursor off) and 1 (set cursor on).
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
' set cursor on
T6963C_Cursor(1)
T6963C_Cursor_Blink
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Cursor_Blink(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Enable/disable cursor blinking.
Description
Parameters :
- n: on/off parameter. Valid values: 0 (disable cursor blinking) and 1 (enable
cursor blinking).
Requires
Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
' enable cursor blinking
T6963C_Cursor_Blink(1)
Library Example
The following drawing demo tests advanced routines of the T6963C Glcd library. Hardware configurations in this example are made for the T6963C 240x128 display, EasyAVR5A board and
ATmega16.
458
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
program T6963C_240x128
include __Lib_T6963C_Consts
include bitmap
include bitmap2
' T6963C module connections
dim T6963C_ctrlPort as byte at PORTC
dim T6963C_dataPort as byte at PORTD
dim T6963C_ctrlPort_Direction as byte at DDRC
tion register
dim T6963C_dataPort_Direction as byte at DDRD
tion register
' CONTROL port
' DATA port
' CONTROL direc' DATA direc-
dim T6963C_ctrlwr as sbit at PORTC.B2
' WR write signal
dim T6963C_ctrlrd as sbit at PORTC.B1
' RD read signal
dim T6963C_ctrlcd as sbit at PORTC.B0
' CD command/data signal
dim T6963C_ctrlrst as sbit at PORTC.B4
' RST reset signal
dim T6963C_ctrlwr_Direction as sbit at DDRC.B2
' WR write signal direction
dim T6963C_ctrlrd_Direction as sbit at DDRC.B1
' RD read signal direction
dim T6963C_ctrlcd_Direction as sbit at DDRC.B0
' CD
command/data signal direction
dim T6963C_ctrlrst_Direction as sbit at DDRC.B4
' RST reset
signal direction
' Signals not used by library, they are set in main sub function
dim T6963C_ctrlce as sbit at PORTC.B3
' CE signal
dim T6963C_ctrlfs as sbit at PORTC.B6
' FS signal
dim T6963C_ctrlmd as sbit at PORTC.B5
' MD signal
dim T6963C_ctrlce_Direction as sbit at DDRC.B3
' CE signal
direction
dim T6963C_ctrlfs_Direction as sbit at DDRC.B6
' FS signal
direction
dim T6963C_ctrlmd_Direction as sbit at DDRC.B5
' MD signal
direction
' End T6963C module connections
dim
panel as byte
' current panel
i as word
' general purpose register
curs as byte
' cursor visibility
cposx,
cposy as word
' cursor x-y position
txtcols as byte
' number of text coloms
txt, txt1 as string[29]
txt1 = " EINSTEIN WOULD HAVE LIKED mE"
txt = " GLCD LIBRARY DEMO, WELCOME !"
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
459
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
DDRA = 0x00
DDA0_bit
DDA1_bit
DDA2_bit
DDA3_bit
DDA4_bit
=
=
=
=
=
' configure PORTA as input
0
0
0
0
0
T6963C_ctrlce_Direction = 1
T6963C_ctrlce = 0
T6963C_ctrlfs_Direction = 1
T6963C_ctrlfs = 0
T6963C_ctrlmd_Direction = 1
T6963C_ctrlmd = 0
'
'
'
'
'
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
PB0
PB1
PB2
PB3
PB4
as
as
as
as
as
input
input
input
input
input
' Enable T6963C
' Font Select 8x8
' Column number select
panel = 0
i = 0
curs = 0
cposx = 0
cposy = 0
' Initialize T6369C
T6963C_init(240, 128, 8)
{*
* Enable both graphics and text display at the same time
*}
T6963C_graphics(1)
T6963C_text(1)
{*
* Text messages
*}
T6963C_write_text(txt, 0, 0, T6963C_ROM_MODE_XOR)
T6963C_write_text(txt1, 0, 15, T6963C_ROM_MODE_XOR)
{*
* Cursor
*}
T6963C_cursor_height(8)
T6963C_set_cursor(0, 0)
T6963C_cursor(0)
' 8 pixel height
' Move cursor to top left
' Cursor off
{*
* Draw rectangles
*}
T6963C_rectangle(0, 0, 239, 127, T6963C_WHITE)
T6963C_rectangle(20, 20, 219, 107, T6963C_WHITE)
T6963C_rectangle(40, 40, 199, 87, T6963C_WHITE)
T6963C_rectangle(60, 60, 179, 67, T6963C_WHITE)
460
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
{*
* Draw a cross
*}
T6963C_line(0, 0, 239, 127, T6963C_WHITE)
T6963C_line(0, 127, 239, 0, T6963C_WHITE)
{*
* Draw solid boxes
*}
T6963C_box(0, 0, 239, 8, T6963C_WHITE)
T6963C_box(0, 119, 239, 127, T6963C_WHITE)
'while true do nop
{*
* Draw circles
*}
T6963C_circle(120, 64, 10, T6963C_WHITE)
T6963C_circle(120, 64, 30, T6963C_WHITE)
T6963C_circle(120, 64, 50, T6963C_WHITE)
T6963C_circle(120, 64, 70, T6963C_WHITE)
T6963C_circle(120, 64, 90, T6963C_WHITE)
T6963C_circle(120, 64, 110, T6963C_WHITE)
T6963C_circle(120, 64, 130, T6963C_WHITE)
T6963C_sprite(76, 4, @einstein, 88, 119)
T6963C_setGrPanel(1)
' Draw a sprite
' Select other graphic panel
T6963C_image(@mikroe)
while TRUE
' Endless loop
'*
'* If PORTA_0 is pressed, toggle the display between graphic
panel 0 and graphic 1
'*
if( PINA0_bit = 0) then
Inc(panel)
panel = panel and 1
T6963C_setPtr((T6963C_grMemSize + T6963C_txtMemSize) * panel,
T6963C_GRAPHIC_HOME_ADDRESS_SET)
Delay_ms(300)
'*
'* If PORTA_1 is pressed, display only graphic panel
'*
else
if ( PINA1_bit = 0) then
T6963C_graphics(1)
T6963C_text(0)
Delay_ms(300)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
461
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
'*
'* If PORTA_2 is pressed, display only text panel
'*
else
if ( PINA2_bit = 0) then
T6963C_graphics(0)
T6963C_text(1)
Delay_ms(300)
'*
'* If PORTA_3 is pressed, display text and graphic panels
'*
else
if ( PINA3_bit = 0) then
T6963C_graphics(1)
T6963C_text(1)
Delay_ms(300)
'*
'* If PORTA_4 is pressed, change cursor
'*
else
if( PINA4_bit = 0) then
Inc(curs)
if (curs = 3) then
curs = 0
end if
select case curs
case 0
' no cursor
T6963C_cursor(0)
case 1
' blinking cursor
T6963C_cursor(1)
T6963C_cursor_blink(1)
case 2
' non blinking cursor
T6963C_cursor(1)
T6963C_cursor_blink(0)
end select
Delay_ms(300)
end if
end if
end if
end if
end if
462
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
'*
'* Move cursor, even if not visible
'*
Inc(cposx)
if (cposx = T6963C_txtCols) then
cposx = 0
Inc(cposy)
if (cposy = T6963C_grHeight / T6963C_CHARACTER_HEIGHT) then
cposy = 0
end if
end if
T6963C_set_cursor(cposx, cposy)
Delay_ms(100)
wend
end.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
463
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
HW Connection
T6963C Glcd HW connection
464
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 1
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Introduction
TWI LIBRARY
TWI full master MSSP module is available with a number of AVR MCU models. mikroBasic PRO
for AVR provides library which supports the master TWI mode.
Library Routines
- TWI_Init
- TWI_Busy
- TWI_Start
- TWI_Stop
- TWI_Read
- TWI_Write
- TWI_Status
- TWI_Close
TWI_Init
Prototype
sub procedure TWI_Init(dim clock as longword)
Returns
Nothing.
Description
Initializes TWI with desired clock (refer to device data sheet for correct values
in respect with Fosc). Needs to be called before using other functions of TWI
Library.
You don’t need to configure ports manually for using the module; library will take
care of the initialization.
Requires
Library requires MSSP module on PORTB or PORTC.
Example
TWI_Init(100000)
TWI_Busy
Prototype
sub function TWI_Busy() as byte
Returns
Returns 0 if TWI start sequnce is finished, 1 if TWI start sequnce is not finished.
Description Signalizes the status of TWI bus.
Requires
TWI must be configured before using this function. See TWI_Init.
Example
if (TWI_Busy = 1)
...
end if
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
465
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
TWI_Start
Prototype
sub function TWI_Start() as byte
Returns
If there is no error function returns 0, otherwise returns 1.
Description Determines if TWI bus is free and issues START signal.
Requires
TWI must be configured before using this function. See TWI_Init.
Example
if (TWI_Start = 1)
...
end if
TWI_Read
Prototype
sub function TWI_Read(dim ack as byte) as byte
Returns
Returns one byte from the slave.
Description
Reads one byte from the slave, and sends not acknowledge signal if parameter
ack is 0, otherwise it sends acknowledge.
TWI must be configured before using this function. See TWI_Init.
Requires
Also, START signal needs to be issued in order to use this function. See
TWI_Start.
Read data and send not acknowledge signal:
Example
tmp = TWI_Read(0)
TWI_Write
Prototype
sub procedure TWI_Write(dim data_ as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Description Sends data byte (parameter data_) via TWI bus.
TWI must be configured before using this function. See TWI_Init.
Requires
Example
466
Also, START signal needs to be issued in order to use this function. See
TWI_Start.
TWI_Write(0xA3)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
TWI_Stop
Prototype
sub procedure TWI_Stop()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Issues STOP signal to TWI operation.
Requires
TWI must be configured before using this function. See TWI_Init.
Example
TWI_Stop()
TWI_Status
Prototype
sub function TWI_Status() as byte
Returns
Returns value of status register (TWSR), the highest 5 bits.
Description Returns status of TWI.
Requires
TWI must be configured before using this function. See TWI_Init.
Example
status = TWI_Status()
TWI_Close
Prototype
sub procedure TWI_Close()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Closes TWI connection.
Requires
TWI must be configured before using this function. See TWI_Init.
Example
TWI_Close()
Library Example
This code demonstrates use of TWI Library procedures and functions. AVR MCU is connected
(SCL, SDA pins ) to 24c02 EEPROM. Program sends data to EEPROM (data is written at address
2). Then, we read data via TWI from EEPROM and send its value to PORTA, to check if the cycle
was successful. Check the figure below.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
467
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
program TWI_Simple
main:
DDRA = 0xFF
' configure PORTA as output
TWI_Init(100000)
TWI_Start()
TWI_Write(0xA2)
TWI_Write(2)
TWI_Write(0xAA)
TWI_Stop()
' initialize TWI communication
' issue TWI start signal
' send byte via TWI (device address + W)
' send byte (address of EEPROM location)
' send data (data to be written)
' issue TWI stop signal
Delay_100ms()
TWI_Start()
TWI_Write(0xA2)
TWI_Write(2)
TWI_Start()
TWI_Write(0xA3)
PORTA = TWI_Read(0)
TWI_Stop()
end.
' issue TWI start signal
' send byte via TWI (device address + W)
' send byte (data address)
' issue TWI signal repeated start
' send byte (device address + R)
' read data (NO acknowledge)
' issue TWI stop signal}
HW Connection
Interfacing 24c02 to AVR via TWI
468
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
UART LIBRARY
UART hardware module is available with a number of AVR MCUs. mikroBasic PRO
for AVR UART Library provides comfortable work with the Asynchronous (full
duplex) mode.
You can easily communicate with other devices via RS-232 protocol (for example
with PC, see the figure at the end of the topic – RS-232 HW connection). You need
a AVR MCU with hardware integrated UART, for example ATmega16. Then, simply
use the functions listed below.
Library Routines
-
UARTx_Init
UARTx_Init_Advanced
UARTx_Data_Ready
UARTx_Read
UARTx_Read_Text
UARTx_Write
UARTx_Write_Text
The following routine is for the internal use by compiler only:
- UARTx_TX_Idle
Note: AVR MCUs require you to specify the module you want to use. To select the
desired UART, simply change the letter x in the prototype for a number from 1 to 4.
Number of UART modules per MCU differs from chip to chip. Please, read the
appropriate datasheet before utilizing this library.
Example: UART2_Init() initializes UART 2 module.
Note: Some of the AVR MCUs do not support UARTx_Init_Advanced routine.
Please, refer to the appropriate datasheet.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
469
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
UARTx_Init
Prototype
sub procedure UARTx_Init(dim baud_rate as longint)
Returns
Nothing.
Configures and initializes the UART module.
The internal UART module module is set to:
Description
-
receiver enabled
transmitter enabled
frame size 8 bits
1 STOP bit
parity mode disabled
asynchronous operation
Parameters :
- baud_rate: requested baud rate
Refer to the device data sheet for baud rates allowed for specific Fosc.
You'll need AVR MCU with hardware UART.
Requires
UARTx_Init needs to be called before using other functions from UART Library.
Example
470
'This will initialize hardware UART1 module and establish the
communication at 2400 bps
UART1_Init(2400)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
UARTx_Init_Advanced
Prototype
sub procedure UARTx_Init_Advanced(dim baud_rate as longword, dim
parity as byte, dim stop_bits as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Configures and initializes UART module.
Parameter baud_rate configures UART module to work on a requested baud rate.
Parameters parity and stop_bits determine the work mode for UART, and
can have the following values:
Mask
Description
Predefined library const
Parity constants:
Description
0x00
Parity mode disabled
_UART_NOPARITY
0x20
Even parity
_UART_EVENPARITY
0x30
Odd parity
_UART_ODDPARITY
Stop bit constants:
0x00
1 stop bit
_UART_ONE_STOPBIT
0x01
2 stop bits
_UART_TWO_STOPBITS
Note: Some MCUs do not support advanced configuration of the UART module.
Please consult appropriate daatsheet.
Requires
MCU must have UART module.
Example
' Initialize hardware UART1 module and establish communication at
9600 bps, 8-bit data, even parity and 2 STOP bits
UART1_Init_Advanced(9600, _UART_EVENPARITY, _UART_TWO_STOPBITS)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
471
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
UARTx_Data_Ready
Prototype
sub function UARTx_Data_Ready() as byte
Returns
Function returns 1 if data is ready or 0 if there is no data.
Description The function tests if data in receive buffer is ready for reading.
MCU with the UART module.
Requires
Example
The UART module must be initialized before using this routine. See the
UARTx_Init routine.
dim receive as byte
...
' read data if ready
if (UART1_Data_Ready() = 1) then
receive = UART1_Read()
UARTx_Read
Prototype
sub function UARTx_Read() as byte
Returns
Received byte.
Description
The function receives a byte via UART. Use the UARTx_Data_Ready function to
test if data is ready first.
MCU with the UART module.
Requires
Example
472
The UART module must be initialized before using this routine. See UARTx_Init
routine.
dim receive as byte
...
' read data if ready
if (UART1_Data_Ready() = 1) then
receive = UART1_Read()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
UARTx_Read_Text
Prototype
sub procedure UARTx_Read_Text(dim byref Output as string[255],
dim byref Delimiter as string[10], dim Attempts as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Reads characters received via UART until the delimiter sequence is detected.
The read sequence is stored in the parameter output; delimiter sequence is
stored in the parameter delimiter.
Description
Requires
This is a blocking call: the delimiter sequence is expected, otherwise the procedure exits( if the delimiter is not found). Attempts defines number of received
characters in which Delimiter sequence is expected. If Attempts is set to 255,
this routine will continously try to detect the Delimiter sequence.
UART HW module must be initialized and communication established before
using this function. See UARTx_Init.
Read text until the sequence “OK” is received, and send back what’s been received:
UART1_Init(4800)
module
Delay_ms(100)
Example
' initialize UART
while TRUE
if (UART1_Data_Ready() = 1)
' if data is received
UART1_Read_Text(output, 'delim', 10) ' reads text until
'delim' is found
UART1_Write_Text(output)
' sends back text
end if
wend.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
473
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
UARTx_Write
Prototype
sub procedure UARTx_Write(dim TxData as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
The function transmits a byte via the UART module.
Description Parameters :
- TxData: data to be sent
MCU with the UART module.
Requires
Example
The UART module must be initialized before using this routine. See UARTx_Init
routine.
dim data_ as byte
...
data_ = 0x1E
UART1_Write(data_)
UARTx_Write_Text
Prototype
sub procedure UARTx_Write_Text(dim byref uart_text as
string[255])
Returns
Nothing.
Description Sends text (parameter uart_text) via UART. Text should be zero terminated.
Requires
UART HW module must be initialized and communication established before
using this function. See UARTx_Init.
Read text until the sequence “OK” is received, and send back what’s been received:
UART1_Init(4800)
module
Delay_ms(100)
Example
474
' initialize UART
while TRUE
if (UART1_Data_Ready() = 1)
' if data is received
UART1_Read_Text(output, 'delim', 10) ' reads text until
'delim' is found
UART1_Write_Text(output)
' sends back text
end if
wend.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Example
This example demonstrates simple data exchange via UART. If MCU is connected
to the PC, you can test the example from the mikroBasic PRO for AVR USART Terminal.
program UART
dim uart_rd as byte
main:
UART1_Init(19200)
Delay_ms(100)
' Initialize UART module at 9600 bps
' Wait for UART module to stabilize
while TRUE
if (UART1_Data_Ready() <> 0) then
uart_rd = UART1_Read()
'
UART1_Write(uart_rd)
'
end if
wend
end.
' Endless loop
' If data is received,
read the received data,
and send data via UART
HW Connection
UART HW connection
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
475
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
BUTTON LIBRARY
The Button library contains miscellaneous routines useful for a project development.
External dependencies of Button Library
The following variable
must be defined in all
projects using Button
library:
Description:
Example :
dim Button_Pin as
sbit sfr external
Declares button pins.
dim Button_Pin as
sbit at PINB.B0
dim
Button_Pin_Direction
as sbit sfr external
Declares direction of the
button pin.
dim
Button_Pin_Direction
as sbit at DDRB.B0
Library Routines
- Button
Button
Prototype
sub function Button(dim time_ms as byte, dim active_state as
byte) as byte
Returns
- 255 if the pin was in the active state for given period.
- 0 otherwise
The function eliminates the influence of contact flickering upon pressing a button (debouncing). The Button pin is tested just after the function call and then
again after the debouncing period has expired. If the pin was in the active state
in both cases then the function returns 255 (true).
Description
Parameters :
- time_ms : debouncing period in milliseconds
- active_state: determines what is considered as active state. Valid values: 0
(logical zero) and 1 (logical one)
Global variables :
Requires
- Button_Pin: Button pin line
- Button_Pin_Direction: Direction of the button pin
must be defined before using this function.
476
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
PORTC is inverted on every PORTB.B0 one-to-zero transition :
program Button
' Button connections
dim Button_Pin as sbit at PINB.B0
dim Button_Pin_Direction as sbit at DDRB.B0
' End Button connections
dim oldstate as bit
main:
Button_Pin_Direction = 0
Example
' Old state flag
' Set Button pin as input
DDRC = 0xFF
PORTC = 0xAA
' Configure PORTC as output
' Initial PORTC value
oldstate = 0
' oldstate initial value
while TRUE
if (Button(1, 1) = 1)
' Detect logical one
oldstate = 1
' Update flag
end if
if (oldstate and Button(1, 0)) then ' Detect one-to-zero
transition
PORTC = not PORTC
' Invert PORTC
oldstate = 0
' Update flag
end if
wend
' Endless loop
end.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
477
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
CONVERSIONS LIBRARY
mikroBasic PRO for AVR Conversions Library provides routines for numerals to strings and
BCD/decimal conversions.
Library Routines
You can get text representation of numerical value by passing it to one of the following routines:
-
ByteToStr
ShortToStr
WordToStr
IntToStr
LongintToStr
LongWordToStr
FloatToStr
The following sub functions convert decimal values to BCD and vice versa:
- Dec2Bcd
- Bcd2Dec16
- Dec2Bcd16
ByteToStr
Prototype
sub procedure ByteToStr(dim input as word, dim byref output as
string[2])
Returns
Nothing.
Converts input byte to a string. The output string is right justified and remaining
positions on the left (if any) are filled with blanks.
Description Parameters :
- input: byte to be converted
- output: destination string
478
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim t as word
txt as string[2]
...
t = 24
ByteToStr(t, txt) ' txt is " 24" (one blank here)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
ShortToStr
Prototype
sub procedure ShortToStr(dim input as short, dim byref output as
string[3])
Returns
Nothing.
Converts input short (signed byte) number to a string. The output string is right
justified and remaining positions on the left (if any) are filled with blanks.
Description Parameters :
- input: short number to be converted
- output: destination string
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim t as short
txt as string[3]
...
t = -24
ByteToStr(t, txt) ' txt is " -24" (one blank here)
WordToStr
Prototype
sub procedure WordToStr(dim input as word, dim byref output as
string[4])
Returns
Nothing.
Converts input word to a string. The output string is right justified and the
remaining positions on the left (if any) are filled with blanks.
Description Parameters :
- input: word to be converted
- output: destination string
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim t as word
txt as string[4]
...
t = 437
WordToStr(t, txt) ' txt is "
437" (two blanks here)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
479
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
IntToStr
Prototype
sub procedure IntToStr(dim input as integer, dim byref output as
string[5]
Returns
Nothing.
Converts input integer number to a string. The output string is right justified and
the remaining positions on the left (if any) are filled with blanks.
Description Parameters :
- input: integer number to be converted
- output: destination string
Requires
Example
Nothing.
dim input as integer
txt as string[5]
'...
input = -4220
IntToStr(input, txt)
' txt is ' -4220'
LongintToStr
Prototype
sub procedure LongintToStr(dim input as longint, dim byref output
as string[10])
Returns
Nothing.
Converts input longint number to a string. The output string is right justified and
the remaining positions on the left (if any) are filled with blanks.
Description Parameters :
- input: longint number to be converted
- output: destination string
Requires
Example
Nothing.
dim input as longint
txt as string[10]
'...
input = -12345678
IntToStr(input, txt)
480
' txt is '
-12345678'
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
LongWordToStr
Prototype
sub procedure LongWordToStr(dim input as longword, dim byref output as string[9])
Returns
Nothing.
Converts input double word number to a string. The output string is right justified and the remaining positions on the left (if any) are filled with blanks.
Description Parameters :
- input: double word number to be converted
- output: destination string
Requires
Example
Nothing.
dim input as longint
txt as string[9]
'...
input = 12345678
IntToStr(input, txt)
' txt is '
12345678'
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
481
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
FloatToStr
Prototype
Returns
sub function FloatToStr(dim input as real, dim byref output as
string[22])
-
3
2
1
0
if
if
if
if
input number is NaN
input number is -INF
input number is +INF
conversion was successful
Converts a floating point number to a string.
Parameters :
- input: floating point number to be converted
Description - output: destination string
The output string is left justified and null terminated after the last digit.
Note: Given floating point number will be truncated to 7 most significant digits
before conversion.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim ff1, ff2, ff3 as real
txt as string[22]
...
ff1 = -374.2
ff2 = 123.456789
ff3 = 0.000001234
FloatToStr(ff1, txt)
FloatToStr(ff2, txt)
FloatToStr(ff3, txt)
482
' txt is "-374.2"
' txt is "123.4567"
' txt is "1.234e-6"
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Dec2Bcd
Prototype
sub function Dec2Bcd(dim decnum as byte) as byte
Returns
Converted BCD value.
Converts input number to its appropriate BCD representation.
Description Parameters :
- decnum: number to be converted
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim a, b as byte
...
a = 22
b = Dec2Bcd(a) ' b equals 34
Bcd2Dec16
Prototype
sub function Bcd2Dec16(dim bcdnum as word) as word
Returns
Converted decimal value.
Converts 16-bit BCD numeral to its decimal equivalent.
Description Parameters :
- bcdnum: 16-bit BCD numeral to be converted
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim a, b as word
...
a = 0x1234
b = Bcd2Dec16(a)
' a equals 4660
' b equals 1234
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
483
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Dec2Bcd16
Prototype
sub function Dec2Bcd16(dim decnum as word) as word
Returns
Converted BCD value.
Converts decimal value to its BCD equivalent.
Description Parameters :
- decnum decimal number to be converted
484
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim a, b as word
...
a = 2345
b = Dec2Bcd16(a)
' b equals 9029
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
MATH LIBRARY
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR provides a set of library functions for floating point math handling.
See also Predefined Globals and Constants for the list of predefined math constants.
Library Functions
-
acos
asin
atan
atan2
ceil
cos
cosh
eval_poly
exp
fabs
floor
frexp
ldexp
log
log10
modf
pow
sin
sinh
sqrt
tan
tanh
acos
Prototype
sub function acos(dim x as real) as real
The function returns the arc cosine of parameter x; that is, the value whose
Description cosine is x. The input parameter x must be between -1 and 1 (inclusive). The
return value is in radians, between 0 and đ (inclusive).
asin
Prototype
sub function asin(dim x as real) as real
The function returns the arc sine of parameter x; that is, the value whose sine is
Description x. The input parameter x must be between -1 and 1 (inclusive). The return value
is in radians, between -Π/2 and Π/2 (inclusive).
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
485
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
atan
Prototype
sub function atan(dim arg as real) as real
The function computes the arc tangent of parameter arg; that is, the value
Description whose tangent is arg. The return value is in radians, between -Π/2 and Π/2
(inclusive).
atan2
Prototype
sub function atan2(dim y as real, dim x as real) as real
This is the two-argument arc tangent function. It is similar to computing the arc
tangent of y/x, except that the signs of both arguments are used to determine
Description
the quadrant of the result and x is permitted to be zero. The return value is in
radians, between -Π and Π (inclusive).
ceil
Prototype
sub function ceil(dim x as real) as real
Description The function returns value of parameter x rounded up to the next whole number.
cos
Prototype
sub function cos(dim arg as real) as real
Description The function returns the cosine of arg in radians. The return value is from -1 to 1.
cosh
Prototype
sub function cosh(dim x as real) as real
Description
The function returns the hyperbolic cosine of x, defined mathematically as
(ex+e-x)/2. If the value of x is too large (if overflow occurs), the function fails.
eval_poly
486
Prototype
sub function eval_poly(dim x as real, dim byref d as array[10] of
real, dim n as integer) as real
Description
Function Calculates polynom for number x, with coefficients stored in d[], for
degree n.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
exp
Prototype
sub function exp(dim x as real) as real
Description
The function returns the value of e — the base of natural logarithms — raised to
the power x (i.e. ex).
fabs
Prototype
sub function fabs(dim d as real) as real
Description The function returns the absolute (i.e. positive) value of d.
floor
Prototype
sub function floor(dim x as real) as real
Description The function returns the value of parameter x rounded down to the nearest integer.
frexp
Prototype
sub function frexp(dim value as real, dim byref eptr as integer)
as real
The function splits a floating-point value value into a normalized fraction and an
Description integral power of 2. The return value is a normalized fraction and the integer
exponent is stored in the object pointed to by eptr.
ldexp
Prototype
sub function ldexp(dim value as real, dim newexp as integer) as real
Description
The function returns the result of multiplying the floating-point number value by
2 raised to the power newexp (i.e. returns value * 2newexp).
log
Prototype
sub function log(dim x as real) as real
Description The function returns the natural logarithm of x (i.e. loge(x)).
log10
Prototype
sub function log10(dim x as real) as real
Description The function returns the base-10 logarithm of x (i.e. log10(x)).
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
487
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
modf
Prototype
sub function modf(dim val as real, dim byref iptr as real) as real
Description
The function returns the signed fractional component of val, placing its whole
number component into the variable pointed to by iptr.
pow
Prototype
sub function pow(dim x as real, dim y as real) as real
Description
The function returns the value of x raised to the power y (i.e. xy). If x is negative, the function will automatically cast y into longint.
sin
Prototype
sub function sin(dim arg as real) as real
Description The function returns the sine of arg in radians. The return value is from -1 to 1.
sinh
Prototype
sub function sinh(dim x as real) as real
Description
The function returns the hyperbolic sine of x, defined mathematically as (ex-e-x)/2.
If the value of x is too large (if overflow occurs), the function fails.
sqrt
Prototype
sub function sqrt(dim x as real) as real
Description The function returns the non negative square root of x.
tan
Prototype
sub function tan(dim x as real) as real
Description
The function returns the tangent of x in radians. The return value spans the
allowed range of floating point in mikroBasic PRO for AVR.
tanh
488
Prototype
sub function tanh(dim x as real) as real)
Description
The function returns the hyperbolic tangent of x, defined mathematically as
sinh(x)/cosh(x).
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
STRING LIBRARY
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR includes a library which automatizes string related tasks.
Library Functions
-
memchr
memcmp
memcpy
memmove
memset
strcat
strchr
strcmp
strcpy
strlen
strncat
strncpy
strspn
strcspn
strncmp
strpbrk
strrchr
strstr
memchr
Prototype
sub function memchr(dim p as ^byte, dim ch as byte, dim n as
word) as word
The function locates the first occurrence of the word ch in the initial n words of
memory area starting at the address p. The function returns the offset of this
occurrence from the memory address p or 0xFFFF if ch was not found.
Description
For the parameter p you can use either a numerical value (literal/variable/constant) indicating memory address or a dereferenced value of an object, for
example @mystring or @PORTB.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
489
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
memcmp
Prototype
sub function memcmp(dim p1, p2 as ^byte, dim n as word) as integer
The function returns a positive, negative, or zero value indicating the relationship of first n words of memory areas starting at addresses p1 and p2.
This function compares two memory areas starting at addresses p1 and p2 for n
words and returns a value indicating their relationship as follows:
Value
< 0
Description = 0
> 0
Meaning
p1 "less than" p2
p1 "equal to" p2
p1 "greater than" p2
The value returned by the function is determined by the difference between the
values of the first pair of words that differ in the strings being compared.
For parameters p1 and p2 you can use either a numerical value (literal/variable/constant) indicating memory address or a dereferenced value of an object,
for example @mystring or @PORTB.
memcpy
Prototype
Description
sub procedure memcpy(dim p1, p2 as ^byte, dim nn as word)
The function copies nn words from the memory area starting at the address p2
to the memory area starting at p1. If these memory buffers overlap, the memcpy
function cannot guarantee that words are copied before being overwritten. If
these buffers do overlap, use the memmove function.
For parameters p1 and p2 you can use either a numerical value (literal/variable/constant) indicating memory address or a dereferenced value of an object,
for example @mystring or @PORTB.
memmove
Prototype
sub procedure memmove(dim p1, p2, as ^byte, dim nn as word)
The function copies nn words from the memory area starting at the address p2
to the memory area starting at p1. If these memory buffers overlap, the Memmove
function ensures that the words in p2 are copied to p1 before being overwritten.
Description
For parameters p1 and p2 you can use either a numerical value (literal/variable/constant) indicating memory address or a dereferenced value of an object,
for example @mystring or @PORTB.
490
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
memset
Prototype
sub procedure memset(dim p as ^byte, dim character as byte, dim n
as word)
The function fills the first n words in the memory area starting at the address p
with the value of word character.
Description
For parameter p you can use either a numerical value (literal/variable/constant)
indicating memory address or a dereferenced value of an object, for example
@mystring or @PORTB.
strcat
Prototype
sub procedure strcat(dim byref s1, s2 as string[100])
Description
The function appends the value of string s2 to string s1 and terminates s1 with
a null character.
strchr
Prototype
sub function strchr(dim byref s as string[100], dim ch as byte)
as word
The function searches the string s for the first occurrence of the character ch.
The null character terminating s is not included in the search.
Description
The function returns the position (index) of the first character ch found in s; if no
matching character was found, the function returns 0xFFFF.
strcmp
Prototype
sub function strcmp(dim byref s1, s2 as string[100]) as short
The function lexicographically compares the contents of the strings s1 and s2
and returns a value indicating their relationship:
Value
< 0
Description = 0
> 0
Meaning
s1 "less than" s2
s1 "equal to" s2
s1 "greater than" s2
The value returned by the function is determined by the difference between the
values of the first pair of words that differ in the strings being compared.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
491
CHAPTER 6
Libraries
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
strcpy
Prototype
sub procedure strcpy(dim byref s1, s2 as string[100])
Description
The function copies the value of the string s2 to the string s1 and appends a
null character to the end of s1.
strcspn
Prototype
sub function strcspn(dim byref s1, s2 as string[100]) as word
The function searches the string s1 for any of the characters in the string s2.
Description
The function returns the index of the first character located in s1 that matches
any character in s2. If the first character in s1 matches a character in s2, a
value of 0 is returned. If there are no matching characters in s1, the length of
the string is returned (not including the terminating null character).
strlen
Prototype
sub function strlen(dim byref s as string[100]) as word
Description
The function returns the length, in words, of the string s. The length does not
include the null terminating character.
strncat
Prototype
sub procedure strncat(dim byref s1, s2 as string[100], dim size
as byte)
The function appends at most size characters from the string s2 to the string s1
Description and terminates s1 with a null character. If s2 is shorter than the size characters, s2 is copied up to and including the null terminating character.
492
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
strncmp
Prototype
sub function strncmp(dim byref s1, s2 as string[100], dim len as
byte) as short
The function lexicographically compares the first len words of the strings s1 and
s2 and returns a value indicating their relationship:
Value
< 0
Description = 0
> 0
Meaning
s1 "less than" s2
s1 "equal to" s2
s1 "greater than" s2
The value returned by the function is determined by the difference between the
values of the first pair of words that differ in the strings being compared (within
first len words).
strncpy
Prototype
sub procedure strncpy(dim byref s1, s2 as string[100], dim size
as word)
The function copies at most size characters from the string s2 to the string s1.
Description If s2 contains fewer characters than size, s1 is padded out with null characters
up to the total length of the size characters.
strpbrk
Prototype
sub function strpbrk(dim byref s1, s2 as string[100]) as word
The function searches s1 for the first occurrence of any character from the
string s2. The null terminator is not included in the search. The function returns
Description
an index of the matching character in s1. If s1 contains no characters from s2,
the function returns 0xFFFF.
strrchr
Prototype
sub function strrchr(dim byref s as string[100], dim ch as byte)
as word
The function searches the string s for the last occurrence of the character ch.
The null character terminating s is not included in the search. The function
Description
returns an index of the last ch found in s; if no matching character was found,
the function returns 0xFFFF.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
493
CHAPTER 6
Libraries
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
strspn
Prototype
sub function strspn(dim byref s1, s2 as string[100]) as byte
The function searches the string s1 for characters not found in the s2 string.
Description
The function returns the index of first character located in s1 that does not
match a character in s2. If the first character in s1 does not match a character in
s2, a value of 0 is returned. If all characters in s1 are found in s2, the length of
s1 is returned (not including the terminating null character).
strstr
Prototype
sub function strstr(dim byref s1, s2 as string[100]) as word
The function locates the first occurrence of the string s2 in the string s1 (excluding the terminating null character).
Description
494
The function returns a number indicating the position of the first occurrence of
s2 in s1; if no string was found, the function returns 0xFFFF. If s2 is a null string,
the function returns 0.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
TIME LIBRARY
The Time Library contains functions and type definitions for time calculations in the UNIX time format which counts the number of seconds since the "epoch". This is very convenient for programs
that work with time intervals: the difference between two UNIX time values is a real-time difference measured in seconds.
What is the epoch?
Originally it was defined as the beginning of 1970 GMT. ( January 1, 1970 Julian day ) GMT,
Greenwich Mean Time, is a traditional term for the time zone in England.
The TimeStruct type is a structure type suitable for time and date storage.
Library Routines
- Time_dateToEpoch
- Time_epochToDate
- Time_datediff
Time_dateToEpoch
Prototype
sub function Time_dateToEpoch(dim byref ts as TimeStruct) as
longint
Returns
Number of seconds since January 1, 1970 0h00mn00s.
This function returns the UNIX time : number of seconds since January 1, 1970
0h00mn00s.
Description
Parameters :
- ts: time and date value for calculating UNIX time.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim ts1 as TimeStruct
Epoch as longint
...
' what is the epoch of the date in ts ?
epoch = Time_dateToEpoch(ts1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
495
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Time_epochToDate
Prototype
sub procedure Time_epochToDate(dim e as longint, dim byref ts as
TimeStruct)
Returns
Nothing.
Converts the UNIX time to time and date.
Description
Parameters :
- e: UNIX time (seconds since UNIX epoch)
- ts: time and date structure for storing conversion output
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim ts2 as TimeStruct
epoch as longint
...
' what date is epoch 1234567890 ?
epoch = 1234567890
Time_epochToDate(epoch,ts2)
Time_dateDiff
Prototype
sub function Time_dateDiff(dim t1 as ^TimeStruct, dim t2 as
^TimeStruct) as longint
Returns
Time difference in seconds as a signed long.
This function compares two dates and returns time difference in seconds as a
signed long. The result is positive if t1 is before t2, null if t1 is the same as t2
and negative if t1 is after t2.
Description
Parameters :
- t1: time and date structure (the first comparison parameter)
- t2: time and date structure (the second comparison parameter)
496
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim ts1, ts2 as TimeStruct
diff as longint
...
' how many seconds between these two dates contained in ts1 and
ts2 buffers?
diff = Time_dateDiff(ts1, ts2)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
Library Example
Demonstration of Time library routines usage for time calculations in UNIX time format.
program Time_Demo
dim epoch, diff as longint
'***********************************
ts1, ts2 as TimeStruct
'***********************************
main:
ts1.ss
ts1.mn
ts1.hh
ts1.md
ts1.mo
ts1.yy
=
=
=
=
=
=
0
7
17
23
5
2006
' *
' * What is the epoch of the date in ts ?
' *
epoch = Time_dateToEpoch(@ts1)
' 1148404020
' *
' * What date is epoch 1234567890 ?
' *
epoch = 1234567890
Time_epochToDate(epoch, @ts2)
0x04, 0x02, 0x07D9)
' {0x1E, 0x1F, 0x17, 0x0D,
' *
' * How much seconds between this two dates ?
' *
diff = Time_dateDiff(@ts1, @ts2)
' 86163870
end.
TimeStruct type definition
structure TimeStruct
dim ss as byte ' seconds
dim mn as byte ' minutes
dim hh as byte ' hours
dim md as byte ' day in month, from 1 to 31
dim wd as byte
' day in week, monday=0, tuesday=1, .... sunday=6
dim mo as byte
' month number, from 1 to 12 (and not from 0
to 11 as with unix C time !)
dim yy as word
' year Y2K compliant, from 1892 to 2038
end structure
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
497
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
TRIGONOMETRY LIBRARY
The mikroBasic PRO for AVR implements fundamental trigonometry functions. These functions
are implemented as look-up tables. Trigonometry functions are implemented in integer format in
order to save memory.
Library Routines
- sinE3
- cosE3
sinE3
Prototype
sub function sinE3(dim angle_deg as word) as integer
Returns
The function returns the sine of input parameter.
The function calculates sine multiplied by 1000 and rounded to the nearest integer:
result = round(sin(angle_deg)*1000)
Description Parameters:
- angle_deg: input angle in degrees
Note: Return value range: -1000..1000.
498
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim res as integer
...
res = sinE3(45) ' result is 707
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic PRO for AVR
Libraries
cosE3
Prototype
sub function cosE3(dim angle_deg as word) as integer
Returns
The function returns the cosine of input parameter.
The function calculates cosine multiplied by 1000 and rounded to the nearest
integer:
result = round(cos(angle_deg)*1000)
Description
Parameters:
- angle_deg: input angle in degrees
Note: Return value range: -1000..1000.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim res as integer
...
res = cosE3(196) ' result is -193
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
499
Mouser Electronics
Authorized Distributor
Click to View Pricing, Inventory, Delivery & Lifecycle Information:
mikroElektronika:
MIKROE-722
">